Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove

Phase 1 Identifying the challenge: Inequality in Brighton and Hove

Phase 1 Final Report December 2007

Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion Ltd (OCSI) EDuce Ltd

Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI)

15-17 Middle St Brighton BN1 1AL

Tel: 01273 201 345 Email: [email protected] Web: www.ocsi.co.uk

EDuce ltd

St John’s Innovation Centre Cowley Road Cambridge CB4 0WS

Tel: 01223 421 685 Email: [email protected] Web: www.educe.co.uk

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 2 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Contents

Section 1 Executive summary 4 Section 2 Introduction and context 9 Section 3 Key issues coming out of our analysis 14 Appendix A The Brighton and Hove context 54 Appendix B LAA theme: Developing a prosperous and sustainable economy 74 Appendix C LAA theme: Ensuring all our children and young people have the best possible start in life 98 Appendix D LAA theme: A healthy city that cares for vulnerable people and tackles deprivation and injustice 117 Appendix E LAA theme: A safe city that values our unique environment 138 Appendix F Key indicator maps 154 Appendix G Bibliography of sources 155 Appendix H Geography of Brighton and Hove 163 Appendix I Small cities comparator areas 168 Appendix J Acknowledgements 177

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 3 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Section 1 Executive summary

1.1 Introduction and context to the Reducing Inequality Review

Project aims 1.1.1 The aim of the Review has been to inform the Public Service Board and Local Strategic Partnership about • the effectiveness of the city’s Neighbourhood Renewal Strategy • policy options for the future to reduce inequality • measures of success that could be used as targets in future 1.1.2 It has involved an exhaustive analysis of the evidence base, with a scope incorporating not just neighbourhoods but also disadvantage amongst client groups and communities of interest across the city, relating to factors such as race, disability, gender and sexual orientation.

The Review has been carried out in two phases: this report presents the results from Phase 1 1.1.3 The Review has two distinct phases: • Phase 1: to assess current data and information to see where inequality is most acute, both in terms of areas of the city but also for particular groups such as people with disabilities and people from a Black or minority ethnic background. This report presents the results from the research carried out in Phase 1, highlighting inequality issues that need addressing • Phase 2: to review the way partners across Brighton and Hove have been working to reduce inequality through strategies such as Neighbourhood Renewal and New Deal for Communities, and to suggest the changes needed in our approach. The results from Phase 2 are presented in a separate report.

Reducing inequality can meet both social and economic outcomes 1.1.4 Tackling inequality is about both social justice and economic development. 1.1.5 The social justice rationale for tackling inequality is based on developing a fairer society. Programmes here might aim to develop equality of process (treating people the same way), equality of outcome (ensuring that people have equal shares of “the cake”) or equality of opportunity (ensuring that people have the “substantive freedom” to do something).1 1.1.6 There is also a clear economic rationale to tackling inequality. Treasury work, for example, has identified that the key factor explaining the UK’s low productivity compared to countries such as the US and France is the lower level of skills2. Programmes here would aim to reduce economic inefficiency by making better use of Brighton and Hove’s assets: for example through tackling low skills and other barriers to employment, along with action involving employers to improve the match between job requirements and what jobseekers have to offer.

1 For a fuller discussion of these questions see Burchardt, T (2006) The Foundations for Measuring Inequality www.theequalitiesreview.org.uk/documents/pdf/foundations4measuring.pdf 2 Treasury, DTI (2001) Productivity in the UK 3 – The Regional Dimension

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 4 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

A note on terminology - what we mean by inequality 1.1.7 In this report, we are using “inequality” as a label for deprivation and disadvantage, for example identifying those groups or areas that are doing significantly worse than the city as a whole.

1.2 Key information coming out of our analysis in Phase 1

Brighton and Hove in context • Latest estimates suggest relatively slow population growth, with only a 0.6% increase in the population between 2001 and 2006. However, growth is faster for working age groups. • The population profile of the city is shifting. The city ranks among the 10% of LAs across England with the highest numbers of recently registered migrant workers, with nearly 10,000 registered for National Insurance numbers between 2005/06 and 2006/07. In 2001, 15% of the city’s residents were born outside England, and 20% of all new births in 2005 were to mothers born outside the UK. • The city has a fast-growing and relatively strong economy. The stock of VAT registered businesses grew by nearly one-third between 1995 and 2005, significantly faster than across other small cities, with roughly 30,000 jobs created over the same period. • Brighton and Hove has a highly educated workforce. According to the most recent estimates, nearly two in five residents have degree-level qualifications, well above other small cities, and national and regional averages.

Inequality in Brighton is about both deprived places and deprived people • The city contains some of the most significantly deprived areas in England, particularly in East Brighton, Queens Park and Moulsecoomb & Bevendean wards. 8% of the city’s neighbourhoods are amongst the most deprived 10% in England, and 21% amongst the most deprived 20% (based on the Index of Multiple Deprivation 2004) • Some 14 out of the city’s 21 wards contain at least one ‘Super Output Area’ (SOAs) – smaller areas defined for the Census with around 1,500 people – in the worst 20% nationally • Concentrations are more pronounced when analysed at the more detailed Output Area level • Trend data appears to show that the most deprived areas across the city are not “closing the gap” on important indicators of equality • Some groups are particularly concentrated in the most deprived areas, eg, the Bangladeshi and Black African populations (though not minority ethnic groups overall) • The city is home to large numbers of people experiencing inequality, however the most deprived areas in the city are significantly more deprived than the city as a whole – with levels on many indicators two or three times the city average in these neighbourhoods • However, the majority of people facing inequality do not live in the most deprived 20% of areas across the city

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 5 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

There is a significant group across the city with multiple needs –concentrated in the most deprived areas • Census data identifies a significant group of 1,500 households where people are experiencing multiple disadvantage across the city, with more than 25% in the most deprived 10% neighbourhoods • Children in low income families and with special educational needs are even more concentrated in the most deprived areas • There is a significant number of people with multiple needs living in social housing (with over two-thirds of households experiencing at least two out of the following dimensions of inequality: income, benefits dependency, health, crime and environment)

Worklessness across Brighton and Hove • While unemployment levels are falling across the city, wider worklessness remains a challenge • Nearly three times as many people (just under 13,000 people) are on Incapacity Benefit (IB) as on Jobseekers Allowance (JSA – 4,500 people) • Many more people experience unemployment than shown by the figures at the monthly count of unemployment. Flows on and off benefit identify that up to 17,000 people have been on JSA over the course of the last year – nearly four times the JSA count. • Long-term unemployment is more marked amongst older people on JSA • Black Caribbean, Black African and Pakistani ethnic groups are more likely to be unemployed than white ethnic groups across Brighton and Hove • Women are less likely to be unemployed, also significantly less likely to be economically active • Other groups with higher levels of worklessness include those with low skills, the homeless, ex-offenders and drug users.

Those with low skills are being squeezed out in the labour market • Those with low skills in Brighton are facing increasing pressure in competing for work across the city through (1) scarcity of appropriate jobs; (2) competition from those with higher qualifications; and (3) competition from other groups including students and migrant workers • As a result, the employment rate is poor for those with low or no skills (at 53%, a third lower than the Brighton average). Economic activity rates for this group are also low.

Significant barriers are faced by disabled groups • Disability and incapacity benefit levels are high across the city. More than 50% of all working age people on benefit claim as a result of incapacity. • Nearly 20% of all people over 60 receive disability-related benefits • Disabled people are likely to be claiming benefit long-term – over five years for around half of IB claimants • Disabled children are at greater risk of living in poverty • Brighton pupils with Special Educational Needs (SEN) are less than one-quarter as likely to attain good GCSEs compared with those pupils without SEN

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 6 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

• Disabled people have a higher risk of experiencing hate crime Those with mental health issues face additional barriers • The city shows very high levels of mental health issues, and there are relative concentrations of people with mental health conditions in the most deprived SOAs • Over half of those out-of-work due to long-term sickness have mental health problems • Brighton and Hove has one of the highest suicide rates in the country Groups struggling to access affordable housing • Lack of affordable accommodation can compound a range of inequalities. Limited access to affordable housing is a significant problem across Brighton and Hove. • The city saw the second highest average house price increases of any city in the country over the decade between 1996 and 2006, with house prices increasing by 260% • Homeless levels have fallen (573 households in priority need in 2005/06) but remain amongst the highest in the country

Children and young adults are at risk • Nearly one-quarter of the city’s children (11,000) live in ‘out of work’ households. Lone parent households account for nearly 70% of all out of work households in the city, mainly headed by women • Child poverty is heavily concentrated in the eastern areas of Brighton and Hove • GCSE attainment levels are increasing but still below national and regional levels; children from low income households do significantly worse than the average across the city • Attainment levels at Key Stage 3 across the city remain well below national and regional levels • Young adults are most likely to commit crime, and most likely to be victims of crime • 650 young people are ‘Not in Employment, Education or Training’ (NEET). This group are likely to face health and housing problems • Teenage conception levels are declining across Brighton and Hove, and are well below NRF averages (although higher than regional and national averages)

Community strength and participation • Research identifies that community strength can contribute to economic and social outcomes, but is difficult to reliably define or measure. The Community Level Infrastructure Audit carried out by the The Trust for Developing Communities identified six key indicators of community capacity, though these were only examined for the Neighbourhood Renewal Areas across the city. • Locally, surveys of local partner managers highlight that the community engagement work funded through NRF over the last few years has improved the delivery of services at a neighbourhood level. We have picked-up issues around service delivery in Phase 2 of the project.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 7 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Health inequalities • Life expectancy across the city is rising, however male life expectancy is well below the regional average. The gap in life expectancy between the Neighbourhood Renewal Areas and the rest of the city identifies that there remain wide variations within the city. • Analysis of healthy life expectancy data also identifies a high variation in healthy life expectancy, with the most deprived areas across the city having significantly lower levels of healthy life expectancy.

Substance misuse • Brighton and Hove has high levels of substance misuse. The Director of Public Health annual report identifies that the city has the highest rate of problem drug users (opiates and/or crack cocaine) in the South East, with the second highest rate of drug-related deaths in the country • An estimated 45,000 adults are hazardous drinkers, and the city is ranked the 2nd highest local authority in England and Wales for alcohol-related deaths in men

Communities at increased risk of inequality • As well as spatial analysis of inequality, we have also explored whether groups and communities are experiencing high levels of inequality. Some groups and communities are clearly affected by the effects of discrimination and other social barriers which impact on their life chances and opportunities. The impacts of discrimination in affecting inequalities should not be underestimated.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 8 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Section 2 Introduction and context

2.1 Introduction and context 2.1.1 There is genuine debate in Brighton and Hove around the most appropriate strategies for reducing inequality across the city. In commissioning this Reducing Inequality Review, Brighton and Hove City Council and the 2020 Community Partnership (the LSP) seek to guide improvements in how the city is working to reduce inequality for its communities and residents. 2.1.2 The Review has two distinct phases: • Phase 1: to assess current data and information to see where inequality is most acute, both in terms of areas of the city but also for particular groups such as people with disabilities and people from a Black or minority ethnic background. This report presents the results from the research carried out in Phase 1, highlighting inequality issues that need addressing • Phase 2: to review the way partners across Brighton and Hove have been working to reduce inequality through strategies such as Neighbourhood Renewal and New Deal for Communities, and to suggest the changes needed in our approach. The results from Phase 2 are presented in a separate report.

Reducing inequality can meet both social and economic outcomes 2.1.3 Tackling inequality is about both social justice and economic development. 2.1.4 The social justice rationale for tackling inequality is based on developing a fairer society. Programmes here might aim to develop equality of process (treating people the same way), equality of outcome (ensuring that people have equal shares of “the cake”) or equality of opportunity (ensuring that people have the “substantive freedom” to do something).3 2.1.5 There is also a clear economic rationale to tackling inequality. Treasury work, for example, has identified that the key factor explaining the UK’s low productivity compared to countries such as the US and France is the lower level of skills4. Programmes here would aim to reduce economic inefficiency by making better use of Brighton and Hove’s assets: for example through tackling low skills and other barriers to employment, along with action involving employers to improve the match between job requirements and what jobseekers have to offer.

A note on terminology - what we mean by inequality 2.1.6 In this report, we are using “inequality” as a label for deprivation and disadvantage, for example identifying those groups or areas that are doing significantly worse than the city as a whole. Why carry out the review now? 2.1.7 The current Neighbourhood Renewal Strategy for Brighton & Hove was adopted in 2002. This provided a strong direction for work in the city to reduce disadvantage between neighbourhoods. However, a great deal has changed since the Strategy was produced, and there is now a recognition that the city’s approach should be updated,

3 For a fuller discussion of these questions see Burchardt, T (2006) The Foundations for Measuring Inequality www.theequalitiesreview.org.uk/documents/pdf/foundations4measuring.pdf 4 Treasury, DTI (2001) Productivity in the UK 3 – The Regional Dimension

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 9 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

based on the most recent evidence that looks not only at inequalities in parts of the city but also inequality experienced by particular groups of residents. 2.1.8 There are also changes in the way that renewal work is funded. There is a growing emphasis on the role of the Local Area Agreement and the possible end of specific grant streams for renewal activity. The recent Working Neighbourhood Fund provides transitional funding for Brighton and Hove – this is explored further in the Phase 2 report. 2.1.9 This review will provide the LSP and the Family of Partnerships with the most current information available, and will help identify the priorities that partners should collectively tackle in order to reduce inequality. These priorities should be reflected in the 2008/9 – 2010/11 Local Area Agreement.

Links with the Multiple-Disadvantaged Groups project 2.1.10 The Brighton and Hove Multiple-Disadvantaged Groups project seeks to identify those people across the city experiencing multiple disadvantages, based on analysing locally- held service data at individual level. 2.1.11 This Reducing Inequality Review and Multiple-Disadvantaged Groups projects are complementary: • Data from the Multiple-Disadvantaged Groups on the most excluded groups across the city will most likely be useful at an operational level, in targeting specific interventions at those with multiple needs living in Council housing • The Reducing Inequality Review is strategic, feeding into policy-making across a broad range of groups and issues across the city. 2.1.12 In this project we have analysed a range of nationally-published and local partner data on multiple disadvantage groups, for example looking at children from low income households who have Special Educational Needs, and households experiencing low skills, unemployment, and health issues. Our results from this analysis are summarised in Section 3.4. 2.1.13 Data on those multiple-disadvantaged groups living in Council housing would add to our understanding of groups with multiple needs across the city. However, the Multiple-Disadvantaged Groups project is ongoing, and no information has been made available to use in this review.

2.2 How we have carried out this phase of the Review

This report presents the results from the desk-based research carried out as Phase 1 of the Review 2.2.1 This report presents evidence on levels of inequality across Brighton and Hove. We highlight key issues based on the current demographic, social, economic and environmental profile of the city. Analysis is presented for the city as a whole, and where available is presented for small areas and communities across the city. 2.2.2 Where data is available we examine trends over time. However we do not here explicitly examine performance for the city and Neighbourhood Renewal Areas against the Local Area Agreement and other targets – this analysis has been carried out as part of Phase 2. 2.2.3 The desk-based analysis draws together existing research carried out by local partners. We have also carried out additional primary analysis where relevant. This analysis was

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 10 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

carried out over a 6 week period in July and August 2007. Feedback from the September 2007 draft report has been incorporated for this final report.

Identifying inequality at small area level 2.2.4 Throughout this report we have examined information at small area. Under each section, and where data is available, we have identified those areas faring badly on a range of outcome measures. GIS maps of the socio-economic indicators have been developed, and are available on CD. Appendix F lists the mapped indicators. 2.2.5 We have examined trends over time for small areas, where robust outcome data is available. Our analysis here compares the 20% most deprived areas across the city with the rest of the city, and is summarised in Section 3 of this report. In Phase 2 of the project we explore performance of the local priority Neighbourhood Renewal Areas. 2.2.6 In previous work, we have statistically modelled the Index of Multiple Deprivation 2004 down to Output Area level5. We have mapped this dataset across the city, providing the most detailed small area estimate of inequality levels available across Brighton and Hove. Our analysis and maps are provided in Section 3 of this report.

Identifying inequality for particular groups, including multiply-deprived groups 2.2.7 As well as spatial analysis of inequality, we have also identified groups and communities experiencing high levels of inequality. Our analysis has drawn on a range of local sources, as well as carrying out additional primary research – the chief limitation here is the availability of appropriate information. 2.2.8 As well as identifying those groups experiencing inequality, we also identify how particular groups are concentrated in the most deprived areas across the city. For example we identify that two-in-five (40%) of all children across the city living in out-of- work households are living in the most deprived fifth of areas across the city. This analysis is provided in Section 3.

This Phase 1 report focuses on levels of inequality across the city: In Phase 2 we explore the success of local programmes 2.2.9 The evidence presented in this report identifies levels of inequality across the city, and for particular areas and communities. In effect this is a “needs analysis” for Brighton and Hove. The issues and analysis highlighted in this report set the scene for Phase 2 of the Review. 2.2.10 Phase 2 commenced in October 2007, following delivery of the draft Phase 1 report, and reported in December 2007. Phase 2 uses the analysis carried out in Phase 1 to make recommendations as to the strategic approaches that the city should develop to address priority areas of inequality beyond 2007/8. This involves: • Quantitative and qualitative analysis of the city’s performance against: o the Neighbourhood Renewal Strategy o Neighbourhood Renewal floor targets o NDC performance targets o LAA performance outcomes and targets relating to reducing disadvantage o performance in comparable local authority areas with Neighbourhood Renewal Strategies o national performance benchmarks for Neighbourhood Renewal

5 Each Output Area covers roughly 125 households, compared with an average of 600 households for Super Output Areas. OCSI (2006). Index of Multiple Deprivation 2004 Output Area Models.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 11 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

o current strategies for ‘narrowing the gap’ for specific communities of interest within the city and best practice approaches to tackling disadvantage as experienced by those groups, including BME communities • Recommendations based on the above information on: o the fitness of the current Neighbourhood Renewal Strategy at reducing inequality in the city and the priorities to be addressed over the next 5-10 years, identifying specific interventions that have had a positive impact on outcomes, and approaches that have been less successful o the fitness of the city’s current equalities strategies at reducing inequality for specific communities of interest or identity and priorities to be addressed over the next 5-10 years o how to address underperformance in relation to the Neighbourhood Renewal Strategy and LAA performance outcomes, including floor targets o how to address inequality through planning arrangements and the Local Development Framework o the management and infrastructure support arrangements needed to deliver a comprehensive approach to tackling inequality for neighbourhoods and communities in the city beyond 2007/8 o how to ensure maximum efficiency from future Strategy directions and management/ support arrangements 2.2.11 Phase 2 of the Review has involved a range of people and organisations across the city. Around 20 individual interviews have been held, and four consultative ‘round-table’ sessions. This part of the review also compares the city against similar areas that have also received neighbourhood renewal funding. The Review does not include field research, so we have not carried out surveys of residents or held local meetings.

We have drawn on key local research and local partner datasets 2.2.12 As well as primary analysis, in this project we have drawn on a wide range of local research. A full bibliography is given in Appendix G.

2.3 Structure of this report 2.3.1 As highlighted above, this report presents the results from the desk-based research carried out as Phase 1 of the Review. The main part of this report (Section 3) explores key issues coming out from the research. Under each issue we highlight levels of inequality across the city, as well as for particular neighbourhoods and communities. 2.3.2 The bulk of the desk-based research is provided in the Appendices to this report. Appendix A sets the context for Brighton and Hove, looking at population groups and trends across the city, as well as overall levels of deprivation and low income. Appendices B to E cover each of the four LAA themes - Developing a prosperous and sustainable economy (Appendix B); Ensuring all our children and young people have the best possible start in life (Appendix C); A healthy city that cares for vulnerable people and tackles deprivation and injustice (Appendix D); and A safe city that values our unique environment (Appendix E). 2.3.3 Mapped GIS outputs have been provided for all key socioeconomic indicators used in the analysis that are available to small area – Appendix F lists the mapped indicators, and maps are provided on an accompanying CD. 2.3.4 The final Appendices provide the bibliography of sources consulted (Appendix G), reference on the geography of Brighton and Hove (Appendix H), details of the small cities comparator areas (Appendix I), and list of acknowledgements (Appendix J).

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 12 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

2.4 Acknowledgements F.1.1 There are many people we must thank for their interest and input to the Reducing Inequality Review, with a special note of gratitude to Richard Butcher-Tuset (Policy Team Manager, Brighton and Hove City Council) and Libby Young (Policy Development Officer, Brighton and Hove City Council / East Brighton NDC Partnership)

Steering group F.1.2 In addition to Richard and Libby, the steering group for this project comprised: • John Austin-Locke - Policy Performance & Community Participation Manager, Housing, Brighton and Hove City Council • Keith Beadle – Community and Voluntary Sector Forum • Paula Black – Interim Research and Consultation Manager, Brighton and Hove City Council • Deborah Georgiou- Chief Executives Policy Team, Brighton and Hove City Council (until August 2007) • Barbara Green - Performance Manager, Brighton and Hove City Council • Nick Hibberd - Head of Housing Needs, Brighton and Hove City Council • Liz Hobden - Local Development Team Manager, Planning, Brighton and Hove City Council • Judith Macho - AD Public Safety (responsibility for Neighbourhood Renewal & NDC) , Brighton and Hove City Council • Furrakh Mirza - Equalities Manager, Brighton and Hove City Council • Simon Newell - 2020 Community Partnership Officer • John Routledge, Voluntary Sector & External Funding Manager, Brighton and Hove City Council • Jugal Sharma - Interim Director of Housing, Brighton and Hove City Council 2.4.1 We would also like to say a special thank you for the support offered to this project by: • Marilyn Taylor, Neighbourhood Renewal Advisor • Di Woolloff, Area Lead for Sussex and Surrey, GOSE 2.4.2 A full list of acknowledgements is provided in Appendix J.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 13 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Section 3 Key issues coming out of our analysis

3.1 Introduction 3.1.1 In this Section we explore the key issues coming out from our analysis carried out in Phase 1 of the Reducing Inequality Review, in order to set the scene for the consultation phase of the project. Under each issue we highlight levels of inequality across the city, as well as for particular neighbourhoods and communities. 3.1.2 We cover the following areas: • Brighton and Hove in context • Inequality in Brighton is about both deprived places and deprived people • There is a significant group across the city with multiple needs – heavily concentrated in the most deprived areas • Worklessness across Brighton and Hove • Those with low skills are being squeezed out in the labour market • Significant barriers are faced by disabled groups • Those with mental health issues face additional barriers • Groups struggling to access affordable housing • Children and young adults are at risk • Community strength and participation • Health inequalities • Substance misuse • Other issues • What is the evidence that particular communities are at increased risk of inequality? 3.1.3 We examine each of these areas in turn. Under each area we highlight the evidence, and draw out preliminary implications for the Phase 2 discussions to pick up. For full details of the data sources and analysis, please see the data Appendices A to E attached to this report.

Comparator areas 3.1.4 Throughout this report, we draw comparisons with the region and England as a whole. We also benchmark against a ‘small cities’ comparator area. This is based on 15 cities across England with populations in the range of 150,000 to 300,000. See Appendix I for a full definition of the small cities comparator areas.

3.2 Brighton and Hove in context

Latest estimates suggest relatively slow population growth 3.2.1 The most recent information identifies over a quarter of a million people living in Brighton and Hove (255,000)6. Compared with the average across the South-East and small cities as a whole, the city has a relatively big working age population, and slightly lower levels of both children and older people. 3.2.2 The revised population estimates published in September 2007 suggest that in recent years Brighton and Hove has experienced relatively slow population growth – with the

6 ONS Mid Year Estimates 2006

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 14 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

city population increasing by only 0.6% from 2001 to 2006. This is contrasts with previous estimates showing relatively fast growth across the city7. 3.2.3 The city is growing more slowly than the average across other small cities. (3.6% growth over the same period)8. Across the city, the working-age population is growing faster than the population as a whole, with the fastest growth seen in the 40-44 year old groups. Older groups are decreasing in number, in contrast to other areas across the country. These trends are projected to continue, with the city’s population projected to increase to over 275,000 by 20299.

The population profile of the city is shifting 3.2.4 Since 1998 migration has been the principal component of population change in the UK, overtaking natural change through births and deaths10. In 2001, 45,000 people moved into or around Brighton and Hove. This represents 18% of the city's population migrating from a previous address in 2001. This is significantly higher than the national average (12%), and the 14th highest migration level of all Local Authorities in the country11. 3.2.5 International levels of migration are particularly high. The city now ranks among the 10% of LAs across England with the highest numbers of recently registered migrant workers, with nearly 10,000 registered for National Insurance numbers between 2005/06 and 2006/0712. • In 2001, 15% of the city’s residents were born outside England13 – well above national and regional levels. 20% of all new births in 2005 were to mothers born outside the UK14. • The process of enlargement of the EU, and the recent accession of Romania and Bulgaria, make the scale of immigration from CEECs particularly important. 20% of the nearly 10,000 overseas workers who registered for a National Insurance Number15 between 2005/06 and 2006/07, were from Poland16.

Communities across Brighton and Hove 3.2.6 The 2001 Census estimated that there were just over 14,200 people from Black and Minority Ethnic (BME) groups17 across Brighton and Hove - 5.7% of the city’s population. This is below the average for small cities (7.1%) and well below the average for England (9.1%). No single group dominates the BME population, with Indians making

7 Revised ONS Mid Year Estimates were published in September 2007 with new estimates developed for 2006 and previous estimates for 2001 to 2005 revised to take into account a number of factors including: distribution of international in-migrants to regional and local authority level; and the distribution of international out-migrants to local authority level. 8 ONS Mid Year Estimates 2006 9 Ibid, 10 Institute for Community Cohesion (2007), Estimating the Scale and Impact of Migration at the Local Level. 11 Census 2001 12 Based on overseas workers National Insurance Number (NINO) registrations 13 Source: Census 2001 14 Source: ONS 2005 15 Whilst NINO data provide important information it should be noted that many workers may not be registered. It is likely therefore, that immigration is underestimated. 16 Source DWP: NINOs for overseas workers. 2005/06 and 2006/07 17 The term BME is used in this report to refer to all people who are not classified as White British, White Irish or White Other in the 2001 Census.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 15 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

up the largest component (with just over 2,100 registered on the Census), also significant numbers of Black African (1,400), Chinese (1,300), and Bangladeshis (975). However, 10% of all migration into the city (with a similar level in the East Brighton NDC area) is from BME communities18, and BME groups have increased in size by 35% over the period 2001 to 2004 (against a national increase of 13%). 3.2.7 Other significant groups across the city include: an estimated 35,000 people from LGBT groups (although a much smaller 2,600 same sex households registered in the Census); 20,000 full-time students registered at the time of the 2001 Census (and more than 30,000 in the two Universities once part-time study is taken into account); more than 13,000 children living in lone parent households across the city (90% of these families are headed by women); more than 17,000 people receiving Disability Living Allowance or Attendance Allowance benefits; and nearly 22,000 people providing unpaid care.

A fast-growing and relatively strong economy … 3.2.8 The Brighton and Hove economy has performed relatively strongly since the mid 1990s, with important falls in unemployment and rises in average earnings. In 2002, the economy of Brighton and Hove was estimated to be worth around £3.3 billion, accounting for 2.7% of the South East overall output, despite comprising only 2.5% of the region’s population. 3.2.9 The stock of VAT registered businesses grew by 31% between 1995 and 2005, significantly faster than across other small cities (+15%)19. This expansion was reflected in the creation of new employment and the rise of GVA per capita20. Around 30,000 jobs were created between 1995 and 200521, and GVA per head increased from £10,427 in 1995 to £16,406 in 200422. Between 2000 and 2005 GVA per capita in the city grew by almost 29%, a much higher rate than in the South East (23%) and England (22%)23. 3.2.10 Brighton and Hove has a highly educated workforce. According to the most recent estimates, the proportion of residents with degree qualification is 38%, well above the ‘all small cities’ average of 23.5%24 and the national and regional averages (27% and 30.5%, respectively).25 The city’s two universities produce around 7,000 graduates a year, of whom more than 30% stay in the city for at least the first six months 26. This, coupled with in-migration of highly educated people, make the city’s workforce amongst the most highly educated in the country.

… but with high levels of inequality 3.2.11 However, the city contains some of the most deprived areas across the Country, and is home to large numbers of deprived people. On the standard Index of Multiple Deprivation 2004 (IMD 2004) measure, the city is the 2nd most deprived district in the

18 Source: Census, 2001. 19 Small Business Service, cited in Brighton and Hove economic strategy. 20The GVA measures the contribution to the economy of each individual producer, industry or sector in the United Kingdom. It is a measure of the value of the goods and services produced in the economy. 21 OCSI 2007 (based on ONS Annual Business Inquiry) 22 OCSI 2007 (from ONS 2006). 23 OCSI 2007 (from ONS 2006). 24 APS 2006 25 ONS Annual Population Survey 2006. 26 Brighton and Hove City Council (2003): Best Value Review. Available from peace.brighton-hove.gov.uk/.../$File/Item+20+-+BVR+Economic+Development+full+Report.doc

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 16 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

South-East (after Hastings), with 14 of the 164 Super Output Areas (SOAs)27 across the city in the most deprived 10% of areas across England, and 35 in the most deprived 20%. 3.2.12 Although unemployment claimant rates have dropped significantly from historic highs in the 1990s, where more than one-in-ten of the working age population received Jobseekers Allowance (JSA), the JSA claimant rate of 2.8% is still double the rate across the region (4,745 in total on JSA) although is broadly in line with other small cities (2.7%). In February 2007, more than 17,500 people across the city were receiving workless benefits (either JSA or Incapacity Benefit). More than 11,000 people were claiming Income Support – the highest number of claimants for all LAs across the region.

3.3 Inequality in Brighton is about both deprived places and deprived people

What is the evidence?

The city contains some of the most significantly deprived areas in England 3.3.1 The most deprived areas of the city are located in East Brighton and Queens Park wards, although areas of high deprivation are scattered right across the city with 14 of the city’s 21 wards containing at least one SOA in the most deprived 20% of areas across England (based on the IMD 2004). 3.3.2 The SOA in East Brighton around central Whitehawk, Whitehawk way, Cooksbridge Road, and Nuthurst Place areas is in the most deprived 10% of all areas across England on each of the five key domains of deprivation - Income, Employment, Health, Education and Crime. A further eight areas in the city are among the most deprived 10% on four domains (four in East Brighton, two in Hollingbury and Stanmer and one each in St Peter’s and the North Laine and Regency)28.

Deprivation in the city at the finer-grained Output Area level 3.3.3 Map 1 below shows the IMD 2004 mapped across the city at Super Output Area level, with the colours on the map identifying the most deprived areas across England. Areas shaded dark blue are those areas highly deprived in the context of England, with light yellow areas having low levels of deprivation. The map identifies the most deprived areas across the city are located in East Brighton (containing the Whitehawk and Bristol Estates), Queens Park and Moulsecoomb & Bevendean wards. 3.3.1 Map 2 identifies the IMD 2004 statistically modelled down to Output Areas (OAs)29, and mapped across the city. Again, areas shaded dark blue are those areas highly deprived in the context of England, with light yellow areas having low levels of deprivation. 3.3.2 This OA level data provides a finer-grained detail of deprivation levels across the city. The broad distribution is the same as seen with the less-detailed SOA data, with the most deprived areas across the city located in East Brighton, Queens Park and Moulsecoomb & Bevendean wards.

27 Super Output Areas (SOA) are a standard geography developed for the Census 2001. Each contains on average 1,500 people. 28 ID 2004 (ODPM/DCLG 2004) 29 OCSI (2007). Index of Multiple Deprivation 2004, OA Modelled Estimates. For full details of the methodology, see the technical background paper available from www.norfolk.gov.uk/ruraldeprivation

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 17 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

3.3.3 Also, smaller pockets of deprivation are uncovered in areas that are not identified using SOA level data as being particularly deprived. For example, uncovering high levels of deprivation in areas around Portslade, also at the bottom of Preston Drove where it joins London Road.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 18 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 19 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 20 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

20% Most Deprived Areas Brighton and Hove

Figure 1 DWP Working Age Client Group (WACG) Figure 2 DWP Jobseekers Allowance (JSA) claimants

102 120 101 110 100 100 99 90 98 80 97 70 96 60 95

• Source: OCSI 2007 (from ONS and • Source: OCSI 2007 (from ONS and DWP). February 2001 data is baselined to 100 DWP). February 2001 data is baselined to 100

Figure 3 DWP Incapacity. Benefit (IB) claimants Figure 4 DWP Income Support (IS) claimants

106 104 104 102 100 102 98 100 96 94 98 92 96 90

• Source: OCSI 2007 (from ONS and • Source: OCSI 2007 (from ONS and DWP). February 2001 data is baselined to 100 DWP). Nov 2003 data is baselined to 100

Figure 5 DWP Disability Living Allowance(DLA) Figure 6 Pension Credit (PC)

130 120 125 115 120 115 110 110 105 105 100 100

• Source: OCSI 2007 (from ONS and • Source: OCSI 2007 (from ONS and DWP). May 2002 data is baselined to 100 DWP). February 2004 data is baselined to 100

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 21 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Outcome trend data available at small area level appears to show that the most deprived areas across the city are not “closing the gap” 3.3.4 To explore whether the most deprived areas across the city are “closing the gap” against the city as a whole, we need trend data available to small area level. The best data available here is DWP benefits datasets. These are published on a quarterly basis to SOA level. 3.3.5 The Figure above shows a range of DWP benefit dataset claimant rates for the 20% most deprived areas across the city, compared to the rest of the city. Each graph is “baselined” to 100 for the earliest period available for the data – changes over time can then be assessed for the most deprived areas and the rest of the city. Increases in the claimant rate above the baseline point are shown by increases above 100, with falls in the claimant rate below the baseline point shown by drops below 100. 3.3.6 The six benefits shown are: • Working Age Client Group (WACG) • Jobseekers Allowance (JSA) • Incapacity Benefit (IB) • Income Support (IS) • Disability Living Allowance (DLA) • Pension Credit (PC) 3.3.7 On every measure with the exception of Pension Credit, the benefit data trends identify that the most deprived areas have not closed the gap against the rest of the city. Indeed there is evidence that the most deprived areas are lagging further behind on some measures. 3.3.8 Also, the Pension Credit results should be treated with caution, as take-up of the benefit has increased over time since the 2004 launch. The slower increase in Pension Credit levels seen in the more deprived areas may therefore reflect the impact of slower rates of take-up in these areas, rather than the impact of falls in the level of older people with low incomes.

Some groups are particularly concentrated in the most deprived areas 3.3.9 Although at a national level BME groups are more likely to be located in the most deprived areas of the country, Brighton and Hove’s ethnic minority communities are relatively dispersed throughout the city. However, this is not the case across the board: just under half of the Bangladeshi population and just under a third of the Black African population in Brighton and Hove live in the most deprived 10% of areas in the city. 3.3.10 Another group that is significantly concentrated in the most deprived parts of Brighton and Hove are lone parents. Nearly one-fifth of all lone parents across the city live in the most deprived 10% of areas in the city.

The city is home to large numbers of people experiencing inequality, however the most deprived areas in the city are significantly more deprived than the city as a whole 3.3.11 The Table below highlights the size of key groups across the city, identifying that there are significant numbers of people experiencing low income, worklessness, poor health, low qualifications and housing issues across the city. 3.3.12 In later sections we explore many of these themes in more detail, providing comparisons against the region, England and other similarly sized ‘small cities’. Here we highlight two key issues:

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 22 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

3.3.13 First, the most deprived areas across the city fare badly on virtually every aspect of inequality, compared with the city as a whole. People living in the most deprived 20% of areas are significantly more likely to experience inequality. For example, in the most deprived areas: • More than 25% of all working age people are receiving DWP benefits (compared with 15% across the city) • More than one-third of all older people are receiving Pension Credit (compared with just over one-fifth across the city) • Half of all children live in income deprivation, and nearly half live in out-of-work families (compared with under one-quarter across the city) – many of these are lone parent families headed by women • Nearly 14% (one-in-seven) of all working-age people receive Incapacity Benefits, and 8% Disability Living Allowance (compared with 7% and 4% respectively across the city)

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 23 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Key groups across the most Most deprived 20% of Brighton and Hove deprived areas and Brighton and areas in Brighton and Hove Hove Number Rate % Number Rate %

Working Age DWP Benefit 9,140 27.8% 25,190 15.1% claimants Income Support claimants 4,630 14.1% 11,220 6.7% Pension Credit Guarantee Element 2,995 37.7% 9,530 21.8% claimants

Children living in Income 4,264 50.0% 10,153 24.6% Deprivation (IMD 2004) Children in out-of-work families 4,385 46.1% 10,960 23.3% Children eligible for Free School 2,049 32.5% 4,840 16.2% Meals Children with Special Educational 2,305 36.6% 6,888 23.0% Needs

Jobseekers Allowance claimants 1,855 5.6% 5,290 3.2% Incapacity Benefit claimants 4,490 13.7% 11,775 7.0% Part-time workers 3,586 10.3% 21,122 11.4% People in elementary occupations 2,636 13.7% 10,526 9.0% IX

People with a limiting long-term 11,103 23.4% 44,925 18.1% Illness Disability Living Allowance 4,020 8.2% 11,205 4.4% claimants

Adults with no qualifications 10,810 32.7% 40,921 23.4% Adults with Level 1 qualifications 4,771 14.4% 25,041 14.3% Adults with degree level 8,155 24.6% 53,200 30.4% qualifications

Households lacking central heating 2,726 11.8% 12,342 10.8% Social-rented households 8,940 38.8% 16,797 14.7% Overcrowded households 4,342 18.8% 14,512 12.7% Housing in Council Tax bands A or 17,109 69.9% 52,140 43.2% B

Households with no car or van 12,327 53.4% 41,830 36.5% People working at home 1,525 7.9% 10,870 9.2% People travelling more than 10 km 4,130 21.5% 29,423 25.0% to work 3.3.14 Second, very large numbers of people experiencing inequality do not live in the most deprived areas. The bar-chart on the following page identifies the proportion of each key group located in the most deprived areas. For example: • Of the 252,000 people across the city, 49,000 (or 19%) live in the most deprived 20% of areas, while 203,000 (or 81%) do not live in most deprived 20% of areas

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 24 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

• Of the 25,000 people of working-age receiving DWP benefits across the city, 16,000 (or 64%) do not live in the most deprived 20% of areas • Of the more than 4,000 children living in low income or out-of-work families across the city, nearly 60% do not live in the most deprived 20% of areas • Of the 41,000 adults with no qualifications across the city, 75% do not live in the most deprived 20% of areas • Social housing is highly concentrated in the most deprived areas, with more than 50% located in the most deprived 20% of areas 3.3.15 More detailed analysis of those people of working-age receiving DWP benefits further identifies the levels of inequality seen in the most deprived areas of the city. 13% of all people of working-age receiving DWP benefits live in the most deprived 5% of areas across the city; 22% live in the most deprived 10% of areas, and 37% live in the most deprived 20% of areas.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 25 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

100% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 0%

19%=49,002 people 81%=202,910 people How 20%=8,201 children 80%=32,957 children

18%=7,937 people 82%=35,724 people

key 22%=3,173 people 78%=11,050 people

groups Least

36%=9,140 people 64%=16,050 people

deprived 41%=4,630 people 59%=6,590 people

are 31%=2,995 people 69%=6,535 people

80%

concentrated

of 42%=4,264 children 58%=5,889 children

areas 40%=4,385 children 60%=6,575 children

in

42%=2,049 children 58%=2,791 children Brighton 34%=2,305 children 67%=4,583 children

49%=991 children 52%=1,051 children

in and

the

Hove 35%=1,855 people 65%=3,435 people

38%=4,490 people 62%=7,285 people most

17%=3,586 people 83%=17,536 people

25%=2,636 people 75%=7,890 people deprived Most

25%=11,103 people 75%=33,822 people

Deprived 36%=4,020 people 64%=7,185 people

20%

20%

26%=10,810 people 74%=30,111 people of

of

19%=4,771 people 81%=20,270 people

areas areas 15%=8,155 people 85%=45,045 people

in

Brighton

of 22%=2,726 households 78%=9,616 households

the 53%=8,940 households 47%=7,857 households

and

30%=4,342 households 70%=10,170 households City

Hove 33%=17,109 households 67%=35,031 households

29%=12,327 households 71%=29,503 households

14%=1,525 people 86%=9,345 people

14%=4,130 people 86%=25,293 people

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 26 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

What are the implications? 3.3.16 The city as a whole is doing well, with the economy growing faster than other small cities and the region. However, based on many indicators of inequality, Brighton contains some of the most deprived areas across the country. People living in these areas are significantly more likely to experience inequality on a range of measures than on average across the city. It is critical to ensure that these areas are not left behind the rest of city. There are potential implications here, for planning policies, access to jobs, community engagement, and targeting of service delivery. 3.3.17 However, it is also important to bear in mind that large numbers of people experiencing inequality do not live in the most deprived areas of the city.

3.4 There is a significant group across the city with multiple needs – heavily concentrated in the most deprived areas

What is the evidence?

Census data identifies a significant group of people experiencing multiple disadvantage 3.4.1 Across Brighton, nearly 1,500 households are identified as having all of the following four characteristics from the Census 2001: • Employment inequality: Every member of the household aged 16-74 who is not a full- time student is either unemployed or permanently sick • Education inequality: No member of the household aged 16 to pensionable age has at least 5 GCSEs (grade A-C) or equivalent, and no member of the household aged 16-18 is in full-time education • Health and disability inequality: Any member of the household has general health 'not good' in the year before Census, or has a limiting long term illness • Housing: The household's accommodation is either overcrowded (occupancy indicator is -1 or less); or is in a shared dwelling; or does not have sole use of bath/shower and toilet; or has no central heating 3.4.2 This group of 1,500 households represents 1.3% of all households in the city, more than double the proportion across the South East (0.6%), but similar to levels across other small cities (1.2%) and England as a whole (1.1%). 3.4.3 Not surprisingly, these multiply-disadvantaged households are concentrated in the most deprived areas of the city; more than one-quarter are located in the most deprived 10% of areas across the city, and more than one-third in the most deprived 20% of areas. However, nearly 1,000 multiply-disadvantaged households are located outside the most deprived 20% of the city. 3.4.4 The highest levels of multiply-disadvantaged households are found in South Hangleton, where more than 4% of all households are multiply-disadvantaged on all four characteristics; more than 20% of households are multiply-disadvantaged on three or more characteristics in the SOA covering St James Street30.

Children with multiple needs are heavily concentrated in the most deprived areas 3.4.5 Analysis of children attending LEA schools31 identifies that just under one-quarter of all children have Special Educational Needs, with 16% of all children eligible for Free

30 Part of the St James Street and Kemp Town Neighbourhood Renewal Area 31 OCSI analysis of CYPT Pupil Level Annual School Census (PLASC) data.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 27 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

School Meals (a measure of low income). Children in the most deprived areas are significantly more likely to be eligible for Free School Meals or have Special Educational Needs. 3.4.6 Children with multiple issues are heavily concentrated in the most deprived areas – nearly one-half of all children across the city experiencing both low income and Special Educational Needs live in the most deprived 20% of areas. This group with multiple needs is more heavily concentrated in the most deprived areas than those pupils experiencing only one of the two issues. Children eligible for FSM, Most Deprived 20% of areas in Brighton Brighton and/or with Special Educational and Hove Needs Number % of all such % of Numb % of children children er children across in this area in this the city area All children 6,296 21.0% - 29,952 - Free School Meal Eligibility 2,049 42.3% 32.5% 4,840 16.2% (FSM) Special Educational Needs 2,305 33.5% 36.6% 6,888 23.0% (SEN) FSM and SEN 991 48.5% 15.7% 2,042 6.8%

People with multiple needs living in social housing 3.4.7 The Brighton and Hove Housing Tenants Status Survey (2006) highlights living conditions of those in social accommodation by focusing on five types of inequality: income, dependence on state benefits, poor health, crime and poor living environment. 3.4.8 Evidence from the Survey identifies that more than 61% of the households have an income below £10,400 p.a.; 57% of the families receive some type of state benefits (JSA, Pension tax credits, Income Support, DLA or other); nearly 53% of the households have problems related to poor health. Crime and living environment problems are experienced by roughly one-quarter of the survey respondents. 3.4.9 The level of those with multiple needs in the survey is high: more than 68% of the households are experiencing at least two of the above inequalities. Multiple needs are driven by health, income and reliance on state benefits. Among the households with multiple needs, 81% rely on state benefits and have low income; 78% depending on state benefits have health problems; 73% have both poor health and low income.

What are the implications? 3.4.10 The emphasis on people experiencing multiple-disadvantage reflects recent shifts in the agenda at national level, with government highlighting the importance of reaching out to “deeply excluded” groups. Research from the Social Exclusion Task Force identifies 2% of the population having multiple disadvantages, and the difficulty of targeting services to this group32. 3.4.11 Those with multiple needs are likely to require multiple services – there is likely to be strong emphasis on providing a co-ordinated approach for these groups. It will be important to pick up on the messages emerging from the Brighton and Hove Multiple-

32 Social Exclusion Task Force (2007). Reaching Out: An Action Plan on Social Exclusion. Available from www.cabinetoffice.gov.uk/social_exclusion_task_force/publications/reaching_out/

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 28 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Disadvantaged Groups project. The project seeks to identify those people across the city experiencing multiple disadvantages, based on analysing locally-held service data at individual level. Successfully obtaining, cleaning and linking together the different service databases will be a major achievement. This would point the way on how to better share data between services across the city for operational and strategic purposes. 3.4.12 There is also a link here to emerging work on “Disadvantage Markers” from Jobcentre Plus. The markers are designed to identify customers with a particular disadvantage, including disability, ethnicity, lone parents, lowest qualified, refugee status, homelessness, ex-offending and misuse of drugs and alcohol. Although under-use of these markers by JCP advisors appears to be common, recent national research from DWP has highlighted the potential of the markers for examining multiple deprivation issues33.

3.5 Worklessness across Brighton and Hove

What is the evidence?

Unemployment levels are falling across the city 3.5.1 Unemployment has been decreasing steadily in Brighton and Hove: the gap with England and the South East is closing. In 1996, 11.3% of working population was unemployed, as compared to regional and national proportions of 5.5% and 7.8% respectively. Ten years later, local unemployment was 6.6%, much closer to the South East (4.5%) and England (5.3%)34 levels. 3.5.2 Brighton is also closing the gap with other small cities, with the proportion of people claiming Jobseekers Allowance across the city falling by 73% over the 1996-2006 period35. Other small cities have also experienced a significant fall over the same period albeit with a slightly lower fall (68%) in JSA claimant rates36. 3.5.3 Long term unemployment in terms of claimant counts has also been decreasing, although it still remains higher than in the South East and England. In 1996, out of all JSA claimants in Brighton and Hove, 45% had been receiving benefits for over 12 months. By 2007, this rate had fallen to 22% in the city37.

Claimant flows identify up to 17,000 people have been on JSA over the course of the last year 3.5.4 Looking at claimant flows provides a fuller picture of unemployment and labour market change than the stock numbers of claimants in any given month. Over the 12 month period from July 2006 to July 2007, the number of claimants across the city fell from 5,185 to 4,545 – a drop of 640. However, the “on-flow” of new claimants was 12,195, with an “off-flow” of claimants leaving for job or other reasons of 12,73538. 3.5.5 This gives an upper estimate of just over 17,000 for the total number of people who have been on JSA during the course of the year, more than three times the stock figure (this is an upper estimate, as it will double-count those people who come off, and then back on to, benefit during the 12 month period).

33 DWP (2007). Disadvantage Marker Study (Research report 451). Available from www.dwp.gov.uk/asd/asd5/rports2007-2008/rrep451.pdf 34 Annual Population Survey 2006. 35 DWP November 2006. 36 Ibid. 37 DWP June 2007. 38 Ibid.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 29 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Worklessness benefit levels are primarily driven by incapacity benefit 3.5.6 Illness and disability rates now dwarf JSA claimants as primary reasons for worklessness. Across Brighton and Hove there are nearly three times as many people who are workless through sickness and claiming Incapacity Benefit (IB) 13,000 compared with those who are unemployed and claiming JSA (4,545 claimants) 39. 3.5.7 In contrast to the JSA population, the population who are workless and receiving IB has not been declining across Brighton and Hove, with IB rates for 2006 (7.8%) broadly the same as in 1999 (7.7%) across the city40.

Long-term unemployment is particularly high among older people on JSA 3.5.8 People aged 50-64 are particularly likely to be on long-term JSA benefits across Brighton and Hove. Nearly 60% of all JSA claimants aged 50-64 have been unemployed for more than 6 months compared with 40% of the total JSA claimants in the city41. 3.5.9 In total in July 2007 there were 640 JSA claimants aged 50-64 in Brighton and Hove (14% of the total claimants across the city)42. In addition in 2006 there were just under 5,000 people aged 50 and over claiming Incapacity benefit43. In other words, just over one-third of all workless people claiming benefits across the city are aged between 50 and 6444 45.

Black Caribbean, Black African and Pakistani ethnic groups are more likely to be unemployed than white ethnic groups across Brighton and Hove 3.5.10 The 2001 Census identified unemployment levels to be significantly higher among Black Caribbean, Pakistani and Black African groups, who were 50% more likely to be unemployed than people from White British ethnic minority groups. However these groups only account for just over 4,000 people across Brighton and Hove. 3.5.11 More recent evidence based on Jobseekers Allowance claimants broken down by ethnicity (available for 2006/07) shows that just under 8% of all JSA claimants across Brighton and Hove were from a BME group. In total there were 350 people from BME groups claiming JSA across the city, 120 of whom were black, 95 from Chinese or ‘other’ ethnic origin, 75 of Asian ethnicity and 60 of ‘mixed’ ethnicity46.

Women are less likely to be unemployed, also significantly less likely to be economically active 3.5.12 Of the 4,500 JSA claimants across the city, 29% are women, indicating that unemployment levels are significantly lower for women than men. However, as seen nationally, women in Brighton and Hove are less likely to be economically active than men (61% of women are economically active, compared with 75% of men). Those economically inactive are by definition “not seeking work”, so are not eligible for JSA and do not show up on the unemployment statistics.

39 DWP November 2006. 40 Ibid. 41 DWP June 2007. 42 DWP July 2007. 43 DWP November 2006 44 This group makes up roughly one-fifth of all working age people. 45 DWP November 2006 46 95 claimants were “unknown” and 360 claimants “preferred not to say”. DWP JSA by ethnicity 2006/07 April 2006 to March 2007

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 30 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Other groups with higher levels of worklessness include those with low skills, homeless, ex- offenders, drug users

What are the implications? 3.5.13 National research identifies that those coming off JSA are very likely to return within two years – the majority of claims are repeats. Also, after long spells out-of-work the probability of getting a job falls sharply47. Programme and benefits support should therefore be tailored towards sustainable employment, enabling individuals to maintain employment in a changing labour market. This is emphasised in the Leitch report – “the objectives of the employment and skills systems should be transformed into an integrated objective of sustainable employment and progression”48 and by the recent Welfare to Work Green paper49. 3.5.14 How should programmes tackle barriers faced by particular groups? For example older groups who are unemployed face a number of additional barriers to employment, with resulting higher levels of long-term unemployment. Those workless for ill health reasons are likely to be long-term workless – over 50% of all Incapacity Benefit claimants across the city have been claiming for more than 5 years.. 3.5.15 The European Social Fund (ESF) programme for 2007-2013, was launched in October 2007. Programmes will match £2bn of European funding with £2bn from the UK government, with priorities for extending employment opportunities by tackling barriers to work faced by unemployed or disadvantaged people, and training people who are lacking basic skills and good qualifications.

3.6 Those with low skills are being squeezed out in the labour market

What is the evidence? 3.6.1 More than 40,000 individuals aged between 16 and 74 do not hold any qualifications – 15,000 of these are aged 16-44. Basic skills estimates identify almost 12,000 people lacking basic literacy skills; almost 60,000 lacking numeracy skills and 64,000 lacking basic ICT skills50. 3.6.2 Those with low skills in Brighton are facing increasing pressure in competing for work across the city:

(1) Scarcity of appropriate jobs 3.6.3 The labour market in Brighton and Hove is biased towards highly-skilled individuals. In 2006, more than half the workforce (around 68,000 people) were employed in high- skilled professions51, compared to 38% in other small cities, and 43% in England. The gap in terms of low skilled occupations is also considerable. Across the small cities comparator, 21% of all jobs are in lower order occupations. In Brighton the corresponding proportion is 13%52.

47 Simmonds (2007), Welfare to Work Convention. Available from: www.cesi.org.uk/Events/listpresentations.asp?id=170 48 Leitch (2006). Prosperity for all in the global economy - world class skills. Available from: www.hm-treasury.gov.uk/independent_reviews/leitch_review/review_leitch_index.cfm 49 DWP (2007). In work, better off: next steps to full employment. Available from: www.dwp.gov.uk/welfarereform/in-work-better-off/in-work-better-off.pdf 50 DfES Skills for Life Survey 2002 51 Based on standard Occupational Categories from the Annual Population Survey 2006. 52 Ibid.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 31 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

3.6.4 Labour market projections confirm the growth of demand for high-skill labour. More than 70% of overall employment growth during 2003-2008 is projected to be in higher level occupations. Lower order occupations are projected to shrink by 7%53. The largest growth sectors are forecast to be in Finance, IT and Business Services54. 3.6.5 In addition, evidence suggests that the lower skilled occupations in Brighton and Hove require a higher level of interpersonal skills, than do such occupations across the other small cities, the South East and the UK as a whole55.

(2) Competition from those with high-skills 3.6.6 According to the most recent estimates, the proportion of residents with degree qualifications is 38%, well above the small city, national and regional averages (23.5%, 27% and 30.5% respectively 56). The city is also good at retaining skilled graduates, with 30% of Sussex graduates staying in Brighton for at least six months. 3.6.7 In common with the South-East, lower order occupations in Brighton are less likely to employ those with low skills than similar jobs across England, likely due to competition from more highly skilled residents. A similar picture is seen with intermediate and higher order occupations57. This indicates that, compared with the country as a whole, people with no qualifications in the city face significant barriers in entering low, intermediate and high skilled occupations.

(3) Competition from other groups 3.6.8 The large numbers of migrant workers and students in the city provide additional demand for low-skilled jobs, increasing the pressure on low skilled groups across the city. 3.6.9 For example, personal and customers service occupations and elementary occupations (such as retailing) which could provide work for low-skilled individuals, are currently employing a high-skilled workforce. Respectively 25% and 20% of the employees in these occupations, are individuals with level three qualifications, which are likely to include students from either Brighton or Sussex universities58.

As a result, employment and economic activity rates are poor for those with low skills 3.6.10 The level of unemployment among individuals with no or unknown qualifications is 5.1%; well above the rate in the South East (3.6%), and comparable to the national and small cities levels59. Within the same low skills group, the proportion of economically

53 Source OCSI, 2007 (from SEER Consulting 2003) 54 Ibid. 55 Based on the proportion of elementary occupations that are located in the financial intermediaries; renting and business activities; social security, education, health & social work; and hotels & restaurants sectors. Sectors identified as requiring lower levels of interpersonal skills include hunting and forestry; fishing, mining & quarrying; manufacturing; gas & water supply; construction; repairs; and storage and communications. Source: OCSI, 2007 (from Census, 2001). 56 ONS Annual Population Survey 2006. 57 OCSI analysis of Census 2001. 58 Brighton and Hove Socio-Economic Baseline Report (2003), Labour Market and the Economy (chapter four). Available at: www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/regeneration/Ch_4_Labour_Market_and_the_Economy.pdf 59 5.2% for England and 5.3% for small cities as a whole. Source: Census, 2001, data refers to adults aged 18-60.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 32 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

inactive adults is also higher in Brighton and Hove (36%) than in England (34.6%) or the South East (29.2%)60. 3.6.11 Across the city only 18.5% of the jobs employ individuals with no qualifications, as compared with a regional rate of 20.3% and a national one of 24.5%. This is despite the overall level of people with no qualifications being well above the regional average61.

Some BME groups are over-represented in low-skilled sectors 3.6.12 More than half the local Bangladeshis in work are employed in the hotel and restaurants sector, as are more than one third of Chinese people in employment62. However, BME groups are overall more likely than white British residents to be working in higher status occupations, and less likely to be working in lower status occupations63.

What are the implications? 3.6.13 The Leitch report identifies that the national demand for low-skilled employment is expected to reduce over next 10-15 years64. This effect is perhaps already being seen across the city. The implication is that employment and activity rates will drop even further for those with low or no qualifications. 3.6.14 The evidence highlights the increasing difficulty that low-skilled groups have in competing in the local employment market. The scarcity of suitable entry level jobs and progression routes (employment escalator) also implies this group will find it hard to increase skill levels whilst in-work. 3.6.15 The link between low-skill occupations and interpersonal skills is important. Many commentators highlight the importance of ‘softer’ interpersonal, intrapersonal, and social skills to employability65. Employers repeatedly highlight these as key: for example, skills such as customer service (41%), oral communication (39%), written communication (36%), team working (34%) and problem solving (34%) all featured in the 2005 National Employer Skills Survey as those most often lacking amongst job applicants to small firms 66. 3.6.16 It is important to consider the role of the main public agencies as employers and to ensure that major developments across the city are linked in to providing work for low-skilled groups; retail trade, hospitality and catering sectors are important in addition to construction.

60 Census 2001, data refer to adults aged 18-60. 61 Census 2001, data refer to adults aged 18-60. 62 Brighton and Hove City Council (2005): Socio Economic Baseline Report Labour Market and the Economy. 63 Brighton and Hove City Council (2005): Socio Economic Baseline Report Labour Market and the Economy. 64 Leitch (2006). Prosperity for all in the global economy - world class skills. Available from www.hm-treasury.gov.uk/independent_reviews/leitch_review/review_leitch_index.cfm 65 For example, see Mulgan (2005). Learning to serve. Available from www.youngfoundation.org.uk/node/276; Newton & others (2005). What employers look for when recruiting the unemployed and inactive: skills, characteristics and qualifications - DWP Research Report 295. Available from /www.dwp.gov.uk/asd/asd5/rports2005-2006/rrep295.pdf 66 Quoted in Worcester Research (2007) A Review of Regional Skills and Employment Issues to Inform the Development of the South East ESF Framework – SEEDA.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 33 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

3.7 Significant barriers are faced by disabled groups

What is the evidence? 3.7.1 Disability can be defined as the loss of or limitation of opportunities to take part in the normal life of the community on an equal level with others due to physical or social barriers67. This includes those groups experiencing physical disability as well as people with mental health issues.

Disability and incapacity benefit levels are high across the city 3.7.2 In total more than half of all working age people who claim benefits68 across Brighton and Hove claim as a result of incapacity69. As well as people who are workless, people on low income benefits also cite incapacity as the primary reason for claiming. Just under two-thirds of Brighton and Hove’s Income Support claimants (62%) claim due to incapacity, compared with 56% across other small cities, 55% across England and 52% across the South East70. 3.7.3 Disability Living Allowance is provided to people who need help with personal care or getting around. Nearly 12,000 people were claiming Disability Living Allowance across Brighton and Hove in February 200771. This represents 4.5% of the city’s population, higher than the comparable rate for the region (3.2%) and England (4.3%) but slightly below other small cities (5%)72.

Older groups are more likely to be disabled 3.7.4 In addition, there are 5,200 Attendance Allowance claimants in Brighton and Hove, of whom 2,400 receive the higher rate for 24 hour care73. Attendance Allowance is provided to people over the age of 65 who are so severely disabled, physically or mentally, that they need a great deal of help with personal care or supervision. In total, nearly 20% of all people aged over 60 in Brighton and Hove receive disability related benefits74.

Disabled groups are likely to experience long-term issues 3.7.5 People suffering from long-term limiting illnesses are increasingly likely to have been claiming benefits for a longer period of time - around 53% of all IB claimants and 46% of Income Support claimants across Brighton and Hove have been claiming for more than 5 years75.

Disabled children are at greater risk of living in poverty 3.7.6 National research for ‘Every Child Matters’ suggests that ’29% of disabled children live in poverty’.76 This reflects the difficulty of combining work with caring for a disabled child. In 2003, it was estimated that 85% of mothers with disabled children were not in

67 Borsay, A. (2004) Disability and Social Policy in Britain since 1750. Basingstoke: Palgrave 68 Administered by the Department of Work and Pensions 69 DWP November 2006 70 DWP August 2006 71 DWP (Feb 2007) DLA claimants 72 DWP (Feb 2007) DLA claimants 73 DWP AA claimants February 2007 74 DWP (February 2007) 75 DWP August 2006 (IS), November 2006 (IB) 76 Disabled children: facts and figures (2005) Available at: www.everychildmatters.gov.uk/socialcare/disabledchildren/facts/

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 34 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

paid employment77. This is compounded by the fact that disabled children are more likely to live in lone parent households and therefore be reliant on a sole carer. 3 in 10 lone parents (29%) have a sick or disabled child78.

Brighton pupils with Special Educational Needs (SEN) are less than one-quarter as likely to attain good GCSEs compared with those pupils without SEN 3.7.7 Nationally, pupils with SEN (without statements), are less than one-fifth as likely to achieve five or more GCSE passes at A*-C grade than those pupils without SEN (65%). Statemented pupils are even less likely to reach this mark79. This is mirrored across Brighton, with only 14% of pupils with SEN (without statements), and 8.5% of pupils with SEN (with statements) achieving five or more GCSE passes at A*-C grade80.

Higher risk of experiencing hate crime 3.7.8 Disabled people are particularly likely to be a victim of violent crime. A survey by the Disability Rights Commission (DRC) on hate crime among disabled groups found that almost half of those who took part in the survey had experienced verbal abuse, intimidation and / or physical attacks because of their disability. Just over a third of incidents were physical attacks, with the main type of attack being verbal abuse and intimidation81.

What are the implications? 3.7.9 There are wider implications, in terms of people caring for disabled people, who may also be excluded from taking up employment, education or training opportunities. In the Census, nearly 22,000 people were providing unpaid care across Brighton and Hove, with 30% providing care for over 20 hours per week and nearly one-in-five providing care for more than 50 hours a week. Around 40% of the working age population providing unpaid care across Brighton and Hove were economically inactive; this figure rises to 70% for those providing care of more than 50 hours per week. The level of care provided by lone parents to disabled children is also significant, with the majority of these families are headed by women. 3.7.10 Multiple interventions and co-ordinated services are likely to be needed for this group. For example, among Brighton and Hove’s NEET population at December 2006, 7% were recorded as having learning difficulties and disabilities (LDD) and a further 13% were recorded as having emotional behaviour problems. Disabled groups people are more likely to have low skill levels, and more likely to be unemployed. 3.7.11 The introduction of the Employment and Support Allowance benefit is important. This will bring together Jobseekers Allowance and Incapacity Benefit while continuing to provide tailored support for is intended to help those with a health condition or disability to return to employment, while plus still providing financial and other support where this is not possible

77Council for Disabled Children. (2003) Disabled Children, Their Families and Child Poverty, End Child Poverty, Briefing Paper, Council for Disabled Children. 78 DWP (2004), Families and Children in Britain: Findings from the 2002 Families and Children Study (FACS), Department of Work and Pensions, Research Report 206. 79 ibid 80 ibid 81 Disability Rights Commission (2006) Hate Crime Against Disabled people in Scotland - a survey report. Available at: www.drc- gb.org/about_us/drc_scotland/library/other_issues/hate_crime_against_disabled_pe.aspx

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 35 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

3.7.12 HR policies are also important: The Council Inclusive City Policy explicitly highlights actions around the city as employer. How engaged are other local employers, including other public sector agencies, in tackling low employment levels for disadvantaged groups such as those with disability? 3.7.13 There are links here to shifts in the way that health and social care is delivered, with the policy agenda emphasising Direct Payments and Individual Benefits, based around outcomes rather than service outputs.

3.8 Those with mental health issues face additional barriers

What is the evidence? 3.8.1 Those with mental health issues are also included in the disabled group above. However, this group faces significant additional issues in terms of employment, health and other barriers.

The city shows very high levels of mental health issues 3.8.2 An overall indicator of mental health was developed under the Indices of Deprivation 2004. This estimates the levels of adults under 60 suffering from mood or anxiety disorders, based on prescribing, suicides, and health benefits data82. Based on this indicator, a single Super Output Area (SOA) in Queens Park contains the highest levels of mental health issues across England. Additionally, just under 40% of the SOAs across the city are in the most deprived 10% of areas in England on this measure. 3.8.3 Using the updated Mental Health Needs Index (MINI 2000)83, Brighton and Hove has between 16% and 39% more serious mental illness in the city compared to England as a whole. Brighton and Hove has the highest MINI and MINI 2000 score of the 8 Local Implementation Teams making up the South Coast Strategic Health Authority. Within the city, the east locality has the highest MINI 2000 score of 1.2484.

Over half of those out-of-work due to long-term sickness across Brighton and Hove have mental health problems 3.8.4 Mental illness is the primary cause of worklessness through sickness in Brighton and Hove. 6,700 people in Brighton and Hove were claiming Incapacity Benefit in November 2006 as a result of mental health disorders85. This is the highest number of mental health claimants of any authority in the South-East. 3.8.5 Claimants receiving Incapacity Benefit for mental health reasons make up a larger proportion of claimants in Brighton (52%) than in the ‘all small cities’ comparator (41%). In total, mental health reasons account for 37% of workless benefit claimants across the city (compared with 30% for the small cities comparator)86. 3.8.6 Analysis of the Labour Force Survey in London identified that people with mental illness have lower rates of employment compared with people with other disabilities: 18% are

82 Local research suggests that prescribing levels in Brighton have been historically high, with prescription rates for anxiolytics (drugs for the treatment of symptoms of anxiety) twice that of the England average, with some practices having rates 7 to 10 times higher than the England rate (Director of Public Health (forthcoming) Annual Report.) 83 Glover et al, 2004; 2008. 84 Data quoted from Brighton and Hove Director of Public Health (forthcoming) Annual Report. 85 DWP (2006) Incapacity Benefit, November 2006. 86 DWP (November 2006)

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 36 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

in employment compared with 44% of other disabled groups (and 76% for non-disabled people)87.

Brighton and Hove has one of the highest suicide rates in the country. 3.8.7 Linked to the high prevalence of mental health issues across Brighton and Hove, the city has among the highest suicide rates in the country. This contributes to the relatively low life expectancy among males in the city, with suicide the major cause of death in men under 44 in the UK 88. 3.8.8 Between 1996 and 1998, Brighton and Hove had the 4th highest suicide rate in the country with 15.9 suicides per 100,000 population89. This was over 70% higher than the national suicide rate (9.3 per 100,000) 90. Although the rate has fallen in recent years, the suicide rate across the city is still significantly above the national and regional averages. 3.8.9 This is likely to be linked to the prevalence of particular groups and communities across the city, who tend to show higher levels of suicide. These groups include homeless, LGBT and drug users.

What are the implications? 3.8.10 Poor mental and physical health among the homeless community is likely to be additionally compounded by poor access to primary care. 3.8.11 The extent of suicide levels among the LGBT has been explored in the Count Me in Too study91across Brighton and Hove. In the study, just under a quarter of all respondents reported serious thoughts of suicide, with 6% having attempted suicide, in the last 5 years. Three percent had attempted suicide in the last year alone92. High suicide rates among the LGBT community are likely to be associated with risk factors such as bullying and familial rejection. 3.8.12 Work for the city’s assessment of mental health needs identifies four areas for improvement: greater support needed for those living in the East locality and those from BME backgrounds; importance of treating service users with respect, and providing full information about care choices; improving data quality about services and measuring outcomes; and a set of specific service improvements93. The draft needs assessment is due to be published in mid-November 2007. The (forthcoming) annual report of the Director of Public Health identifies that the Mental Health Needs Index in the city does not correlate with areas where there are higher standards of care (based

87 DMAG Briefing 2007-05 ( 2007). Disabled people and the labour market in London: key facts, Analysis of the 2005 Annual Population Survey 88 Doyal, L. (2001) Sex, gender, and health: the need for a new approach, BMJ 323:1061-1063. 89 Office for National Statistics (ONS)/Department of Health (DH), available from Floor Target Interactive 1996-1998. Available at: www.fti.neighbourhood.gov.uk/ 90 Office for National Statistics (ONS)/Department of Health (DH), available from Floor Target Interactive 1996-1998. Available at: www.fti.neighbourhood.gov.uk/ 91 Browne, K. (2007) Count me in too: LGBT Lives in Brighton and Hove Initial Findings: Academic Report. Available at: www.spectrum- lgbt.org/cmiToo/downloads/CMIT_AcademicReport_final_June07.pdf [accessed 27 August 2007]. 92 ibid 93 Initial findings from the PCT Mental Health Needs Assessment. To be checked against report delivery

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 37 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

on measures outlined in the Quality and Outcomes Framework for General Practice) nor, perhaps more surprisingly, with hospital admissions for mental illness94.

3.9 Groups struggling to access affordable housing

What is the evidence? 3.9.1 Limited access to affordable housing is a significant problem across Brighton and Hove. The city saw the second highest average house price increases of any city in the country over the decade between 1996 and 2006, with house prices increasing by 260%95. 3.9.2 Locally, a household income of £88,000 is needed to afford an average terrace house96. The house price to income ratio for Brighton in 2004 was 5.5, well above the ratio of 4.2 nationally97. 3.9.3 The high proportion of people unable to access the housing market on the basis of income levels alone is particularly significant in Brighton and Hove. Owner occupation levels are particularly low in the city (62% across Brighton and Hove compared with 69% across small cities as a whole, 72% across the region and 69% across England)98, with people less likely to have capital from existing home ownership to purchase a home.

Homeless levels are high 3.9.4 There are high levels of homelessness in Brighton and Hove. Although the number of unintentionally and intentionally homeless households in priority need fell from 1,057 to 573 between 2003/04 and 2005/0699, the most recent national data (2004/5) identifies the city as among the 10% of Local Authorities in England with the highest number of homeless households: • The city has the greatest number of homeless people living in B&B accommodation outside London • The rough sleeper population has declined significantly over the last 10 years, but is still among the highest in England 3.9.5 City Council evidence to the ODPM Select Committee in 2004 identified shortage of housing supply and high private rental costs as key drivers underlying the high levels of homelessness100

94 Brighton and Hove Director of Public Health (forthcoming) Annual Report 95 AboutProperty.co.uk, Property News, House prices rise fastest in Truro, 22 May 2006. Available at: www.aboutproperty.co.uk/News/house-prices/halifax/house-prices-rise-fastest-in- truro-$440508.htm 96 Based on lending for a mortgage of 3.5 times household salary. The average house price for a terrace house in Brighton is currently £308,000 (Land Registry of England and Wales, April-June 2007) 97 Audit Commission Area Profiles. Available at: www.areaprofiles.audit- commission.gov.uk/(eirra445pvmavzn3hljkdf45)/StaticPage.aspx?info=25&menu=57 98 Census 2001 99 ODPM/DCLG. Data extracted from NeSS 100 Select Committee on Office of the Deputy Prime Minister: Housing, Planning, Local Government and the Regions (2004) Memorandum by Brighton and Hove City Council (HOM 47). Available at: www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm200304/cmselect/cmodpm/1116/1116we50.htm

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 38 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

3.9.6 Falling stock levels of social housing in the city is also an obstacle, as social rented housing has traditionally provided an ‘escape route’ for homeless people. In Brighton and Hove, there are more homeless households than vacant social housing to accommodate them. 3.9.7 The number of households on the housing register is currently 10,600 (a significant increase on 8,000 in 2005). However, this figure should not simply be taken as an indicator of social housing demand. Many (about a third) of the households who are on the housing register are already in social housing and have a requested a transfer, some because they 'would like' to move, others because they 'need' to move. Others are living in suitable accommodation but have joined the housing register because they wish to be considered for shared ownership.

What are the implications? 3.9.8 Lack of affordable housing can have a detrimental effect on community stability. Implications include: pricing long-term local residents out of the area; moving the population into more short term lets in the private sector rented accommodation; driving up levels of homelessness; increasing inequality between the propertied “haves” and the renting “have nots”. 3.9.9 High housing costs can also lead to a concentration of deprived groups in cheaper areas, as these groups are priced out of more affluent areas. This is a key driver underlying the high levels of deprivation seen in larger housing estates across the city101.

Lack of affordable accommodation can compound a range of inequalities 3.9.10 High housing cost is one of the principle obstacles to employment. The ‘Housing Benefit trap’, where people are reluctant to move back into employment due to loss of benefits is a significant issue across the city. The Area Investment Framework estimated that for every £1 earned above the previous benefit rate, 65p of Housing Benefit is withdrawn102. 3.9.11 This is particularly true for homeless households in expensive private sector temporary accommodation. Research by the GLA identified that a homeless household with three children living in private sector temporary accommodation needs to earn £960 per week before they are significantly better off in work103. 3.9.12 Barriers to owner occupation can also have an impact on business and enterprise. The equity in housing is a key factor in enabling capital to start up businesses. 3.9.13 Additionally, it is more difficult to attract people to jobs in the city if wage levels do not match the high housing costs. A recent regional business survey found that 12% of companies had experienced difficulty in recruiting and retaining staff due to high

101 DTZ Consulting and Research (2006) Housing, Economic Development and Productivity: Literature Review. Available at: www.berr.gov.uk/files/file32669.pdf 102 Brighton and Hove Socio-Economic Baseline Report (2003)Poverty and Economic Activity (chapter nine), Brighton & Hove and Adur Area Investment Framework, p.3. Available at: www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/regeneration/Ch_9_Poverty_and_Economc_Inactivity.pdf 103 Greater London Authority (GLA) “When Work Doesn’t Pay”. In London Housing, No 113 Apr 2005

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 39 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

housing costs104 while 10% of businesses have considered relocation from the region due to high housing costs105. 3.9.14 Other groups likely to be adversely affected by high housing costs include ex-offenders. The Joseph Rowntree Foundation found that those ex-prisoners who do not find satisfactory accommodation on release are more likely to re-offend106.

3.10 Children and young adults are at risk

What is the evidence?

Nearly one-quarter of the city’s children live in ‘out of work’ households 3.10.1 Roughly 11,000 children (23%) across Brighton and Hove live in households where all the adults present in the household are out of work107. This is well above the regional (15%) and England (20%) levels and slightly above the level across small cities as a whole (21%)108.

Lone parent households account for nearly 70% of all out of work households in the city, mainly headed by women 3.10.2 The relatively high levels of children living in ‘out of work’ households is partly driven by a high proportion of out of work lone parent households in the city. The city has a higher proportion of children living in lone parent households (28%) than the region (21%) and England (26%) though comparable to other small cities as a whole109. Additionally, lone parents are more likely to be out of work across Brighton and Hove than elsewhere, with 57% of all lone parents across the city out of work compared with 52% across other small cities, 50% across the South East and 53% across England as a whole110. 3.10.3 From Census 2001 data, 91% of lone parents in Brighton and Hove are women. Additionally, the employment rate of male lone parents is above the employment rate of female lone parents (61% compared with 46%), and only 17% of female lone parents are in full-time employment compared with 51% of male lone parents. This suggests that that the vast majority, i.e. above 90%, of lone parent out-of-work households are headed by women.

Child poverty is heavily concentrated in the Eastern areas of Brighton and Hove 3.10.4 In seven Super Output Areas (SOAs) across Brighton and Hove more than 50% of children live in out of work families. All seven SOAs are located in Eastern areas of the

104 DTZ Consulting and Research (2006) Housing, Economic Development and Productivity: Literature Review. Available at: www.berr.gov.uk/files/file32669.pdf 105 ibid 106 JRF (1996) The housing needs of ex-prisoners. Available at: www.jrf.org.uk/knowledge/findings/housing/pdf/H178.pdf 107 HMRC (2005) Working Tax Credit data from. Note that out-of-work households refers to households where parents receive the same level of support as provided by CTC, but where it is paid as child allowances in Income Support or income-based Jobseekers Allowance (IS/JSA) out of work benefits 108 ibid 109 HMRC (2005) Working Tax Credit data 110 HMRC (2005) Working Tax Credit data.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 40 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

city, three in ward of East Brighton, two in Moulsecoomb and Bevendean ward and one each in Hollingbury and Stanmer and Queens Park wards111. 3.10.5 Of the 4,800 children across the city eligible for Free School Meals, 42% (or 2,000 children) live in the most deprived 20% of areas across the city112.

GCSE attainment levels are increasing but still below national and regional levels; Children from low income households do significantly worse than the average across the city 3.10.6 The city’s proportion of pupils gaining 5 or more GCSE passes at grades A*-C has risen steadily by 30% over the period 1998 and 2006, faster than the increases seen across the region (21%) and England as a whole (26%) over the same period113. 3.10.7 However, the 55% proportion of pupils gaining 5 or more GCSE passes at grades A*-C is still below the national average of 58.5% and the regional average of 59.5% although slightly above the average for small cities as a whole (53%)114. 42% of pupils in the city receive 5 A*-Cs including English and Maths, below the regional (48%) and national (45%) averages115. 3.10.8 Across Brighton and Hove in 2005, just over one-quarter of pupils eligible for Free School Meals (FSM) gained 5 or more GCSE passes at grades A*-C, less than half the level for non-FSM pupils116. However, FSM pupils across Brighton and Hove slightly outperform those across the region117. Brighton and Hove attainment linked to Acorn geodemographics data identify that whilst 77% of pupils in areas classified as ‘wealthy achievers’ and 65% of pupils classified as ‘urban prosperity’ gained 5 or more GCSE passes at grades A*-C, only 19% of those classified as ‘hard pressed’ achieved these grades118.

Attainment levels at Key Stage 3 across the city remain well below national and regional levels 3.10.9 Key Stage 3 exam results are not showing the same improvement as seen at GCSE, and attainment levels are well below national and regional averages. 3.10.10 Brighton and Hove still has a significantly lower proportion of pupils receiving a level 5 qualification for Key Stage 3 English (66%) than the region (75%) and England as a whole (73%) for 2006. A similar pattern is seen with Science and Maths at Key Stage 3, where the proportion of pupils achieving level 5 also remains below regional and national levels119.

111 HMRC (2005) Working Tax Credit data. 112 OCSI analysis of pupil attainment data provided by Children and Young People’s Trust, Brighton and Hove City Council. 113 DfES (1997-2006) Taken from Floor Targets Interactive. Available at: www.fti.neighbourhood.gov.uk/ 114 DfES (2006) Taken from Floor Targets Interactive. Available at: www.fti.neighbourhood.gov.uk/ 115 DfES (1997-2006) DfES. Taken from Floor Targets Interactive. Available at: www.fti.neighbourhood.gov.uk/ 116 DfES (2005) PLASC data taken from NeSS 117 ibid 118 DfES/CACI (2005) Pupil Attainment by Acorn Classification. 119 66% of pupils across Brighton and Hove achieve level 5 at Key Stage 3 Science compared with 75% across the South East and 72% across England. The city has experienced a rise of 5% between 2001 and 2005 compared with a rise of 9% across England over the same period. 71% of pupils across Brighton and Hove achieve level 5 at Key Stage 3 Maths compared with 79%

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 41 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Young adults are most likely to commit crime, and most likely to be victims of crime 3.10.11 Crime across the city of Brighton and Hove is disproportionately committed by children and young adults. In 2002/03 just under two-thirds (64%) of all offenders in the city were aged 30 or under. Of these, nearly half were children and young adults aged under 20120. More recent work for the 2007 strategic assessment shows that teenagers are recorded more frequently as victims and offenders across a number of crime types121. 3.10.12 The number of first time entrants to the criminal justice system in 2006/07 was nearly 500; a 37% increase on the previous year. The need to concentrate efforts on children and young people is further supported by the fact that over half of interventions by the Anti-Social Behaviour Team are directed towards young people. Youth disorder increased by 4% in 2006/2007 compared with the previous year122.

NEET issues 3.10.13 In December 2006, there were 650 NEETs across the city123. These groups are likely to need additional support and be involved with specialist agencies across the city: 9% of all NEETS facing health problems; 8% are recorded homeless and 4% are inadequately housed. 3.10.14 Of the city’s NEET population as of December 2006: • Two-fifths were 18 years old, two-fifths were 17 years old and one-fifth were 16 years old • 10% were recorded as teenage parents and a further 5% were pregnant • 7% were recorded as having specific learning difficulties and 13% were recorded as having emotional behaviour problems • 5% were in care or care leavers • 12% were registered with the Youth Offending Team • 1.4% had substance misuse problems 3.10.15 Nearly two-thirds of those young people NEET were identified “in transition” between school and education and employment. Although this might suggest that NEET issues across the city are overstated by the statistics, it is important to understand how people move in and out of “NEET status”. For example, it is not clear what happens to the “in transition” group, and whether they do in fact take-up employment or education opportunities.

Other issues include: • Teenage conception levels are declining across Brighton and Hove, and are well below NRF averages (although remain higher than regional and national averages).

across the South East and 77% across England. The city has experienced a rise of 11% between 2001 and 2005 compared with a rise of 17% across England over the same period. 120 Brighton and Hove Socio-Economic Baseline Report (2003) Brighton & Hove and Adur Area Investment Framework. 121 Source: Brighton and Hove Crime and Disorder Strategic Assessment 2007 (draft). 122 Source: Brighton and Hove Crime and Disorder Strategic Assessment 2007 (draft).

123 OCSI analysis of NEET data provided by Children and Young People’s Trust, Brighton and Hove City Council

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 42 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

What are the implications? 3.10.16 Those leaving school with poor qualifications find themselves in one of the most highly educated labour markets in the country, competing for employment with students and educated adults124. As a result, this group are at greater risk of becoming NEET. Poor attainment for those eligible for FSM, and for those children with Special Education Needs (highlighted in the disability section above) are important indicators of inequality facing these groups. The relatively poor attainment at Key Stage 3 suggests that policies for improving educational attainment should remain focused on this age group. 3.10.17 The city has high levels of domestic violence with nearly 2,600 domestic violence crimes and incidents in 2003-04125. It is estimated that less than half (1,500) of Domestic Violence Incidents were recorded as crimes126. Around half of domestic violence victims recorded in Brighton and Hove’s supporting people framework were parents127. Exposure to violence in the home is also linked to juvenile crime and aggression128. 3.10.18 Lone parents make up a very large proportion of out-of-work households across the city, and face significant barriers in taking up employment or training opportunities. The recent green paper from DWP129 highlights significant changes in benefit support for this group, including removal of automatic Income Support entitlement for those lone parents with children over 12 (this age threshold to be reduced to seven in 2010). 3.10.19 It is also important to take into account families with one parent in low paid work as well as lone parents – there is little good data on this group at local level, but DWP are looking to develop better information and combine with data on out-of-work households.

3.11 Community strength and participation

What is the evidence?

Community strength contributes to economic and social outcomes, but is difficult to measure 3.11.1 Research indicates that community strength and social capital contribute to a range of economic and social outcomes including: growth in GDP130; higher educational

124 Brighton and Hove Socio-Economic Baseline Report (2003), Labour Market and the Economy (chapter four), p.7. Available at: www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/regeneration/Ch_4_Labour_Market_and_the_Economy.pdf 125 Brighton and Hove Community Safety Crime and Drugs Audit 2004 126 Brighton and Hove Socio-Economic Baseline Report (2003) Poverty and Economic Activity (chapter nine), Brighton & Hove and Adur Area Investment Framework, p.33. Available at: www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/regeneration/Ch_9_Poverty_and_Economc_Inactivity.pdf 127 Brighton and Hove Community Safety Crime and Drugs Audit 2004 128 Brighton and Hove Socio-Economic Baseline Report (2003) Poverty and Economic Activity (chapter nine), Brighton & Hove and Adur Area Investment Framework, p.33. Available at: www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/regeneration/Ch_9_Poverty_and_Economc_Inactivity.pdf 129 DWP (2007). In work, better off: next steps to full employment. Available from http://www.dwp.gov.uk/welfarereform/in-work-better-off/in-work-better-off.pdf 130 For an overview of this area see: Knack, S. & Keefer, P. (1997) ‘Does social capital have an economic payoff? A cross-country investigation’ Quarterly Journal of Economics, Nov 97, Vol. 112 Issue 4, pp. 1251-1288.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 43 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

attainment131; lower levels of crime132; and better health133. However it is notoriously difficult to accurately define, let alone measure, social capital and community strength / engagement. 3.11.2 Locally, surveys of local partner managers for the Neighbourhood Renewal team134 highlight that the community engagement work funded through NRF over the last few years has improved the delivery of services at a neighbourhood level. They also found: • Services/partners had established links with the communities they aimed to connect with, and had held forums and events to improve accountability • Most managers expressed that generic community engagement at the neighbourhood level helped their service achieve its targets • Most managers and front-line workers identified that their service would suffer in the future if generic community engagement workers were no longer present

The strength of the VCS locally 3.11.3 More than 10,000 people are involved in the organisations that responded to the VCS audit (2003). 1,750 people are involved as members of management committees; 6,300 people are involved as volunteers; and 2,200 are involved as paid employees135. 3.11.4 The turnover reported by the community and voluntary organisations that responded to the audit was £22.9 million in their most recent financial year. If the in-kind value of volunteering is added to turnover, the total is £40.6 million. The Gross Value Added to the local economy (similar to GDP) using government conversion ratios is £20.7 million.136

Resident perceptions and voter participation 3.11.5 Local residents highlight that community activities are improving (or at least, not worsening). In 2003-4, 88% of Brighton and Hove residents thought that for their local area, over the past three years, community activities have got better or stayed the same, compared to a mean of 85% nationally.137 3.11.6 At the national elections, Brighton and Hove had a slightly higher electoral turnout than the national average. The highest levels of local election turnout were in Stanford (50%) and Wish (47%) wards; areas with older more stable resident populations. The lowest levels of turnout were seen in Moulsecoomb and Bevendean (27%) and Brunswick and Adelaide wards; these areas have high proportions of students and adults in short term rented accommodation.

131 For an overview of this area see: Portes, A. (1998) ‘Social Capital: Its Origins and Applications in Modern Sociology’ Annual Review of Sociology, Vol. 24, Issue .1. 132 For an overview of this area see: Forrest, R & Kearns, A. (2001) ‘Social Cohesion, Social Capital and the Neighbourhood’ Urban Studies, Volume 38, Issue. 12, pp. 2125 – 2143. 133 For an overview of this area see: Health Development Agency (2003) Social capital for health: Investigating the links between social capital and health using the British Household Panel Survey, Health Development Agency, NHS. Available at: www.renewal.net/Documents/RNET/Research/Socialcapitalinvestigating.pdf 134 Brighton and Hove NR Team (2007) Community Engagement and Service Providers in Neighbourhood Renewal Areas - Summary of Questionnaire Results, Brighton and Hove Council. 135 ibid 136 ibid 137 ODPM Best Value General Survey. Available at: www.areaprofiles.audit- commission.gov.uk/(30vmgz55jpidqdyt3fqgpb55)/DetailPage.aspx?entity=10004855

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 44 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

What are the implications? 3.11.7 It is difficult to identify rigorously which local neighbourhoods or groups are most cohesive, in other words to define and identify “community strength”. The Community Level Infrastructure Audit carried out by the The Trust for Developing Communities identified six key indicators of community capacity, though these were only examined for the Neighbourhood Renewal Areas across the city. For example, it is not clear to what extent more affluent areas across the city would show higher or lower levels of “community strength”, and information is not available, likewise, for communities of interest. 3.11.8 The role of the Voluntary and Community Sector in service delivery is important, however is not explored in the analysis of need presented in this report. We have picked-up this issue in Phase 2 of the project.

3.12 Health inequalities

What is the evidence? 3.12.1 Life expectancy across the city is rising, however male life expectancy is well below the regional average, with female life expectancy just under that of the region. The gap in life expectancy between the combined Neighbourhood Renewal Areas (77.6 years for 2003/5) and the rest of the city (79.3 years) identifies that there remain wide variations within the city138. 3.12.2 Analysis of healthy life expectancy139 data from ONS also identifies a high variation in healthy life expectancy among wards. As with overall life expectancy, the more deprived wards of Queen’s Park, East Brighton, Moulsecoomb and Bevendean have the lowest healthy life expectancy at birth. 3.12.3 In general, BME groups are less likely to experience poor health than White British group, however, sickness and disability rates among the working age population are higher for Bangladeshi ethnic minority groups than the city average. Other groups at greater risk of poor health include homeless. 3.12.4 In addition, a wide range of health issues have been picked up in the sections above, including people out-of-work due to ill-health, disability and mental health issues, and teenage pregnancy levels.

What are the implications? 3.12.5 Health inequalities issues across the city are highlighted in the annual Director of Public Health report140, as well as the more recent Health Inequalities Technical Supplement work141. These reports stress the importance of the wider socio-economic determinants of health across the city. They also provide good supporting research

138 Analysis from Brighton and Hove PCT (2007). Strategy to Reduce Health Inequalities in Brighton and Hove: Technical Supplement 2007. Available from: www.brightonandhovepct.nhs.uk/healthylives/inequalities/index.asp. Life expectancy data is developed by ONS and published on the Neighbourhood Renewal Unit Floor Targets Interactive website www.fti.neighbourhood.gov.uk/ 139 Healthy life expectancy is the length of time people can expect to live without disability. 140 Director of Public Health (2005). Health in a healthy city 141 Brighton and Hove PCT (2007). Strategy to Reduce Health Inequalities in Brighton and Hove: Technical Supplement 2007. Available from: www.brightonandhovepct.nhs.uk/healthylives/inequalities/index.asp

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 45 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

including analysis of primary care across the city using the Quality and Outcomes Framework data, and links to geodemographic classifications of small areas.

3.13 Substance misuse

What is the evidence?

Brighton and Hove has high levels of substance misuse 3.13.1 Research for the Director of Public Health annual report identifies that the city has the highest rate of problem drug users (opiates and/or crack cocaine) in the South East142. Of particular concern is the high numbers of heroin users in the city. Research by Imperial College during 2001/02 suggests that there are approximately 2,300 injecting misusers in the city, a higher rate than Liverpool and parts of Inner London. Consequently the city has higher rates of disease as a result of needle sharing than elsewhere143. In 2003 Brighton and Hove was identified as one of the 37 national ‘crack priority areas’. These areas were designated by the Home Office as areas where use of drugs and associated criminal activity is considered to be a major cause for concern144. 3.13.2 Drug-related deaths are high. Based on 2001 data, Brighton and Hove has the second highest rate of drug-related deaths in the country, over three times the South East regional average. Approximately 80% of drug-related deaths are in men and the average age is 40 years. Benzodiazepines are implicated in around 40 % of the deaths, heroin in 50% of deaths and alcohol in 60% of the deaths145. 3.13.3 In line with national trends, there is evidence of increasing trends in stimulant use for younger groups (pupils aged 14-15). However, two-thirds of pupils surveyed locally had not taken illicit drugs, showing no increase over the past 3 years146. 3.13.4 Additionally, an estimated 45,000 adults of working age in Brighton and Hove are hazardous drinkers. Between 2001 and 2003 Brighton and Hove was ranked the 2nd highest local authority (LA) in England and Wales for alcohol-related deaths in men. Alcohol-related death rates have almost doubled in men over the last 15 years147

142 Figures quoted from Brighton and Hove Director of Public Health (forthcoming) Annual Report. 143 Home Office (2004) Estimating prevalence of problem drug use: multiple methods in Brighton, Liverpool and London, Home Office. Available at: http://www.homeoffice.gov.uk/rds/pdfs04/rdsolr3604.pdf 144 Brighton and Hove City Council (2003) Notice of Motion: Tackling Drug/Alcohol Abuse and Associated Crime and Disorder in Brighton and Hove: Improved Ways of Working. Available at: http://216.239.59.104/search?q=cache:ZR5oUC25DHMJ:peace.brighton- hove.gov.uk/Intranet/CommitteeMgt.NSF/0/F822BA90DE56453980256DA4005713DF/%24File/I tem%2B11(e)%2BNM-Drug%2Babuse- partnerships.doc+%2237+national+crack+priority+areas%22andhl=enandct=clnkandcd=1andgl= uk [accessed: 27 August 2007]. 145 Figures quoted from Brighton and Hove Director of Public Health (forthcoming) Annual Report. 146 Figures reported from Brighton and Hove Crime and Disorder Strategic Assessment 2007 (draft). 147 Figures quoted from Brighton and Hove Director of Public Health (forthcoming) Annual Report.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 46 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

What are the implications? 3.13.5 There are strong links between substance misuse and mental health problems. People with drug and alcohol problems are known to be at increased risk of mental illness, with most drug-related deaths due to mental health and behavioural problems. A co- ordinated approach between traditional mental health and substance misuse services is likely to be needed for those people with both severe mental health problems and problematic substance misuse. 3.13.6 Local research shows wide variation at neighbourhood level, with increased impact of substance misuse on communities in priority neighbourhoods. Residents in Neighbourhood Renewal Areas are significantly more likely to highlight alcohol and drugs as a problem than people in non-NRAs148. 3.13.7 The links between drug misuse and crime are important. The launch of the Operation Reduction initiative has seen more than 100 drug users receive treatment and support 149. There is some evidence to suggest that falls in burglary rates across Brighton and Hove, particularly in east Brighton, can be linked to the increase in drug users receiving treatment.150

3.14 Other issues

Barriers to enterprise across the city 3.14.1 The lack of affordable business premises across the city is highlighted as a major driver in the current internal consultation on the LDF Core Options151. Although the most recent employment land analysis identifies enough office employment land allocated for the city to meet targets under the Regional Spatial Strategy to 2016, this will only be if development is delivered on all the allocated Major Development Areas across the city 152. Beyond 2016 the city will need to find additional employment sites. 3.14.2 There are links here to the issue of those with low skills facing increasing pressure in competing for work. Scarcity of affordable premises in the city is likely to be a factor in business decisions on whether or not to locate into the city - this will be a particular issue for larger employers more likely to take on those with low skills. 3.14.3 Engaging with the transport plan is also important: good transport links are needed between employment centres and the more deprived residential areas.

148 Figures reported from Brighton and Hove Crime and Disorder Strategic Assessment 2007 (draft). 149 A crime reduction programme launched jointly by Brighton Police, Crime Reduction Initiatives and the DAAT in 2005 150 Home Office (2007) Minister for crime reduction visits Brighton and Hove DAAT on tackling drugs day. Available at: www.gnn.gov.uk/Content/Detail.asp?ReleaseID=286465andNewsAreaID=2 [accessed: 27 August 2007]. 151 Brighton and Hove Council (2007). LDF Core Strategy, Refreshed Preferred Options, First Draft August 2007, Internal Consultation. 152 Roger Tym and Partners (2006). Employment Land Study. Available from http://peace.brighton- hove.gov.uk/Intranet/CommitteeMgt.nsf/0/B1920DB9388CB83E802571E2004F7970/$File/Item+ 61+Employment+Land+Study+apdx+-+exc+summary.pdf

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 47 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Women 3.14.4 Lone parent households account for nearly 70% of all ‘out of work’ households in the city, with roughly 90% of lone parent families in the city headed by women. Linked to this, 59% of all Income Support claimants across the city are female. 3.14.5 As seen nationally, women in Brighton are more likely to be economically inactive than men (61% of women are economically active, compared with 75% of men). Of those that do work, earnings are lower than men (by £34 per week), and jobs are more likely to be in part-time employment. In 2001, women accounted for 75% of total part-time employment. Additionally, levels of self-employment for women are lower than for men (6% versus 15%).

Older people 3.14.6 Population projections across the city forecast a decrease in numbers of older people over next 10 years, in contrast to the country as a whole. Combined with increasing house costs, the implication is that older groups may become more polarised: divided between those more affluent older people who choose to retire here, and those older people already living in social housing. 3.14.7 In one of the most deprived areas in Brighton (in Queen’s Park), high deprivation levels are primarily driven by older groups. Older people across the city are at greater risk of low income; 9.6% of older people are claiming the income guarantee element of pension credit, almost double the regional average (5%) and significantly above the national average153. 3.14.8 We have picked up specific issues for older groups, for example around worklessness, disability and Pension Credit, in sections above.

LGBT groups 3.14.9 The ‘Count Me In Too’ study (2006) found that almost three quarters of LGBT respondents had experienced hate crime in the past 5 years (ranging from verbal harassment to physical violence) because of their sexual and/or gender identities154. 3.14.10 LGBT groups are also at greater risk of mental health issues and homelessness. These issues have been picked up in the relevant sections above.

Migrant workers 3.14.11 The city ranks among the highest 10% of Local Authorities across England in terms of the numbers of migrant workers, with 5,000 National Insurance Number registrations from overseas workers in 2005 alone, and a further 4,500 in 2006155. 3.14.12 Local research identifies that newly arrived migrant workers are likely to be living in multi-occupied poor housing and priced out of the rented market. As the majority of migrants are young, they are less likely to require health care. But evidence suggests that there are specific issues which include alcohol-related health problems156.

153 Pension Credit data (August 2006) 154 Browne, K. (2007) Count me in too - LGBT Lives in Brighton and Hove - Initial Findings: Academic Report. Available at: www.spectrum- lgbt.org/cmiToo/downloads/CMIT_AcademicReport_final_June07 155 DWP National Insurance Number NINo. Registrations of overseas workers. 156 Linda Beanlands (2007), Community Safety. Migration to Brighton and Hove: An initial overview.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 48 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

3.14.13 However there is relatively little evidence of the impact of migrant workers, or their needs. For example: how long do they stay in the city (on average)? Are their skills being under-utilised? What language barriers do they face in accessing services and employment? What evidence is there of inequalities issues, for example evidence of low income, out-of-work or poor health benefits take-up? Are particular neighbourhoods changing markedly? Further research would be useful here.

Asylum seekers 3.14.14 A very small number of asylum seekers - approximately 12 people – are being housed in the city by the (Home Office) Border and Immigration Agency. A further approximately 50 people are receiving subsistence-only support from Border and Immigration Agency in the city. In addition there are 22 unaccompanied asylum seeking children under 18 receiving support from the CYPT as well as 29 unaccompanied asylum-seeking care leavers between 18 and 21 also receiving support157. 3.14.15 This is likely to be an underestimate of the total number of unaccompanied asylum seekers in the area as the figure does not include unaccompanied asylum seekers supported by other authorities. There are also an unknown number of destitute refused asylum seekers in the city (some estimate several hundred)158. 3.14.16 Asylum Seekers are at greater risk of poor mental and physical health. Research focusing upon destitute asylum seekers suggests that nearly two thirds (65%) attributed poor health outcomes as a result of inability to support themselves through work159. Health risks are compounded by difficulties faced by these groups in accessing primary health care. There is some evidence to suggest that language barriers and lack of knowledge of rights play a role in making access to health care more difficult. Additional barriers centre around the fear of being sent back, of being challenged by their GP to show proof of eligibility for health care160. 3.14.17 An additional challenge identified locally is that the ability to support asylum seekers is made more difficult by the fact that many are explicitly excluded from work, benefits, healthcare, housing etc by immigration legislation161.

3.15 What is the evidence that particular communities are at increased risk of inequality? 3.15.1 As well as spatial analysis of inequality, we have also explored whether groups and communities are experiencing high levels of inequality. Some groups and communities are clearly affected by the effects of discrimination and other social barriers which impact on their life chances and opportunities. The impacts of discrimination in affecting inequalities should not be underestimated.

157 Information provided by Lucy Bryson - Policy and Development Co-ordinator for Asylum Seekers and Refugees 158 ibid 159 Care Services Improvement Partnership (2006) Mental Health, Destitution and Asylum- Seekers - A study of destitute asylum-seekers in the dispersal areas of the South East of England, Care Services Improvement Partnership. Available at: www.asylumscotland.org.uk/assets/downloads/research/Mental%20Health,%20Destitution%20an d%20AS%20FINAL%20REPORT.pdf 160 ibid 161 Lucy Bryson - Policy and Development Co-ordinator for Asylum Seekers and Refugees

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 49 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

3.15.2 Our analysis has drawn on a range of local sources, as well as carrying out additional primary research – the chief limitation here is the availability of appropriate information for each group. 3.15.3 The Table below summarises the key findings for each of the groups.

Group Key findings Women • As seen nationally, women in Brighton are more likely to be economically inactive than men (61% of women are economically active, compared with 75% of men) • Of those that do work, earnings are lower than men (by £34 per week162), and jobs are more likely to be in part-time employment, indeed, in 2001 women accounted for 75% of total part-time employment163. Levels of self-employment for women are lower than for men (6% versus 15%)164 • Lone parent households account for nearly 70% of all ‘out of work’ households in the city. Across the city, roughly 90% of lone parent families are headed by women • 59% of all Income Support claimants across the city are female165 BME • Black African, Black Caribbean, Pakistani have higher levels of unemployment in Brighton. For some minority ethnic groups, including Bangladeshi and Chinese, economic activity rates are around 50%, well below city averages. • In Brighton, just under one-half of the Bangladeshi population live in the most deprived areas, as do nearly one-third of the Black African population • Sickness and disability rates are higher for Bangladeshis than the city average. In addition, half of Bangladeshis have no qualifications • Regional research identifies that language barriers are significant in relation to accessing employment and education. There are also links with increased fear of crime White • White British are more likely to experience poor health than other ethnic British groups • The white British majority population in Brighton performed slightly less well than children as a whole at GCSE level (just under 54% of white British pupils achieved 5 A* to C GCSEs, compared with overall level of 55%166) Migrant • Local research identifies that newly arrived migrant workers are likely to be workers living in multi-occupied poor housing and priced out of the rented market. • As the majority of migrants are young, they are less likely to require health care. But evidence suggests that there are specific issues which include alcohol- related health problems Asylum • Regional research identifies that asylum seekers are at greater risk of poor seekers mental and physical health

162 Source: ONS Annual Survey of Hours and Earnings. 163 Source: Census (2001). 164 Source: Census (2001). 165 This is likely to be linked to a high proportion of lone parents among IS claimants. Source DWP 2006 166 Source: Department for Children, Schools and Families (2007).

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 50 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

• Additionally, destitute asylum seekers attribute poor health outcomes as a result of not being allowed to support themselves through work Roma • National findings suggest that this group suffers a range of inequalities in the Gypsies and fields of education, housing, benefit take-up and health outcomes. Traveller population

Lone Parent • In Brighton, more than one-quarter of all children live in a lone parent Families family. In most cases these families are headed by the mother • Locally, lone-parents are likely to be out-of-work, face barriers to employment. • Almost 20% of lone parents live in the 10% most deprived areas of the town167. • Lone parent households account for nearly 70% of all ‘out of work’ households in the city • National findings also suggest that this group is more vulnerable to long- term illness for both parent and child Children and • Locally, children living in low income households or living in deprived areas young people are significantly less likely to achieve 5 GCSE passes at A*-C level • Children with multiple needs (eligible for Free School Meals and have Special Educational Needs) are more likely to live in the most deprived areas • Compared with their national and regional peers, children in Brighton fare badly at Key Stage 3 • Brighton and Hove has higher levels of pupil absence (1.9% of all days are ‘half-days’) than England and the region as a whole (where 1.4% of all days are ‘half days’)168, with Bangladeshi and Black Caribbean pupils having the highest levels of absence. The city also has a higher proportion of pupils who have been excluded from school than England as a whole • A higher proportion of children in the city receive Disability Living Allowance (3.1% of 0-15 years old) than across the South East and England as a whole (both 2.4%)169 • Young offenders are more likely to have Special Educational Needs. Nearly one third of young offenders across the city are from the East Brighton NDC area Children in • Brighton has a higher proportion of children in care than the national care average (83 per 10,000 compared with 55 per 10,000)170 • This group is likely to have been victim of violent abuse, emotional abuse or neglect. More than half reported being bullied at school as a direct result of being in care • More than half of care leavers were NEET, the year after taking GCSEs • Children in care are more than twice as likely to have been convicted or cautioned for an offence Older people • Just over one-third of all workless people claiming benefits across the city

167 Source: Census (2001) and ID (2004). 168 Source: DfES (2007), data refers to 2005/2006. 169 Source: DWP (2006) Disability :Living Allowance statistics. 170 Source: DfES (2006) Looked after children

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 51 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

are aged between 50 and 65. This group are more likely to be claiming benefits long-term • Over half of those between 60 and 74 years old, and nearly half of 45-59 years old, have no qualifications • Among the most deprived areas in Brighton, high deprivation levels are in part due to older groups. In the city as whole, 18% of older people live in income deprivation, and in Queen’s Park (around the East road area) this proportion reaches 40%171. • Older people are particularly at risk of low income, poor health, depression, living alone and high levels of social care need. Older groups in Brighton are more likely to have greater fear of crime Disabled • More than half of working age people who claim benefits across Brighton groups and Hove claim as a result of incapacity, there are also high rates of DLA claimants in the city (4.5% of the population)172 • National research suggests that disabled people face barriers to employment, with less than two-thirds of employers prepared to employ physically disabled people, and only just over one-third willing to recruit a person with mental health issues • Brighton pupils without Special Educational Needs are more than four times more likely to attain good GCSEs as those with Special Educational Needs • Levels of mental health issues are higher in Brighton than in any other authority in the South East., According to the mental health indicator in the Indices of Deprivation 2004, 36% of the SOAs across the city are in the most deprived 10% of areas in England. Queens Park has particularly high levels • National evidence shows that disabled people are more likely to be a victim of hate crime, and (across Brighton) exhibit a greater fear of crime. Carers • Nearly 22,000 people provide unpaid care across Brighton and Hove, 9% of the population, with nearly one-in-five providing care for over 50 hours a week • People providing care make up 14% of all economically inactive people across the city, and face significant barriers in taking up employment or training opportunities LGBT • Local research shows the LGBT group is vulnerable to hate crime, violent attack, discrimination and bullying • LGBT groups also show higher risk of mental illness and suicide, with surveys highlighting 6% of the LGBT population had attempted suicide in the past 5 years173. • Transgendered groups are particularly vulnerable to homelessness, with surveys identifying 36% of transgendered people experiencing homelessness174 Homeless • Brighton has one of the highest homeless and rough sleeper levels in the country • Younger groups, especially young LGBT and those experiencing domestic violence are at greatest risk of being homeless in Brighton

171 Source: IMD (2004). 172 Source: DWP (2007) Disability :Living Allowance statistics. 173 Browne, K. (2007) Count me in too: LGBT Lives in Brighton and Hove Initial Findings: Academic Report. 174 Ibid.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 52 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

• Homeless people are at increased risk of poor health and drug use Ex-offenders • National research suggests that over 50% of those leaving prison or on probation are unemployed. Further, long-term unemployment among the ex- offender population is high • This group is also likely to face homelessness and lack of skills. NEETS • There were over 650 NEETs across the city. • These groups are likely to need additional support with 9% of all NEETS facing health problems; 8% recorded homeless and 4% inadequately housed. People with • People with mental health problems account for 37% of all workless people mental across Brighton and Hove health • Brighton and Hove contains an area (in Queens _Park) with the highest problems level of people with mental health issues in the country based on prescribing levels, suicides, and health benefits data Substance • Brighton and Hove has the second highest rate of drug-related deaths in the Misuse country, over three times the South East regional average • Between 2001 and 2003 Brighton and Hove was ranked the 2nd highest local authority (LA) in England and Wales for alcohol-related deaths in men. Alcohol- related death rates have almost doubled in men over the last 15 years Faith • The available evidence relating to faith communities of interest is relatively communities scarce, and increasingly out of date (as mainly Census based)175. • Economically active people of Muslim faith are almost twice as likely to be unemployed as the population as a whole across Brighton • Nationally, 52% of people believe that religious prejudice has increased in the past 5 years and 24% of people in Britain feel that there is ‘a lot’ of religious prejudice176. People living • The proportion of people living in social housing in the city (15%) is below in rented and the small city average 20%)177 social • Social housing tenants are slightly more likely to be unemployed (6.4% accommodati unemployment rate), than people renting in the private sector (6.2%). on Unemployment rates for owner occupiers are significantly lower (2.2%)178. • Rented households make up a greater share of total unemployed households in Brighton (62%) than across the South East (45%) and England (53%) as a whole, and the proportion of unemployed people living in private rented housing in Brighton (40%) is more than double the proportion across the region (19%) and England (18%) 179. • More than 61% of the households living in social housing across the city have an income below £10,400 p.a.180. Almost 57% of the families living in social housing receive some type of state benefits and nearly 53% of the households have problems related to poor health

175 SELD Workshop Paper – 19 September 2006 “Faith communities: evidence for strategy & delivery in neighbourhood renewal” Nov 2007 revision (p.3) 176 Kitchen et al 2006b cited in SELD Workshop Paper – 19 September 2006 “Faith communities: evidence for strategy & delivery in neighbourhood renewal” Nov 2007 revision 177 Census 2001 178 All figures from Census 2001. 179 Ibid. 180 Evidence from Brighton and Hove Housing Tenants Status Survey (2006).

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 53 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Appendix A The Brighton and Hove context

A.1 Introduction A.1.1 The following Appendices provide analysis of inequality for particular areas and groups across the city, examining each of the four LAA themes in turn: • Appendix B - Developing a prosperous and sustainable economy • Appendix C - Ensuring all our children and young people have the best possible start in life • Appendix D - A healthy city that cares for vulnerable people and tackles deprivation and injustice • Appendix E - A safe city that values our unique environment A.1.2 To set the scene for this analysis, this Appendix examines the demographic profile of the city, together with overall levels of multiple deprivation. We examine the following: • People in Brighton and Hove – we look at population size, trends and projections • Key groups across Brighton and Hove: throughout this report we provide evidence on particular groups experiencing inequality. In this Appendix we profile the main groups • Multiple deprivation – we look at the most deprived areas across the city, with data drilling down to the most detailed Output Area level • Are particular groups concentrated in the most deprived areas of Brighton and Hove?

A.2 People in Brighton and Hove

Brighton and Hove’s population has been fairly stable since 2001…. A.2.1 The most recent information identifies over a quarter of a million people living in Brighton and Hove (255,000)181. In recent years Brighton and Hove has experienced relatively slow population growth. The population has grown by 0.6% between 2000 and 2006182. This is slower than average across other small cities (3.6%) over the same period183.

…however there has been an increase in the size of the 35-44 year old age group A.2.2 Previous research has indicated that between 1991 and 2001 the most significant change in the city’s population profile has been a growth in the 30 plus working age population and a fall in the retirement age population184. A.2.3 This trend has continued since 2001 with the population aged 40-45 growing by more than a fifth between 2001 and 2006 (22%).

181 Office of National Statistics (2005) Mid Year Estimates 182 The most recent year for which Mid Year Estimates are available 183 ONS Mid Year Estimates 2000 to 2006 184 Brighton and Hove Socio-Economic Baseline Report (2003), Demography and Geographical Context (chapter three), Brighton & Hove and Adur Area Investment Framework, (p.8). Available at: www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/regeneration/Ch_3_Demography_and_Geog_Context.pdf].

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 54 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

The population of older people is declining across the city A.2.4 In contrast to the working age population, Brighton and Hove’s older population (65+) has declined by 7% between 2001 and 2006. A.2.5 Recent population projections estimate that Brighton and Hove’s 65+ population will continue to decline until 2012 (ONS population projections 2004), in contrast to a sharp rise in the over 65 population across England as a whole.

A growing working age population will increase demand for employment and training provision A.2.6 There are a number of policy implications in relation to the changing demographics of Brighton and Hove. A.2.7 An increasing working age population relative to retirement age population will potentially reduce health and social care burdens as this group is typically healthier than older groups. A.2.8 However, a growing working age population presents additional challenges, particularly with regard to the increased numbers of people requiring employment or educational opportunities to prevent worklessness185. This is of particular concern in Brighton and Hove where economic activity rates among the fastest growing working age group (adults aged 35-54) remains below that for younger adults (25-34)186 and lower than economic activity rates for 35-54 year olds across the South East region and England as a whole187.

Brighton and Hove’s population is projected to continue to increase at a faster rate than across the region and England A.2.9 Brighton and Hove’s population is projected to increase by 11% between 2007 and 2029 to just over 278,000 people188.

A.3 Key groups across Brighton and Hove A.3.1 Throughout this report we provide evidence on particular groups experiencing inequality. In this Appendix we highlight the main groups examined. This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all communities across Brighton and Hove. Rather, we have prioritised those groups supported under the EQUAL programme or identified by the project steering group. A.3.2 Below we highlight the main groups across Brighton and Hove: • Children • Children in care • Young adults • Students • Older people • Lone parent households • Lesbian, Gay, Bisexual and Transgender (LGBT)

185 Brighton and Hove Socio-Economic Baseline Report (2003), Demography and Geographical Context (chapter three), Brighton & Hove and Adur Area Investment Framework, p.9. Available at: www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/regeneration/Ch_3_Demography_and_Geog_Context.pdf. 186 Census (2001) 187 81% of people aged 35-54 are economically active across Brighton and Hove compared with 85% across the South East region and 82% across England. 188 Office of National Statistics (2004-2029) sub-national population projections.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 55 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

• Black and Minority Ethnic (BME) • Roma Gypsy and Traveller population • Homeless population • Social housing tenants • Ex-offenders A.3.3 We examine each in turn, identifying the size of the group across the city, as well as and any specific

Children

Children make up a relatively small part of Brighton and Hove’s population A.3.4 Children make up a smaller population across Brighton and Hove (with 15% of the population aged under 15) compared with the South East region and England as a whole (both 18%)189. A.3.5 Children are more likely to live in low income households than adults across Brighton and Hove, with just under 25% of all children experiencing income deprivation across the city compared with 15% of people across the city as a whole190.

Children in Care

Brighton has a higher proportion of children in care than the national average A.3.6 In 2006 there were 390 children looked after in care in Brighton and Hove. The city has a significantly higher proportion of children in care (83 per 10,000 children) than the regional (42) and national (55) averages191. A.3.7 Just under 80% of care placements in Brighton and Hove are due to abuse or neglect – significantly higher than the regional (58%) and national (62%) averages. Other primary reasons include family stress, absent parenting and disability192.

In Brighton, children in care are more likely to be in multiple placements than across England as a whole A.3.8 Children in care are at risk of experiencing a cycle of disadvantage, with highly disruptive experiences. A.3.9 More than 50% of children in care have been in more than four placements and almost half have attended six or more schools, and high levels of mental distress (particularly in Brighton and Hove where high proportions of people are in care due to abuse or neglect). Across Brighton and Hove 18% of children have been in more than four placements in a single year compared with 12% across the region and England as a whole193. A.3.10 This is linked to problems of low educational attainment and bullying (more than half reported being bullied at school as a direct result of being in care) affecting self

189 Mid Year Estimates (2004) Small area Pop 2004 190 DCLG (2004) Income Deprivation Affecting Children Index (IDACI) and ID 2004 Income domain 191 DfES (2006) Looked after children 192 ibid 193 DfES (2006) Looked after children

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 56 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

confidence and mental wellbeing. More than 50% of care leavers were not in education or employment the year after they finished GCSEs194.

Young adults

Brighton and Hove has a relatively large number of young adults… A.3.11 Brighton and Hove has a relatively youthful population. The 2001 Census showed that the city has a lower median age (36) than the region (39) and England as a whole (37) and significantly lower than neighbouring East and West Sussex (43 and 41 respectively). A.3.12 This is largely due to large proportion of young adults in the city – there are just under one in five adults (19.8%) aged 18-30, compared with a regional average of 14.4% and an average of 10.8% in neighbouring East Sussex. A.3.13 These groups face a number of issues including barriers to housing and lower economic activity195as they are often moving from education to employment and from living with family to living independently.

Students

Brighton and Hove has a large student population. A.3.14 One of the reasons for the significant proportion of young adults in Brighton and Hove is the large student population in the city. A.3.15 The 2001 Census recorded just over 20,000 full-time students in Brighton and Hove196. In addition there are a significant number of part-time students in Brighton and Hove and the city’s two Universities have a combined population of over 32,000. A.3.16 The largest student populations are found in Hollingbury and Stanmer (where Sussex University and Brighton University campuses are located) Moulsecoomb and Bevendean, Hanover and Elm Grove and St Peters and North Laine (2001 Census). A.3.17 The impact of the large student population on the population profile extends beyond those attending University with a high proportion of students staying on after they have completed their course. Estimates from the University of Sussex suggest that around 30% of graduates remain in area for at least six months after completing their studies197. A.3.18 Large student populations impact on community stability as they are transitory populations with high levels of population mobility. The 2001 Census revealed that over 18% of the city’s population had moved in or out of the area in the last 12 months (the 16th highest level of population mobility in the country).

194 All figures taken from: Barnados (2006) Failed by the System - The views of young care leavers on their educational experiences. Available at: www.barnardos.org.uk/failed_by_the_system_report.pdf 195 62.8% of 18-24 year olds are economically active compared with 67.8% of the working age population as a whole (Census, 2001) 196 However, the Census is known to undercount the total number of students in an area. 197 Brighton and Hove Socio-Economic Baseline Report (2003), Demography and Geographical Context (chapter three), Brighton & Hove and Adur Area Investment Framework, p.9. Available at: www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/regeneration/Ch_3_Demography_and_Geog_Context.pdf

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 57 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Older people

Brighton and Hove has a relatively small older person population in the context of the region and England as a whole A.3.19 In contrast to younger groups, the size of the older people group in Brighton and Hove is decreasing. In 2005 there were just under 40,000 people aged 65 and over making up less than 15% of Brighton and Hove’s population. Older people make-up a smaller proportion of the city’s population compared with the South East (where just under 17% of the population are aged 65 and over) and the country as a whole (16%)198.

Older people across Brighton and Hove are particularly at risk of low income, poor health and high levels of social care need A.3.20 Older people are particularly at risk from exclusion. A.3.21 Data on Income Deprivation Affecting Older People (IDAOP) from the IMD 2004 revealed that just under 18% of older people across the city experience income deprivation. In some neighbourhoods in the Queens Park area of the city, income deprivation among older groups is as high as 40%. A.3.22 Research also indicates that older people on limited incomes do not access all the public benefits they are entitled to.199 Levels of low income therefore, are likely to be higher than indicated by benefit levels. A.3.23 Older groups are also at greater risk of poor health and are likely to have high social care needs. These social care needs are likely to be particularly acute for older people living alone who have less access to informal care. A.3.24 Brighton and Hove has a greater number of older people living alone (69%) compared with the region (59%) and England as a whole (61%).

Lone parent households

Children across the city are more likely to live in lone parent households than across England as a whole A.3.25 There are over 13,000 children living in lone parent households across the city. This represents 28% of the child population of Brighton and Hove. Brighton and Hove has a higher proportion of children living in lone parent households than the region (21%) and England as a whole (26%)200 though comparable with small cities as a whole.. A.3.26 Lone parents are more likely to be excluded from the labour market. This is particularly the case in Brighton and Hove where 57% of all lone parents are out of work compared with 52% across other small cities, 50% across the South East region and 53% across England as a whole. A.3.27 Lone parents are concentrated in the most deprived areas of the city - over 18% of lone parent households live in the most deprived 10% of areas of Brighton and Hove

198 Office of National Statistics (2005) Mid Year Estimates 199 Bradshaw, J. & Richardson, D. (2007) Spatial variations in the take-up of means-tested benefits, Department for Communities and Local Government.; University of York, Social Policy Research Unit. Available at: www.publications.communities.gov.uk/pubdetails.asp?pubid=2636 . This report estimated that non take-up of pension credit among those entitled between 2003-2005 was 56% (Pension Credit: case non take-up rates by characteristics, p. 12) 200 HM Revenue and Customs (2005) Child Tax Credit data

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 58 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

(IMD 2004) with the largest numbers of children in lone parent households located in Moulsecoomb and Bevendean, East Brighton and Hollingbury and Stanmer201. A.3.28 The majority of lone parents are ex-married – separated or divorced, but the fastest growing group are single who become lone parents as a result of a birth outside marriage or a cohabitation breakdown. About 90%of lone parent families are headed by the mother202.

Lesbian, Gay, Bisexual and Transgender (LGBT) Same Sex Couple Households Brighton and Hove and selected comparison areas Same-sex couple households N % England 75,746 0.2% South East 13,318 0.2%

Brighton and Hove 2,554 1.3%

Bristol, city of 940 0.3% Norwich 292 0.3% Southampton 446 0.3% Wandsworth 1,134 0.5%

East Sussex 944 0.2% West Sussex 1,090 0.2%

Source: OCSI 2006 (from 2001 Census) A.3.29 There is little hard data on the size of the LGBT community at local level. The national 2001 Census provides information on the proportion of people living in same sex couple households. This is not an exhaustive count of the LGBT population however, as it only counts people in same-sex relationships that are living together in a household203. A.3.30 Brighton and Hove has the largest number and percentage of same sex couples of any district in the country. There are just under 2,600 people living in same sex couple households (1.3% of all people aged 16+) this is seven times greater than the national average (0.2%)204. A.3.31 However, the Brighton and Hove Crime and Disorder Audit 2001 estimates that there are 35,000 LGBT people living in the city205. A.3.32 The LGBT community are at risk of a number of aspects of social exclusion, for example, the Count Me In Too206 study found that 31% experienced domestic violence

201 ibid 202 Bradshaw, J., Levitas, R., and Finch, N. (1999) Lone Parents, Poverty and Social Exclusion. Working Paper 11. Adapted from the 1999 Poverty and Social Exclusion Survey of Britain, JRF. Available from: www.bris.ac.uk/poverty/pse/99PSE-WP11.pdf 203 Research from ‘Count Me in Too’ found just under 40% of those identifying as lesbian or gay lived with same sex partners (p.3) 204 Census (2001) 205 Cited in: Brighton and Hove Socio-Economic Baseline Report (2003), Demography and Geographical Context (chapter three), Brighton & Hove and Adur Area Investment Framework, p.3. Available at: www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/regeneration/Ch_3_Demography_and_Geog_Context.pdf

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 59 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

or abuse, 25% felt that they had experienced discrimination in provision of goods and services, 25% stated they had problems getting accommodation while 21% reported as having been homeless at one time or another207. A.3.33 Transgendered groups are particularly vulnerable to homelessness with 36% of transgendered people experiencing homelessness208.

Black and Minority Ethnic (BME)

Brighton and Hove has a smaller BME population than the national average… A.3.34 The 2001 Census estimated that there were just over 14,200 people from Black and Minority Ethnic (BME)209 groups across Brighton and Hove - 5.7% of the city’s population. This is lower than the England average (9.1%)and lower than the average across small cities as a whole (7.1%) (). A.3.35 Chart A below provides a breakdown of the city’s Black and Minority Ethnic communities Black and Minority Ethnic communities across Brighton and Hove

Source: Census 2001 A.3.36 Brighton and Hove does not contain one single large ethnic minority group - a range of ethnic groups are represented across the city. The largest ethnic minority group is the Indian community which make up 15% of the total ethnic minority population in the city.

206 Browne, K. (2007) Count me in too - LGBT Lives in Brighton and Hove - Initial Findings: Academic Report. Available at: www.spectrum- lgbt.org/cmiToo/downloads/CMIT_AcademicReport_final_June07.pdf 207 ibid, p.3 208 Browne, K. (2007) Count me in too - LGBT Lives in Brighton and Hove - Initial Findings: Academic Report. Available at: www.spectrum- lgbt.org/cmiToo/downloads/CMIT_AcademicReport_final_June07.pdf 209 BME here refers to people who were not classified as White British, White Irish or White Other in the 2001 census

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 60 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

A.3.37 The city also has a very large North African community with 1,500 people born in North Africa residing in the city (this represents 15% of the total North African born population in the whole of South East of England). A.3.38 Ethnic minority groups are not concentrated in any particular area across the city - 17 of the 21 wards across the city having ethnic minority populations of between 5 and 7.5%. The highest concentrations are in Hove in Brunswick and Adelaide, Goldsmid and Stanford wards where just over 7% of the population are from BME groups210.

However, the city has a more international population than England as a whole A.3.39 Although the ethnic minority population across Brighton and Hove is relatively small, the city has a large proportion of people born outside of England. A.3.40 Just under 15% of the city’s population were born outside the England in the 2001 Census. This is higher than the regional (12%) and national (12.5%) averages211. A.3.41 The city has double the proportion of people born in Western Europe (excluding the British Isles) than the region as a whole.

210 All ethnic minority figures taken from: Census (2001) 211 All country of birth figures taken from: Census (2001)

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 61 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Population by country of birth Brighton and Hove South East England N % N % N %

All people 247,817 100.0 8,000,645 100.0 49,138,831 100.0

Born In UK 221,090 89.2 7,349,275 91.9 44,594,817 90.8 Born in England 211,928 85.5 7,041,745 88.0 42,968,596 87.4

Born in Europe 232,779 93.9 7,603,219 95.0 46,045,077 93.7 Born in Republic of 2,682 1.1 64,384 0.8 460,287 0.9 Ireland Born in Western 7,374 3.0 153,767 1.9 726,523 1.5 Europe (excluding British Isles) Born in Eastern 1,371 0.6 29,453 0.4 235,900 0.5 Europe

Born In Africa 4,496 1.8 101,624 1.3 798,218 1.6 Born in North Africa 1,500 0.6 10,353 0.1 67,167 0.1 Born in West and 464 0.2 11,421 0.1 196,357 0.4 Central Africa Born in South and 2,532 1.0 79,850 1.0 534,694 1.1 East Africa

Born in Asia 6,697 2.7 189,033 2.4 1,566,998 3.2 Born in the Middle 1,622 0.7 23,810 0.3 211,298 0.4 East Born in the Far East 2,661 1.1 67,059 0.8 360,604 0.7 Born in South Asia 2,401 1.0 97,628 1.2 991,893 2.0

Norn in North 1,908 0.8 61,931 0.8 460,258 0.9 America Born in Canada 581 0.2 13,987 0.2 59,356 0.1 Born in the USA 874 0.4 28,919 0.4 141,198 0.3

Born in South 584 0.2 10,834 0.1 72,867 0.1 America

Born in Oceania 1,168 0.5 29,745 0.4 155,072 0.3

Source: OCSI 2006 (from 2001 Census)

Brighton and Hove has a large migrant worker population… A.3.42 The significant international presence in Brighton and Hove is partly the result of a large migrant worker population in the city. A.3.43 Data on National Insurance Number (NINO) registrations for non-nationals for 2005/06 (a measure of all new workers coming to an areas from abroad) show that there were just over 5,000 new national insurance registrations from overseas workers in Brighton and Hove in 2005 (this represents 3% of the total working age population

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 62 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

and 4% of the economically active population). The city ranks among the top 10% of authorities in England in terms of NINO registrations. A.3.44 The Figure below examines the breakdown of the city’s migrant worker population: National Insurance Number (NINO) registrations for non-nationals

Source: DWP 2005/6 A.3.45 The largest component of NINO registrations are from Poland who account for over 20% of all newly registered workers in the city. The other main nationalities of Brighton and Hove migrant workers include Spain and Slovakia. A.3.46 The large migrant worker population is leading to an increasingly international profile to Brighton and Hove’s population. In 2006 alone, 445 people were granted British Citizenship in the city212 whilst 20% of all new births in the city in 2005 were to mothers born outside of the UK (ONS 2005).

The ethnic minority population in Brighton and Hove is growing at a faster rate than across England as a whole. A.3.47 The demographic profile of the city is shifting. Between 2001 and 2004, the ethnic minority population of Brighton and Hove is estimated to have grown to 19,300 by 2004 (7.7% of the population).213 A.3.48 This represents a significant increase in the city’s ethnic minority population of 35% between 2001-2004 – this is almost double the national ethnic minority growth rate of 13% over the same period. A.3.49 The growth in the ethnic minority population is likely to raise a set of key challenges for Brighton and Hove. Economic Activity rates have historically been lower across all minority groups in Brighton and Hove - Just under 70% of Brighton’s White British population are economically active compared with economic activity rates of around 50% for some minority ethnic groups including Bangladeshi and Chinese. Black African and Bangladeshi groups are more than three times as likely to experience household

212 Home Office (2006) 213 Office of National Statistics (2004) Resident Population Estimates by Ethnic Group and Sex, All Persons; ethnic minority population estimates

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 63 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

overcrowding (2001 Census). Additionally, issues such as household overcrowding are also more acute214.

BME groups are likely to face additional language barriers A.3.50 The growing diversity of the city presents a number of key social cohesion and inclusion challenges. One of the biggest issues relates to language barriers. A.3.51 Estimates from the Skills for Life Survey 2002 suggest that the city contains over 7,000 people for whom English is a secondary language215, whilst more recent data from PLASC indicates that there are 1,750 pupils in Brighton and Hove for whom English is an Additional Language (EAL) (6.7%)216.

Asylum seekers 3.15.4 A very small number of asylum seekers - approximately 12 people – are being housed in the city by the (Home Office) Border and Immigration Agency. A further 50 people are receiving subsistence-only support from Border and Immigration Agency in the city. In addition there are 22 unaccompanied asylum seeking children under 18 receiving support from the CYPT as well as 29 unaccompanied asylum-seeking care leavers between 18 and 21 also receiving support217. 3.15.5 This is likely to be an underestimate of the total number of unaccompanied asylum seekers in the area as the figure does not include unaccompanied asylum seekers supported by other authorities. There are also an unknown number of destitute refused asylum seekers in the city (some estimate there are several hundred)218. 3.15.6 Asylum Seekers are at greater risk of poor mental and physical health. Research focusing upon destitute asylum seekers suggests that nearly two thirds (65%) attributed poor health outcomes as a result of inability to support themselves through work219. Health risks are compounded by difficulties faced by these groups in accessing primary health care. Thus there is evidence to suggest that language barriers and lack of knowledge of rights play some role in making access to health care more difficult. Additional barriers centre around the fear of being sent back, of being challenged by their GP to show proof of eligibility for health care220. 3.15.7 An additional challenge identified locally is that the ability to support asylum seekers is made more difficult by the fact that many are explicitly excluded from work, benefits, healthcare, housing etc by immigration legislation221.

214 DfES (2002) Skills for Life Survey

216 DfES 2005 217 Information provided by Lucy Bryson - Policy and Development Co-ordinator for Asylum Seekers and Refugees 218 ibid 219 Dumper, H., Malfait, R. and Scott-Flynn, N. (2006) Mental Health, Destitution and Asylum- Seekers - A study of destitute asylum-seekers in the dispersal areas of the South East of England, Care Services Improvement Partnership. Available at: http://www.asylumscotland.org.uk/assets/downloads/research/Mental%20Health,%20Destitution %20and%20AS%20FINAL%20REPORT.pdf 220 ibid 221 Lucy Bryson - Policy and Development Co-ordinator for Asylum Seekers and Refugees

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 64 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Roma Gypsy and Traveller population A.3.52 There is little detailed data on Gypsy and Traveller communities, in part due to the lack of a “Traveller” category for National Statistics ethnic coding. As a result of the limited statistical information on this group, Gypsy and Travellers have often been excluded from existing research on ethnic minorities222. A.3.53 Although there is no precise monitoring of the total Gypsy and Traveller population, it is estimated that there are between 200,000 and 300,000 Gypsies and Irish Travellers living in the UK223. A.3.54 The best estimate for Brighton and Hove can be derived caravan counts. According to recent ODPM figures, Brighton and Hove had 40% of all unauthorised encampments across East Sussex in 2003, 25% in 2004 and 42% in 2005224. However, it should be noted that caravan counts do not represent a comprehensive estimate of the number of Gypsy and Traveller populations in the area, as many living in caravans are not part of this group and have different needs. A.3.55 An additional source of Gypsy and Traveller population estimates is the Pupil Annual School Level Census (PLASC) which provides estimates of the gypsies and travellers’ pupil populations coded at Local Education Authority (LEA) Level. However, these are likely to be an underestimate of the number of Gypsy and Traveller pupils as school attendance is low among both groups. A.3.56 Across maintained secondary schools in Brighton and Hove there are 13 Irish Traveller and 8 Roma Gypsy pupils225. These pupils are often on the periphery of the education system, with low attendance and attainment rates – to lead to poor qualification levels and difficulty in accessing the labour market in later life226. A.3.57 This can be seen by high unemployment levels among these groups with unemployment levels for Roma groups in Europe at 30-40% compared with 16% for the European population as a whole227. Additional Social Exclusion issues faced by Traveller and Gypsy groups in the UK have been highlighted by EQUAL research on barriers to employment among these groups. A principle barrier is lack of stability resulting from a lack of national site provision, which causes constant disruption to educational and employment opportunities, as everyday life is complicated by the lack of a lawful or designated place to stop228.

222 Townsend, L ‘A Review of barriers to Employment for Roma and Travellers’ (EQUAL) page 2 223 Commission for Racial Equality (CRE) Gypsies and Travellers: The Facts www.cre.gov.uk/gdpract/g_and_t_facts.html#three 224 Brighton and Hove City Council (2006) Brighton and Hove City Council Race Equality Scheme 2006 – 2009. Available at: www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/performance_team/RES_2006-2009_Final_P_R_19_April.pdf 225 DfES (2006) PLASC - Pupils by ethnicity. 226 Ofsted (1999). Raising the attainment of ethnic minority pupils. 227 Townsend, L ‘A Review of barriers to Employment for Roma and Travellers’ (EQUAL) page 3 228 ibid

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 65 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Homeless population

Brighton and Hove has one of the largest homeless populations in the country A.3.58 Brighton and Hove is characterised by relatively high levels of homelessness. Brighton and Hove City Council229 identifies key factors leading to high levels of homelessness across the city and investigates key reasons for homelessness among homeless groups in the city. A.3.59 We do not attempt to replicate this work here, however we will attempt to highlight key findings from the research and identify whether the picture across the city has changed since the work was commissioned. A.3.60 The key issues identified as exacerbating the homeless problem in Brighton and Hove are geographical constrictions – there are limitations upon the building of new houses, particularly in relation to the downs and sea borders around the city. Shortage of housing supply has raised the costs of housing across the city which has trickled down to the rental sector and lead to high levels of homelessness, with loss of private rented accommodation identified as among the prominent reasons for persons becoming homeless. A.3.61 Moreover, the lack of social housing in the city has been an obstacle in reducing homeless levels. Social rented housing has traditionally been an escape route for homeless people, however social housing is decreasing across the city with more homeless households than social housing to accommodate them.

However, the homeless population across the city has declined in recent years A.3.62 The report examined homeless levels for 2003/2004. Between 2003/04 and 2005/06 the number of unintentionally and intentionally homeless households in priority need has fallen from 1057 to 573230. The most recent national data (2004/5) identifies the city as among the 10% of Local Authorities in England with the highest number of homeless households.

Brighton and Hove has the greatest number of homeless people living in Bed and Breakfast Accommodation outside of London A.3.63 73 homeless households across Brighton and Hove are housed in Bed and Breakfast accommodation. This is the highest anywhere outside of London. A.3.64 However, homeless acceptances in Bed and Breakfast accommodation are made up of only 14% of the homeless acceptances across Brighton and Hove with the remaining 86% in other temporary accommodation231.

Brighton and Hove’s rough sleeper population has declined significantly since 1998 but is still among the highest in England A.3.65 Numbers of homeless people recorded as sleeping rough are fairly low across England as a whole. Brighton and Hove has the 4th largest rough sleeper population albeit with

229 Select Committee on Office of the Deputy Prime Minister: Housing, Planning, Local Government and the Regions (2004) Memorandum by Brighton and Hove City Council (HOM 47). Available at: www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm200304/cmselect/cmodpm/1116/1116we50.htm 230ODPM/DCLG (2005/6) Homelessness statistics 231 ibid

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 66 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

only 12 people recorded as sleeping rough across the city in the latest DCLG street count232. A.3.66 The rough sleeper population has fallen dramatically from 1998 when there were 44 recorded rough sleepers in Brighton and Hove.

Homeless people are particularly likely to experience inequality A.3.67 The 2004 the Social Exclusion Unit report ’Breaking the Cycle’ identified homelessness as a key driver of social exclusion and inequality233. The risk of homeless groups experiencing inequality has been highlighted by Jim Bennett, Shelter's Policy Project Manager: People are often caught in a 'no job - no home' vicious circle, as they do not have the resources to resolve their homelessness and are unable to get a job until they have somewhere to live. Other practical barriers include lack of sleep, no contact address and difficulty in keeping possessions or maintaining a smart appearance for interviews.234 A.3.68 There are a range of factors that put people at risk of homelessness. These range from structural factors such as adverse housing and labour market trends; rising levels of poverty; family re-structuring; changes in the benefit system235. To individual factors including family breakdown; enforced or voluntary exclusion from the family home; being looked after or a care leaver; insecure housing; drug and alcohol dependency and criminal activity.236

Social housing tenants

Social housing demand greatly exceeds supply across Brighton and Hove A.3.69 As identified above, there is a shortage of social housing across Brighton and Hove. There were just over 10,600 households on the housing register in 2007237. This is a significant increase on the figure for 2002 (7,300)238. A.3.70 High numbers of people on the housing register is partly a reflection of the lack of social housing supply in Brighton and Hove239. The proportion of social housing across

232 Last DCLG street count was 17/05/2006. Data is drawn from: Brighton and Hove Housing Strategy Statistical Appendix (HSSA, formerly HIP returns) made in June 2006 233 Social Exclusion Unit (2004) Breaking the Cycle of Social Exclusion. Available at: http://archive.cabinetoffice.gov.uk/seu/page6396.html?id=42 234 Bennett, J. (2002) Cited in: News Magazine- European Social Fund. Available at: www.esf.gov.uk/01_News/61_News_Magazine_- _Issue_6_(Jul_02)/Compendium.asp?txtSearch=%7CSocial+inclusion%20%7C#bookmark55614 9201News61NewsMagazine-Issue6Jul02Compendiumasp1 235 Fitzpatrick, S. and Klinker, S. (2000) Research on single homelessness in Britain, JRF. Available at: http://www.jrf.org.uk/Knowledge/findings/housing/410.asp 236 The Mental Health foundation (2002) The Mental Health Needs of Homeless Children and Young People (up date), Vol. 3, Issue 22. Available at: http://www.mentalhealth.org.uk/publications/?EntryId=38765 237 Figures supplied by Nick Hibberd Head of Housing Need Brighton and Hove City Council 238 DCLG (2005) Housing Strategy Statistical Appendix http://www.communities.gov.uk/pub/922/HSSA2005SectionsAGExcel778Kb_id1162922.xls 239 However the number of households on the housing register is not a straightforward measure of social housing demand. A significant number of households on the housing register are in social housing but have requested a transfer some because they 'would like' to move, others because they 'need' to move. Others are living in suitable accommodation but have joined the housing register because they wish to be considered for shared ownership.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 67 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

the city is lower than across other cities with high-cost housing. The latest HIP returns indicate that there were just over 18,500 social housing units in Brighton and Hove (15% of the total housing stock). This is lower than the average for the small city comparator areas (20%)240. A.3.71 However, this figure should not simply be taken as an indicator of social housing demand. Many (about a third) of the households who are on the housing register are already in social housing and have a requested a transfer, some because they 'would like' to move, others because they 'need' to move. Others are living in suitable accommodation but have joined the housing register because they wish to be considered for shared ownership.

However, there are some areas of the city with higher proportions of social rented housing A.3.72 There are extremely high concentrations of social housing in some areas of Brighton and Hove. A.3.73 Around three quarters of all housing in two areas of East Brighton is rented from the council, housing association or registered social landlords241. A.3.74 In total, there are 15 Lower Layer Super Output Areas (LSOAs) across the city where more than 50% of households live in social rented housing (four in East Brighton, four in Moulsecoomb and Bevendean, two each in Hollingbury and Stanmer, Queens Park and Hangleton and Knoll and one in Hanover and Elm Grove)242. A.3.75 By contrast, in 28 LSOAs across the city less than 2% of the housing stock is social rented.

By contrast, the city has a large private rented sector A.3.76 Despite the relatively small social rented sector in the city, owner occupation levels across Brighton and Hove (62%) are below regional (72%) national (69%) averages243. A.3.77 This is because the city has a large private rented sector. Just under a quarter of the housing stock in Brighton and Hove is private rented (24%). Brighton and Hove has double the proportion of private rented households of the South East region and England as a whole (12%)244. A.3.78 This is likely to be driven by a large proportion of students and young professionals in the city in the private rented sector coupled with a lack of social housing in the city - resulting in a large number of people who cannot afford to buy renting in the private sector. A.3.79 Across Brighton and Hove, there are ten areas where more than 50% of the population live in private rented households (three in Regency, three in Brunswick and Adelaide, two in Queens Park and one each in Preston Park and St. Peter's and North Laine245. A.3.80 Given the high housing costs in the city, these groups are likely to be at greater risk of social exclusion as they are likely to face barriers to owner occupation. Private rented households are also at greater risk of instability due to the short terms of tenancy in private properties meaning tenants can be more easily evicted than in social rented housing with associated disruption to work.

240 Census 2001 241 Census (2001) 242 Census (2001) 243 Census (2001) 244 Census (2001) 245 Census (2001)

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 68 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Ex-offenders A.3.81 Ex-offenders face a number of barriers and inequality. Research from the DWP estimates that over 50% of those leaving prison or on probation are unemployed246. Although data on employment of those with criminal records is not available, long-term unemployment among the ex-offender population is high due to lack of confidence or difficulty of finding employment due to a criminal record with 90% of vacancies unavailable to those with criminal convictions247.

Faith Communities A.3.82 The available evidence relating to faith communities of interest is patchy and incomplete. Much of it is also beginning to age, relying as it does on the 2001 Census and at times, research collapses the categories of faith and ethnicity. Census religious categories are fairly high-level and broad, for example - ‘Christian’, ‘Hindu’, ‘Muslim’, ‘Sikh’, which obscures diversity within these groups. A.3.83 Across Brighton and Hove the majority of people are of Christian faith (65%), however the city has a larger than average proportion of people who profess no religion (30%). The largest minority religions are Muslim (1.6%) and Jewish (1.5%). A.3.84 Because of the low numbers involved it is difficult to provide robust estimates of the different deprivation levels among faith communities. However, data from the census highlights that some faith groups are more likely to experience inequality. A.3.85 Economically active Muslim people across the city were nearly twice as likely to be unemployed as the Brighton and Hove average, with 12% unemployed compared with 6.3% of the population as a whole. A.3.86 People who were stating their religion as Jewish were more likely to have a limiting long-term illness than other faith groups across the city - 28% of people of a Jewish faith group experienced a limiting long-term illness. By contrast, 10% of people with no religion had a limiting long-term illness across Brighton and Hove. A.3.87 As well as particular faith communities being at greater risk of disadvantage, there is also some evidence of increased prejudice. Nationally, more people thought that religious prejudice had increased over the last five years (52%) than thought racial prejudice had increased over this time (48%). Furthermore, there was felt to be ‘a lot’ of religious prejudice in Britain today by 24 % of survey respondents248.

A.4 Multiple Deprivation across Brighton and Hove A.4.1 An identification of the multiple deprivation issues across the city also provides an important baseline to examine how inequalities issues are changing over time. However, it is important to be aware that the Indices of Deprivation used here was created in 2004 (largely drawn from data for 2001) so does not provide the most up to date contextual picture of deprivation across the city. However, over the course of the inequalities review, more up-to-date measures of the indicators used in the indices are explored in greater detail.

246 DWP (2001) Barriers to employment for offenders and ex-offenders, DWP Research Report, No 155, Leeds: CDS, p.3. Available at: http://www.dwp.gov.uk/asd/asd5/155summ.asp 247 ibid 248 Kitchen et al 2006b cited in SELD Workshop Paper – 19 September 2006 “Faith Communities: Evidence for Strategy & Delivery in Neighbourhood Renewal” Nov 2007 revision

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 69 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

To what extent does Brighton and Hove experience multiple deprivation? A.4.2 Detailed analysis of the Index of Multiple Deprivation (IMD) 2004 has been undertaken by Brighton and Hove. The Brighton and Hove Socio-Economic Baseline Report provided a detailed analysis of the IMD 2004. Key findings of the report include 249 :

Brighton and Hove contains some of the most deprived areas in the country…. • Brighton and Hove is the second most multiply deprived district in the South East region • 14 SOAs in Brighton and Hove are in the most deprived 10% in England (8.5% of all SOAs in the city) and 35 are in the most deprived 20% (21.3%).

The most deprived areas of the city are found in central and eastern parts • The most deprived SOAs are located in East Brighton, Queens Park and Moulsecoomb & Bevendean wards.

However, high levels of deprivation are evident throughout the city • Deprivation is dispersed across the city with 14 of the 21 wards containing and SOA in the most deprived 20% of SOAs in England • In total, 65 SOAs across Brighton and Hove are among the most deprived 10% of areas in England on at least one domain. In other words, over one-third of LSOAs across the city are deprived on one aspect of deprivation.

And deprivation across the city can take many different forms… • As well as deprivation being dispersed across Brighton and Hove, there is also no main driver of deprivation. In other words, the city experiences every form of deprivation • On each of the seven domains that make up the indices of deprivation, Brighton and Hove contains at least eight SOAs ranked among the most deprived 10% in the country on that domain • The city as whole is ranked among the most deprived 50% of Local Authorities in the country on each of the seven deprivation domains. This indicates that deprivation across the city manifests itself in a variety of ways rather than one key issue (e.g. low skills) driving deprivation across the city.

Some LSOAs experience extremely high levels of deprivation across several domains. A.4.3 One LSOA in East Brighton250 is among the most deprived 10% in the country on five domains of deprivation (Income, Employment, Health, Education and Crime). A further eight areas are among the most deprived 10% on four domains (four in East Brighton, two in Hollingbury and Stanmer and one each in St Peter’s and the North Laine and Regency). A.4.4 These areas are likely to contain groups with multiple needs – this issue is highlighted in the main report. Where data is available, we explore levels of multiple need in the following Sections.

249 For more detailed IMD findings across Brighton and Hove see Brighton and Hove Socio- Economic Baseline Report (2003) Brighton & Hove and Adur Area Investment Framework. All chapters available at: http://www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/index.cfm?skin=textonly&request=c1120682: 250 Located in central Whitehawk, around the Whitehawk way, Cooksbridge Road and Nuthurst Place areas.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 70 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

A.5 Analysis at OA level A.5.1 Maps of the key socio-economic indicators are provided on an accompanying CD (Appendix F lists the key indicators mapped). A.5.2 Map 1 provided in Section 3 above shows the IMD 2004 mapped across the city at Super Output Area level, with the colours on the map identifying the most deprived areas across England. Areas shaded dark blue are those areas highly deprived in the context of England, with light yellow areas having low levels of deprivation. The map identifies the most deprived areas across the city are located in East Brighton (containing the Whitehawk and Bristol Estates), Queens Park and Moulsecoomb & Bevendean wards. A.5.3 Map 2 provided in Section 3 above identifies the IMD 2004 statistically modelled down to Output Areas (OAs)251, and mapped across the city. Again, areas shaded dark blue are those areas highly deprived in the context of England, with light yellow areas having low levels of deprivation. A.5.4 This OA level data provides a finer-grained detail of deprivation levels across the city. The broad distribution is the same as seen with the less-detailed SOA data, with the most deprived areas across the city located in East Brighton, Queens Park and Moulsecoomb & Bevendean wards. A.5.5 Also smaller pockets of deprivation are uncovered in areas that were not previously identified as being particularly deprived. For example, uncovering high levels of deprivation in areas around Portslade, also at the bottom of Preston Drove where it joins London Road.

A.6 Are particular groups concentrated in the most deprived areas of Brighton and Hove?

Census data identifies a significant group of people experiencing multiple disadvantage, heavily concentrated in the most deprived areas A.6.1 Across Brighton, nearly 1,500 households are identified as having each of the following four characteristics from the Census 2001: • Employment inequality: Every member of the household aged 16-74 who is not a full- time student is either unemployed or permanently sick. • Education inequality: No member of the household aged 16 to pensionable age has at least 5 GCSEs (grade A-C) or equivalent, AND no member of the household aged 16-18 is in full-time education. • Health and disability inequality: Any member of the household has general health considered to be 'not good' in the year before Census or has a limiting long term illness. • Housing: The household's accommodation is either overcrowded (occupancy indicator is -1 or less); OR is in a shared dwelling OR does not have sole use of bath/shower and toilet OR has no central heating 3.15.8 This represents 1.3% of all households in the city, more than double the proportion across the South East (0.6%), but similar to levels across other small cities (1.2%) and England as a whole(1.1%).

251 OCSI (2007). Index of Multiple Deprivation 2004, OA Modelled Estimates. For full details of the methodology, see the technical background paper available from www.norfolk.gov.uk/ruraldeprivation

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 71 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Multiply-deprived households 20% most deprived Brighton Number Share % Rate % Number % All Households 23,594 20.6% 114,470 100.0% Household with no characteristics 5,291 14.0% 22.4% 37,746 33.0% Household with 1 characteristics 7,738 20.2% 32.8% 38,379 33.5% Household with 2 characteristics 6,804 25.1% 28.8% 27,063 23.6% Household with 3 characteristics 3,248 33.1% 13.8% 9,815 8.6% Household with 4 characteristics 513 35.0% 2.2% 1,467 1.3% A.6.2 Not surprisingly, these multiply-disadvantaged households are concentrated in the most deprived areas of the city. For example, more than one-quarter are located in the most deprived 10% of areas across the city, and more than one-third in the most deprived 20% of areas. However, nearly 1,000 multiply-disadvantaged households are located outside the most deprived areas of the city. A.6.3 The highest levels of multiply-disadvantaged households are found in South Hangleton, where more than 4% of all households are multiply-disadvantaged on all four characteristics. Further more than 20% of households are multiply-disadvantaged on three or more characteristics in the SOA covering the St James Street Area252.

Children with multiple needs are heavily concentrated in the most deprived areas A.6.4 Analysis of children attending LEA schools253 identifies that children with multiple issues are heavily concentrated in the most deprived areas. Nearly one-half of all children across the city experiencing both low income (Free School Meal eligibility) and Special Educational Needs live in the most deprived 20% of areas. This group with multiple needs is more heavily concentrated in the most deprived areas than those pupils experiencing only one of the two issues.

Brighton and Hove’s Bangladeshi community are heavily concentrated in the most deprived areas of the city A.6.5 At a national level, ethnic minority populations are significantly more likely to be located in the most deprived areas of the country - it is estimated that 68% of all ethnic minorities live in the most deprived areas of the country254. A.6.6 By contrast, Brighton and Hove’s ethnic minority community are relatively dispersed throughout the city. However, there are particular ethnic minority communities within the city that are disproportionately concentrated in the most multiply deprived parts of Brighton and Hove. A.6.7 Just under half of the Bangladeshi population and just under a third of the Black African population in Brighton and Hove live in the most deprived 10% of areas in the city255.

Lone parents are three times as likely to live in the most deprived areas of Brighton and Hove as the least deprived A.6.8 Another group that is significantly concentrated in the most deprived parts of Brighton and Hove are lone parents.

252 Part of the St James Street and Kemp Town Neighbourhood Renewal Area 253 OCSI analysis of CYPT (2006) Pupil Level Annual School Census (PLASC) data. 254 Phillips, D. & Harrison, M. (2003) Housing and Black and Minority Ethnic Communities: Review of the evidence base, Office of the Deputy Prime Minister. Available at: www.renewal.net/Documents/RNET/Research/Housingblackminority.pdf 255 Census (2001) and ID (2004)

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 72 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

A.6.9 Just under 20% of all lone parents in Brighton and Hove live in the most deprived 10% of areas in the city. By contrast, fewer than 6% live in the least deprived 10% of areas256.

People living in social housing are significantly more likely to live in the most deprived areas of Brighton and Hove A.6.10 The most deprived areas of Brighton and Hove also contain high levels of people living in social rented housing. A.6.11 Just under 40% of all social housing tenants in Brighton and Hove reside in the most deprived 10% of areas in the city. This highlights the concentration of people outside of the owner occupied population in the most deprived areas of the city that are not experiencing the benefits of the housing inflation257. A.6.12 By contrast, the least deprived 10% of areas in the city contain just 1% of the city’s council housing.

256 Census (2001) and ID (2004) 257 Census (2001) and ID (2004)

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 73 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Appendix B LAA theme: Developing a prosperous and sustainable economy

B.1 Introduction B.1.1 This Appendix provides analysis of inequality under the Brighton and Hove LAA theme Developing a prosperous and sustainable economy.

The local LAA policy context B.1.2 The LAA outcomes under the Economic theme are258: • Attract inward investment to secure development of the Brighton Centre • Attract inward investment to secure the development of key economic regeneration projects ensuring that residents of deprived areas benefit from their economic impact • Increase employment rates in neighbourhood renewal areas • Increase entrepreneurial activity and support the sustainable growth of key employment and cultural sectors in the city • Promote and extend opportunities for those over-50s who wish to work, learn or volunteer.

About this Appendix B.1.3 Brighton and Hove needs to achieve a socially and structurally sustainable pattern of development to ensure that the resident population can participate and contribute to the economy. In order to give a full picture of the links between the local economy and social inclusion, the following four aspects will be critically assessed: • The Brighton and Hove economy • Enterprise and entrepreneurship • Skill levels • Jobs and worklessness B.1.4 Under each section, we look at overall levels of inequality across the city. Where data is available, we also identify those groups and areas faring badly on a range of outcome measures. We examine each in turn.

B.2 The Brighton and Hove economy

A fast-growing vibrant economy B.2.1 The Brighton and Hove economy has performed strongly since the mid 1990s, with falls in unemployment and rises in average earnings, which have made the city a key driver of the South East coastal economy259. This is partly due to the growth of the financial and creative sectors and partly to the ability of the city to attract and retain highly skilled individuals.

258 Brighton & Hove (March 2007). Refresh of the Local Area Agreement for Brighton & Hove 2007 -2008. Available from www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/performance_team/Brighton___Hove_LAA_07-08.pdf 259 Brighton and Hove Economic Partnership (2005): Brighton and Hove Economy Strategy 2005-2008.Available at: www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/economicdevelopment/Brighton___Hove_Economic_Strategy.pdf

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 74 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

B.2.2 In 2002, the economy of Brighton and Hove was estimated to be worth around £3.3 billion, accounting for 2.7% of the South East overall output (despite comprising only its 2.5% of population)260. The city’s business stock has expanded considerably: the stock of VAT registered businesses grew by 31% between 1995 and 2005, a much faster rate than across other small cities (15%)261. B.2.3 Such expansion was reflected in the creation of new employment and the rise of GVA per capita262. Around 30,000 jobs were created between 1995 and 2005263 and GVA per head increased from £10,427 in 1995 to £16,406 in 2004264. Between 2000 and 2005 GVA per capita in the city grew by almost 29%, a much higher rate than in the South East (23%) and England (22%)265. B.2.4 The proximity to London, the urban environment (which has benefited from heavy regeneration development programmes) and the vibrant cultural and intellectual life, make Brighton and Hove an attractive place to live and work. B.2.5 The city’s two Universities produce around 7,000 graduates a year, of which more than 30% remained in the city266 for the first six months after graduation. This, coupled with in-migration of highly educated people, make the city’s workforce amongst the most highly educated in the country. The proportion of residents with degree qualification is above 38% in Brighton and Hove, against 24% in other small cities, 30% across the region and 27% across England as a whole267. B.2.6 Brighton and Hove is developing strongly, and strategically, in knowledge-based industries, particularly in the new media and creative sectors. It is estimated that 18% of local businesses are involved in the creative economy, employing 10% of the workforce268. At the policy level, there is a clear commitment to build upon the skill and entrepreneurship base and expand these sectors further.

But high levels of inequality B.2.7 Brighton and Hove’s success has not been without problems: the city is experiencing strong labour market polarisation and other significant forms of inequality, which together with other structural barriers, may limit the potential for future success. B.2.8 In Brighton and Hove, 20% of the working age population is economically inactive and 7.2% is inactive and would like to have a job269. Unemployment across the city is at 6.6% of all economically active people270, this is higher than in the South East (4.5%) and England (5.3%). B.2.9 The lowest incomes across the city are seen in Queen’s Park, with some Super Output Areas having more than 23% of households with an income below £ 10,000 per year.

260 ibid 261 Small Business Service, cited in Brighton and Hove economic strategy. 262 GVA = Gross Value Added. The GVA measures the contribution to the economy of each individual producer, industry or sector in the United Kingdom. It is a measure of the value of the goods and services produced in the economy. 263 OCSI 2007 (from ABI) 264 OCSI 2007 (from ONS 2006). 265 OCSI 2007 (from ONS 2006). 266 Brighton and Hove City Council (2003): Best Value Review. Available from peace.brighton-hove.gov.uk/.../$File/Item+20+-+BVR+Economic+Development+full+Report.doc 267 Annual Population Survey 2005 268 Brighton and Hove City Council (2005), Labour Market and the Economy Baseline Report. 269 Source: OCSI 2007 (from APS 2006). 270 APS 2006.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 75 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

The most affluent are seen in Stanford, where some areas have only over 2% of households with income below £10,000271. B.2.10 The city’s GVA per head (£14,679), is still lower than the national (£15,273) and regional (£16,758)272 figures. The city is also characterised by low workplace earnings: in 2006, a full-time worker would earn on average £412 per week, this is 92% of the national median wage273. B.2.11 In Brighton and Hove, the proportion of people earning less than £250 per week is 12.3%, lower than in Britain (16.1%) and similar to the South East (12.4%)274. One in ten full-time employees earn less than £239.20 per week. This is higher than what the lowest paid 10% of employees in both the South East (£237.50) and Britain (£222.70) earn275. These facts suggest that the low average earnings and GVA per head in the city can be attributed to a smaller number of high-paid jobs, rather than to a larger number of low-paid jobs. B.2.12 Average earnings of people living in the city are higher than their national and regional equivalent. The differences between workplace and resident earnings reflect the commuting patterns to and from the city, with higher skilled individuals travelling outwards to higher wage areas and low skilled in-commuters coming from low wage areas along the coast276. It is estimated that more than 33,000277 residents commute to higher paid workplaces in London or in the South East. There is also a strong flow of in-commuters (around 28,000278) that come into the city from lower paid areas along the coast. B.2.13 Moreover, despite the high skill profile there is still a large group lacking formal qualifications and basic skills, which finds employment in low paid sectors such as the retail, hotel and restaurant sectors. B.2.14 The high presence of commuters puts pressure on the transport infrastructure in and around the city and has stimulated the house market. Housing affordability has become a major issue, affecting recruitment and retention for local employers and widening the divide between the richest and poorest segments of the population.

Women are less likely to be economically active, and earn less, than men 3.15.9 As seen nationally, women in Brighton are less likely to be economically active than men (61% of women are economically active, compared with 75% of men). Of those that do work, earnings are lower than men (by £34 per week), and jobs are more likely to be in part-time employment. In 2001, women accounted for 75% of total part-time employment. Additionally, levels of self-employment for women are lower than for men (6% versus 15%).

271 Source: OCSI 2007 (from CACI 2005). 272 Brighton and Hove Economic Partnership (2005). Brighton and Hove Economy Strategy 2005-2008. Estimates refer to 2002. 273 ONS (2006) Annual Survey of Hours and Earnings. 274 Grogan, S. & Stokes, F (2004) Setting the Scene: a Review of Brighton and Hove Economy. 275 ibid 276 The Work Foundation (2006), Ideopolis: Knowledge city Region, Brighton Case Study. 277 Source: The Work Foundation (2006), Ideopolis: Knowledge city Region, Brighton Case Study. 278 Source: The Work Foundation (2006), Ideopolis: Knowledge city Region, Brighton Case Study.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 76 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

B.3 Enterprise and entrepreneurship B.3.1 Brighton and Hove has been a major driver of regional economic growth since the 1990s. The city has managed to avoid many of the problems faced by other coastal resorts in the UK. Its successful and growing economy is based on leisure, financial services and the academic sector279. B.3.2 Despite such success, the entrepreneurial base is not equally distributed around the city. In Brighton & Hove, in 2004, there were 50 VAT registrations per 1000 population, whereas in North Portslade, Moulsecoomb and Hollingbury and Stanmer the business density was respectively 14, 12 and 15 VAT registrations per 1,000 population280.

A dynamic entrepreneurial base

A high level of VAT registrations and de-registrations, together with an improved survival rate show that Brighton and Hove has a dynamic and sound entrepreneurial base B.3.3 In 2001, Brighton and Hove was found to be the most profitable place to do business in the country281. In 2002, its economy was estimated to be worth around £3.7 billion 282. The city accounted for 2.7% of the regions overall output despite making up only 2.7% of the regional population283. Between 2000 and 2002, GVA per head increased by almost 17%, a much higher rate than across England and the South East (12% and 11% respectively) 284. B.3.4 Such growth has significantly boosted employment: the number of local jobs has increased by 7.5% between 2000 and 2005285, as compared to the national and regional growth rates of 5% and 2.7% respectively. B.3.5 The city’s business base has also expanded: the stock of VAT registered businesses increased by 22.9% between 1994 and 2004, a much faster rate than in the South East (+17.1%) and in the UK (+11.1%)286. B.3.6 Despite the fast growth rate, the business density (total stock of VAT registered enterprises per 10,000 population) in the city is still relatively low. As shown in the figure below, it is lower than the average across the South East as a whole, although higher than the national average287.

279 Creative industries are also developing at a fast pace and will be treated separately. 280 Brighton and Hove City Council (2006), Local Enterprise Growth Initiative Application Form. 281 Brighton and Hove Socio-Economic Baseline Report (2003), Labour Market and the Economy (chapter four). Available at: http://www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/regeneration/Ch_4_Labour_Market_and_the_Economy.pdf 282 Brighton and Hove Economy Strategy 2005-2008. 283 ibid 284 ibid 285 Source: OCSI 2007 (from 2005). Data refers to employee jobs, which exclude self-employed, government supported trainees and HM forces. 286 Small Business Service, cited in Brighton and Hove Economy Strategy 2005-2008. 287 Data on VAT registered business stock trends, and VAT registrations as a percentage of stock are reported in the appendix.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 77 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

VAT registered business stocks per 10,000 population

Source: OCSI 2007 (from Small Business Service data) B.3.7 The economy of Brighton and Hove is highly dynamic, with a high level of VAT registrations and de-registrations. Between 1999 and 2005 VAT registrations have outstripped de-registrations. The former have fluctuated around 12% and the latter around 10%. Brighton and Hove has a higher proportion of both VAT registrations and de-registrations than England and the South East.

VAT registrations and de-registrations as a proportion of business stock288

Source: OCSI 2007 (from DTI Small Business Service)

B.3.8 A high number of business closures is part of the functioning of a dynamic economy and represents willingness among the business population to take risks and renovate itself.

288 The negative values refer to de-registrations

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 78 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Indeed, research indicates that improvements in productivity and economic growth are more likely to come from higher levels of both business entry and business exit289. B.3.9 The dynamic economic scene of the city is complemented by an improved firm survival rate. In 1999, 87% of VAT registered firms survived after a year compared to 90% in the South East and 88% in England. In 2004, both Brighton and Hove and England had a 92% survival rate and in the South East it was 93%.

The dynamism of the economy is highlighted by the high proportion of smaller firms and self- employed people B.3.10 Brighton and Hove’s registered VAT businesses are very small in size: almost 80% of businesses employ between one and four people. The proportion of small companies is significantly higher than in other small cities where the proportions is 72% and in England and the South East, where it is respectively 75% and 77%. By contrast, only 4% of registered businesses employ 20 or more persons, compared with 7.1% across other small cities, 5.3% in the South East and 5.8% in England as a whole.

Business size across Brighton and Hove 0-4 Persons 5-9 Persons 10-19 Persons 20+ Persons Employed Employed Employed Employed N % N % N % N %

England 1,051,275 75.2% 180,815 12.9% 85,260 6.1% 80,790 5.8% South 198,225 76.8% 31,610 12.2% 14,665 5.7% 13,620 5.3% East Small 58,065 71.6% 11,540 14.2% 5,735 7.1% 5,725 7.1% Cities Brighton 5,960 79.7% 825 11.0% 390 5.2% 300 4.0% and Hove Source OCSI 2007 (from ONS, Business Registers Unit 2005). B.3.11 Another characteristic of the economy is the high level of self-employment. Some micro (typically 0-9 employees) and small (typically 0-49 employees) companies may fall below the VAT-threshold so they will not show-up in the VAT enterprise statistics. Enterprise levels in areas with larger numbers of micro and small businesses may therefore be underestimated by VAT-registered businesses. For that reason, it is important to look at self-employment data in order to have a full picture of the local enterprise base. In Brighton and Hove, this accounts for 17.3% of total employment, compared with 13.6% in England and 14.7% in the South East290. B.3.12 The high proportion of self-employed and free-lance workers is partly driven by the high number of creative businesses. Whilst these figures demonstrate dynamism and entrepreneurship, a high presence of free-lancers and micro business also suggests that the local economy is highly vulnerable to economic turbulence.

289Source: Parliament 2005. http://www.parliament.the- stationeryoffice.com/pa/cm200506/cmhansrd/cm060703/text/60703w1354.htm 290 Source: OCSI 2007 (from Census 2001 ).

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 79 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

A service based economy

Brighton and Hove has developed a strong service sector B.3.13 The number of local jobs is a good indication of the size, strength and specialisation of the local economy. Between 1995 and 2005 almost 30,000 jobs were created - an overall growth rate of 31% as compared to 23% in the South East and 17% in England291. Most of the jobs have been created in the service sector. Manufacturing has experienced a net loss and the construction section a moderate growth, which accounts, in absolute terms for less than 1000 extra jobs. B.3.14 Brighton has developed a strong service based economy. The service sector employs 94% of the workforce in Brighton and Hove, as compared to 83% in the UK and 85% in the South East. The percentage of people employed in both the construction and manufacturing industry is just over 5% as compared to 13% and 16% in the South East and England respectively. Percentage of total employment in macro sectors

Source: OCSI 2007, from ABI 2005.

B.3.15 The service sector growth has been driven by Finance, IT and other Business Activities, sectors which require highly skilled labour. Employment in the service sector as a whole has grown by 37% between 1995 and 2005 as compared to 66% in Finance, IT and Business Activities. In 1995 the number of people employed in this industry group was 22,000, increasing to 37,000 by 2005. B.3.16 Jobs in Public Administration also grew significantly over the same period: almost 8,000 jobs were created in the sector, which in total comprised 35,000 jobs. Tourism related services have also registered a relevant growth. The number of jobs grew from 8,800 in 1995 to 14,500 in 2005. B.3.17 Between 1995 and 2005, nearly 7,000 jobs were created in Distribution, Hotels and Restaurants. B.3.18 In 2005 Transport and Communications registered a net-loss of employment of more than 1,000 jobs. B.3.19 In relative terms, both industries registered a negative growth and now account for a lower fraction of total employment in the service sector.

291 The figures refer to Employee Jobs which excludes self-employed, government-supported trainees and HM Forces

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 80 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Employment Growth in the Service Sector

Source: OCSI 2007 (from ABI 2005)

Sectoral bottlenecks

Vulnerability to relocation, skill shortages and over skilling might hinder growth B.3.20 Despite the good overall performance, the economy of Brighton and Hove suffers from some sectoral bottlenecks that might hinder development. B.3.21 The financial sector (Bank and Insurance) is dominated by a small number of large companies, which makes the city potentially vulnerable to ‘relocation blackmail’ (in the case where companies wishing to trim their costs look to relocate part of the services in lower wage areas). B.3.22 The construction sector, which employs 2.2%292 of the workforce, is another area of concern. Although since 1990 the sector has lost more than 10% of its employment, it has experienced a fast growth in more recent years 293. This has led to concerns about recruitment within the industry, as the currently available skills base in the area is low. Moreover, the sector has a higher proportion of ‘older’ workers than any other sector, which indicates that recruiting may become more difficult in the future294. B.3.23 Distribution, Hotels & Restaurants, which employ nearly 30,000295 people, are characterized by flexible, casual and part-time forms of working. This has important implications in terms of economic and social inclusion of the employees. B.3.24 Finally, the large student population distorts the labour market. Personal and customers service occupations and elementary occupations (such as retailing) which could provide work for low-skilled individuals, are currently employing a high-skilled workforce. Respectively 25% and 20% of the employees in these occupations are individuals with

292 Source: OCSI 2007, from ABI 2005. 293 Brighton and Hove Socio-Economic Baseline Report (2003) Brighton & Hove and Adur Area Investment Framework. All chapters available at: Available at: http://www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/index.cfm?skin=textonly&request=c1120682 294 Brighton and Hove Socio-Economic Baseline Report (2003), Labour Market and the Economy (chapter four). Available at: http://www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/regeneration/Ch_4_Labour_Market_and_the_Economy.pdf 295 Source: OCSI 2007, from ABI 2005.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 81 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

level three qualifications, which are likely to include students from either Brighton or Sussex Universities296.

...and high inequality....

Deprived areas have lowest business presence across sectors B.3.25 Unsurprisingly, the entrepreneurship base is unevenly distributed at the geographical level. The city centre and the centre of Hove together account for almost a quarter of the total VAT registered businesses, with 1,390 and 405 businesses respectively297. More than 40% of the businesses across the city are concentrated in six MSOAs covering the following areas: the city centre, central Hove, Brunswick, South Portslade and Hove Lagoon, Tarner and Queens Park, and St James and Hove Station and Clarendon298. B.3.26 The MSOAs with the lowest business presence cover the areas of Hollingdean, Moulsecoomb and Bevendean, Mile Oak, North East Moulsecoomb, Coldean and Whitehawk and Craven Vale, each hosting less than one percent of total businesses299.

Some ethnic groups are at the margin of the enterprise base B.3.27 Some BME groups are over-represented in low-skilled sectors such as Retail, Hotel and Restaurants and Health. More than half the local Bangladeshis working in Brighton and Hove are employed in the Hotel and Restaurants sector, as are more than one third of Chinese people300. B.3.28 However, overall across the city, residents from BME groups are more likely than white British residents to be working in higher status occupations301. This is partly due to the much higher proportion of owner managers amongst BME residents. Moreover, BME residents have, on average, higher educational attainment and are therefore, more likely to be working in professional occupations 302.

Labour Demand

An increasing demand for high-skilled individuals B.3.29 The pattern of growth described above has important implications for the skill profile of labour demand. The growth of Finance, IT and Business Services together with the expansion of the Public Administration, require an increasing number of high-skilled individuals. The occupational composition of these sectors is biased towards higher- level job profiles303. B.3.30 Research by Step Ahead on the Labour Force Survey (2005) shows how Business and Finance demand more Managers/Senior Official and Associate Professionals employees

296 Brighton and Hove Socio-Economic Baseline Report (2003), Labour Market and the Economy (chapter four). Available at: http://www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/regeneration/Ch_4_Labour_Market_and_the_Economy.pdf 297 Source: OCSI 2007, (from ONS, Business Registers Unit 2005). 298 Source: OCSI 2007, (from ONS, Business Registers Unit 2005). 299 Source: OCSI 2007, (from ONS, Business Registers Unit 2005). 300 Brighton and Hove Socio-Economic Baseline Report (2003), Labour Market and the Economy (chapter four). Available at: http://www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/regeneration/Ch_4_Labour_Market_and_the_Economy.pdf 301 ibid 302 ibid 303 As defined by the SOC 2000 (see paragraph on skills)

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 82 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

than the rest of the economy; whilst the public sector demands a much higher proportion of professional occupations than the other industries in the economy. B.3.31 The projections for 2003-2008 confirm the growth of demand for high-skill labour. It is estimated that, out of the overall employment growth during 2003-2008, more than 70% will have occurred in higher-level occupations, around 36% in intermediate order occupations, whilst lower order occupations will have registered a loss of almost 7%304. B.3.32 Some of the areas with high levels of people with no qualifications, including East Brighton, Hangleton and Knoll and Moulsecoomb and Bevendean have among the highest levels of unemployment305. However, and confirming previous data from the Census, there is no clear relation between skills levels and level of unemployment, at the neighbourhood-level306.

B.4 Skill levels

A highly educated workforce…

Brighton and Hove’s population has a high proportion of educated people B.4.1 Brighton and Hove has a highly educated workforce. According to the most recent estimates, the proportion of residents with degree qualification is 38%, well above the national and regional averages (27% and 30%, respectively) and the average for small cities as a whole (23.5%).307 B.4.2 Additionally, the city outperforms the South East and England in the proportion of population with level 3 and 2 qualifications. In Brighton and Hove, 53% of adults hold at least a level 3 qualification, as compared to 45% and 49% at the national and regional level. B.4.3 The proportion of lower skilled individuals (below level 2, and without qualification) is 28%, which is lower than the national (33.5%) and regional (29%) figures and small cities as a whole (35%)308. B.4.4 This more recent Annual Population Survey data supports previous information from the Census (2001), where the population of Brighton and Hove showed higher skill levels than England and the South East.

…and lack of basic skills

There is a large group of people with no qualification and poor basic skills in the city B.4.5 Despite having among the highest proportion of highly qualified individuals in the country, Brighton and Hove underperforms in the supply of school and college leavers and has serious basic skills problems. B.4.6 More than 40,000 individuals aged between 16 and 74 do not hold any qualifications – 15,000 of whom are aged 16-44 – and 60,000 people hold a qualification below level 2.

304 Source OCSI, 2007 (from SEER Consulting 2003) 305 As proxied by JSA claimants. 306 At small area level, the correlation between unemployment level and both “proportion of adults with no qualification” and “proportion of adults with degree level qualification” is not significantly different from zero. 307 ONS Annual Population Survey 2006. 308 With the exception of Wandsworth, Brighton and Hove also outperforms all the comparison areas. See table 1 in the appendix.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 83 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Moreover, almost 12,000 people lack basic literacy skills; almost 60,000 lack numeracy skills and 64,000 lack basic ICT skills309.

Older age groups are more likely to have no qualifications B.4.7 The qualification and skill endowment of individuals is highly related to age, as older adults are more likely to have left formal education and training without any formal certification. More than 60% of individuals between 60 and 74 years old, and almost 41% of 45-59 years old, do not hold any qualification310. Skills distribution by age in Brighton and Hove

Source: OCSI 2007 (Census, 2001)***For 60+ the data refers to individuals aged 60-74.

B.4.8 In Brighton and Hove, 9% of young adults (aged 18-24) have no (or unknown) formal qualifications311. This proportion is lower than in England (12.5%) and the South East (10%)312, and is most likely due to the high levels of students in the city.

Skill distribution is highly polarised B.4.9 Skills distribution is geographically polarised in Brighton and Hove. The same four areas -St. Peter's and North Laines, Preston Park, Regency and Brunswick and Adelaide have the highest proportion of adults with degree qualification and the lowest of adults without any qualification. At the other end of the spectrum, Woodingdean, Moulsecoomb and Bevendean, Hangleton and Knoll and East Brighton have the highest proportion of individuals with no qualifications. Furthermore, these areas all feature very low presence of degree holders, with the exception of East Brighton313.

309) Brighton and Hove City Council (2004), Setting the Scene: a Review of Brighton and Hove Economy. 310 Source: OCSI 2007 (from Census, 2001). 311 Source: OCSI 2007 (from Census, 2001). 312 Source: OCSI 2007 (from Census, 2001). 313 East Brighton contains SOAs with very low qualification levels as well as SOAs with around 50% of the population with degree level qualifications (such as Kemptown).

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 84 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Qualification Distribution in Brighton and Hove, 2001

Source: OCSI 2007 (Census, 2001)

Some ethnic groups have lower qualification levels B.4.10 Average skill levels vary greatly across different ethnic groups in the city. B.4.11 Bangladeshi ethnic minorities, are a particularly vulnerable group, with almost 50% of Bangladeshis, not holding any qualification. By contrast other South Asian ethnic groups, such as Indians and Pakistanis have high levels of qualifications, with almost 50% holding degree level qualifications. Skill Distribution by Ethnicity in Brighton and Hove

Source: OCSI 2007 (Census, 2001)

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 85 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

A job market orientated towards high-skills...

The majority of occupations in Brighton and Hove require a high level of skills B.4.12 The labour market in Brighton and Hove is orientated towards occupations requiring highly skilled individuals. In 2006, more than 50% of the workforce (around 68,000 people) were employed in high-skilled professions314 as compared to 47% and 43% in the South East and England315. B.4.13 By contrast, there are proportionally fewer jobs requiring intermediate and low skills in Brighton and Hove than in the UK or the South East. Across Brighton and Hove, 35% of jobs require intermediate skills and 13% are unskilled compared with corresponding figures of 38% and 15% across the South East and 38% and 19% across England as a whole316. Employment profile in 2006

Source: OCSI 2007 (from APS 2006)

Low-skilled individuals are being squeezed out of the labour market by a combination of competition from high-skilled groups and lack of suitable jobs B.4.14 The Moser Report (1999) identified Level 1 literacy and Entry Level 3 numeracy as the standards necessary to function at work and society in general. People without good level of literacy and numeracy skills are therefore likely to have difficulties in participating in the labour market, with important implications for the patterns of social inclusion317. B.4.15 In Brighton and Hove such difficulties are intensified: not only because the economy of the city provides lower levels of low skilled employment, but also because of the presence of a large number of students, who compete with low skilled adults in the areas of the economy that require lower skills.

314 According to the Standard Occupational Categories, higher order occupations include managers and senior officials, professional occupations, associate professional & technical occupations. Middle order occupations include: administrative and secretarial occupations, skilled trades occupations, personal service occupations, sales and customer service occupations. Lower order occupations include process, plant and machine operatives and elementary occupations. 315 OCSI 2007 (from APS 2006) 316 OCSI 2007 (from APS 2006) 317 DfEE (1999) A Fresh Start - improving literacy and numeracy, DfEE.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 86 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

B.4.16 Indeed, in the city only 18.5% of jobs employ individuals with no qualifications, as compared to a regional rate of 20.3% and a national rate of 24.5% (despite the overall level of people with no qualifications being well above the regional average). The level of unemployment among individuals with no or unknown qualifications is 5.1% - well above the rate in the South East (3.6%), and comparable to the national and small cities rates 318. Within the same low skills group, the proportion of economically inactive adults is also higher in Brighton and Hove (36%) than in England (34.6%) and the South East (29.2%) and 34% among other small cities319. B.4.17 In common with the South East, lower skill occupations in Brighton are less likely to employ those with low skills than similar jobs across England320. A similar picture is seen with intermediate and higher order occupations. This indicates that, compared with the country as a whole, individuals with no qualifications face significant barriers in entering both low skill and high skill occupations.321 Proportion of jobs employing adults with no qualifications by occupational category

Source: OCSI 2007 (Census, 2001)

B.4.18 Additionally, preliminary analysis indicates that low skill occupations in Brighton and Hove require a higher level of interpersonal skills compared to such occupations across other small cities, the South East and UK. Thus, low skilled employment is concentrated in the service sector occupations rather than more manufacturing and industry led occupations as is found elsewhere in the country 322. The proportion of elementary occupations in Financial Intermediaries, renting and business activities, Social Security, Education, Health & Social Work and Hotels & Restaurants is 54% in the city, as compared to 45% and 46% in England and the South East323.

318 Census, 2001, data refer to adults aged 18-60. 319 Census 2001, data refer to adults aged 18-60. 320 OCSI analysis of Census 2001. 321 Brighton and Hove and the South East perform similarly. 322 Source: OCSI, 2007 (from Census, 2001). 323 The rest of elementary occupations are in hunting and forestry, fishing, mining & quarrying, manufacturing, gas & water supply, construction, repairs and storage and communications.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 87 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

B.5 Labour supply and worklessness

Decreasing, yet still relatively high, unemployment levels B.5.1 Unemployment has been decreasing steadily in Brighton and Hove: while the gap with England and the South East is closing. In 1996, 11.3% of the working population was unemployed, as compared to the national and regional levels of 7.8% and 5.5% respectively. Ten years later, local unemployment was running at 6.6%, much closer to the South East (4.5%) and England (5.3%) levels324. B.5.2 The same pattern can be also seen in unemployment benefit claimant rates, with 2.8% of the working age population across the city claiming Jobseekers Allowance (JSA) compared with 2.7% across other small cities, 1.4% across the South East and 2.2% across England as a whole325. B.5.3 Long-term unemployment has also been decreasing, although it still remains higher than in the South East and England. In 1996, out of all JSA claimants in Brighton and Hove, 45% had been receiving benefits for over 12 months. In the South East and England the proportion was only 32% and 35% respectively. In 2007, the rate had decreased to 22% in the city, compared to 15% in the South East and 17% in England326 . B.5.4 Looking at claimant flows provides a fuller picture of unemployment and labour market change than the raw numbers of claimants. Thus, over the 12-month period from July 2006 to July 2007, the number of claimants across the city fell from 5,185 to 4,545 – a drop of 640. However, the ‘on-flow’ of new claimants was 12,195 with an ‘off-flow’ of claimants leaving for job or other reasons of 12,735. B.5.5 This gives an upper estimate of 17,380 for the total number of people who have been on JSA during the course of the year, more than three times the stock figure (this is an upper estimate, as it will double-count those people who come off and back on to benefit during the 12 month period). B.5.6 Data on vacancies flows also provides interesting information on labour market trends. Over the period between August 2006 and August 2007 the stock of notified vacancies at JCP increased slightly from 1,686 to 1,859. However, during the same period of time around 14,800 vacancies were created and around 13,700 were filled up or withdrawn. Overall, JCP dealt with more than 16,000 vacancies.

A large portion of the population is not seeking work but would like to B.5.7 Although the population of those out of work who are seeking work is falling across Brighton and Hove, there is a larger cohort of the workless population not finding work. This population would like to work but are not actively seeking it. This could be as a result of a variety of factors including lack of affordable child care options, lack of confidence, issues with mental health or physical disability. In total, over 7% of the working age population are economically inactive but would, if circumstances were different, want to work. This is higher than across the South East and England (both 5.5%)327. B.5.8 Unlike those officially classed as unemployed who are actively seeking work, worklessness levels across this group have not been falling significantly in recent years. Nationally, official unemployment has halved between 1996 and 2005 while adults

324 Annual Population Survey (2006). 325 DWP (July 2007) 326 Source: ONS (2005). 327 Annual Population Survey (2006).

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 88 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

classified as ‘economically inactive but wanting work’ has only declined by one seventh in comparison328. B.5.9 A primary reason for this has been the difficulty of helping economically inactive groups back into work because they experience barriers that prevent them from actively seeking work such as long-term illness or disability.

The sick and disabled make up the majority of the workless population in the city B.5.10 Illness and disability rates now dwarf unemployment as primary reasons for worklessness. Across Brighton and Hove there are nearly three times as many people who are workless through sickness and claiming Incapacity Benefit (IB) - 13,000 compared with those who are unemployed and claiming JSA, which is 4,600329. Incapacity Benefit claimants and duration of claim across Brighton and Hove IBSDA claimants (Nov 2006)

N % England 2,187,355 6.7% South East 241,990 4.9%

Brighton and Hove 12,955 7.8%

Bristol, city of 21,135 8.1% Norwich 6,820 8.3% Southampton 9,695 6.6% Wandsworth 9,810 4.9%

East Sussex 19,650 7.1% West Sussex 22,420 5.1%

Source: OCSI 2007 (from DWP 2006) Rates based on ONS small area population estimates 2004 B.5.11 In contrast to the JSA population, the population who are workless and receiving IB has not been declining across Brighton and Hove, with IB rates for 2006 (7.8%) broadly the same as in 1999 (7.7%) across the city. Brighton and Hove has a higher IB rate than the South East (4.9%) and England as a whole (6.7%). B.5.12 In total, more than 50% of all working age people who claim benefits330 across Brighton and Hove claim as a result of incapacity331. As well as people who are workless, people on low-income benefits also cite incapacity as the primary reason for claiming. Just under two-thirds of Brighton and Hove’s Income Support claimants (62%) claim due to Incapacity compared with 56% across other small cities, 55% across England and 52% across the South East332.

328 Brighton and Hove (March 2005) Economic Development - workforce development and learning and skills snapshot p.2. 329 Dept. Work and Pensions (November 2006) IB figures, Dept. Work and Pensions (July 2007) JSA figures 330 Administered by the Department of Work and Pensions DWP) 331 DWP (November 2006) 332 DWP (August 2006)

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 89 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Worklessness levels among this sick and disabled group has not been falling B.5.13 Moreover, while the proportion receiving some form of incapacity benefit across England has been falling between 1999 and 2006 (by 8.2%)333, the rate across the city has remained constant for workless groups and has increased for those claiming low income benefits (the proportion of people claiming Income Support as a result of Incapacity increased by 8% between 2003 and 2006)334.

A growing proportion of the Incapacity Benefit population have mental health issues B.5.14 One of the reasons why overall IB claimant levels are not declining in line with the national trend is the relatively large population of mental health claimants among Brighton and Hove’s IB claimant group compared with elsewhere in the country. B.5.15 Mental health is increasingly being cited as a reason for claiming incapacity across the country as a whole with the proportion of people claiming IB as a result of mental illness increasing by 50% across England as whole between 1999 and 2006335. B.5.16 Over 52% of all people in receipt of Incapacity Benefit across Brighton and Hove receive it as a result of mental health reasons. This is significantly higher than across the South East (41%), England (42%) and other small cities (41%)336. B.5.17 This population is increasing significantly across the city while other forms of work- limiting illness are declining.

333 DWP (November 1999-2006) 334 DWP (November 2003- August 2006) 335 DWP (November 1999-2006) 336 DWP (November 2006)

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 90 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Incapacity Benefit claimants and duration of claim across Brighton and Hove Incapacity Benefit claimants (as a proportion of total claimants) Mental health 16-24 year-olds 50 and over reasons for claiming (share %) (share %) (share %) England 40.5% 6.3% 46.2% South East 41.9% 6.9% 44.7%

Brighton and Hove 51.9% 6.0% 38.5%

Bristol, city of 48.8% 7.2% 37.8% Norwich 53.7% 7.8% 38.6% Southampton 47.8% 6.4% 43.5% Wandsworth 47.8% 5.4% 39.7%

East Sussex 40.0% 6.2% 47.5% West Sussex 41.0% 6.6% 46.6% Source: OCSI 2007 (from DWP 2006) B.5.18 People with mental health issues face particular barriers to employment with local research identifying fewer than 4 in 10 employers (37%) willing to recruit a person with mental health issues. This compares unfavourably with those on IB as a result of physical illness or disability, with 62% of employers prepared to employ physically disabled people337. B.5.19 These findings may explain why IB claimant rates as a result of physical disability are falling in comparison to those with mental health issues. They also suggest that Brighton and Hove face additional challenges in reducing a significant component of the city’s workless population.

People with poor health are likely to experience long-term worklessness B.5.20 People suffering from long-term illnesses are increasingly likely to have been claiming benefits for a longer period of time and programmes to reduce levels of claimants are likely to have a less significant impact in terms of reducing benefit levels. Around 53% of all IB claimants and 46% of Income Support claimants across Brighton and Hove have been claiming for more than 5 years338.

Unemployed adults are also more likely to be long-term unemployed compared with elsewhere in England B.5.21 In addition to long-term worklessness among people who are sick and disabled, the city also has a larger number of long-term unemployed people than the region and England. B.5.22 More than one in five people across Brighton and Hove have claimed JSA for more than 1 year with over 9% claiming for more than two years, compared with less than 5% across the South East and England as a whole339. B.5.23 One potential reason for persistent unemployment across the city is high housing costs, with the ‘Housing Benefit trap’ making movement back into employment difficult,

337 Wilson, C. & Johnson, J.EQUAL Brighton and Hove Research Report , p.24 338 DWP (August 2006) IS; DWP (November 2006) IB 339 DWP (June 2007)

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 91 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

particularly where employment is low-paid or temporary or insecure. Incentives to induce claimants to leave long-term unemployment and rejoin the workforce are compromised as for every £1 earned above the previous benefit rate, 65p of Housing Benefit is withdrawn340. B.5.24 Long-term unemployment has been a consistent feature of the Brighton and Hove economy throughout the decade, highlighting a significant group of long-term unemployed people who have difficulties re-connecting with the labour market.

Long-term unemployment is particularly high among older workers B.5.25 People aged 50-64 are particularly likely to be long-term unemployed across Brighton and Hove. Just under 60% of all JSA claimants aged 50-64 have been unemployed for more than 6 months compared with 40% of the total JSA claimants in the city341. B.5.26 In total, in July 2007 there were 640 JSA claimants aged 50-64 in Brighton and Hove (14% of the total claimants across the city)342. In addition, in 2006 there were just under 5,000 people aged 50 and over claiming Incapacity benefit. Therefore, just over a third of all workless people claiming benefits across the city are aged between 50 and 64343. B.5.27 This reflects the difficulty of obtaining new employment among the over 50s.

Older groups who are unemployed face a number of additional barriers to employment B.5.28 Research by Age Concern344 and other groups suggests that people over 50 face a number of barriers to employment: • Difficulties are experienced as a result of age discrimination on the part of employers, through aged 50-64 • Older groups sometimes lack required ICT skills • The decline of certain industries which has had a very negative effect on the ability of some clients to find work345 • There is a reluctance of employers to invest in training of older workers • Older workers can lack of self confidence • There is a degree of ageism and lower expectations among employers • Other key obstacles identified were: caring responsibilities, confidence and motivation issues, transport and literacy problems.346

Which areas have the highest levels of worklessness? B.5.29 Areas across the city with the highest levels of worklessness are found in East Brighton, Hangleton and Knoll, Hollingbury and Stanmer, Moulsecoomb and Bevendean, Queen's

340 Brighton and Hove Socio-Economic Baseline Report (2003)Poverty and Economic Activity (chapter nine), Brighton & Hove and Adur Area Investment Framework, p.3. Available at: www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/regeneration/Ch_9_Poverty_and_Economc_Inactivity.pdf 341 DWP (June 2007) 342 ibid 343 DWP (November 2006) 344 Cited in: Wilson, C & Johnson, J. EQUAL Brighton and Hove Research Report , p.28. 345 Kodz, J. and Eccles, J. (2001) Evaluation of New Deal 50 Plus. Qualitative Evidence from Clients: Second Phase, Employment Service Research Report ESR70. Available at: www.employment-studies.co.uk/summary/summary.php?id=esr70 [accessed 29 August 2007]. 346 ibid

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 92 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Park. Some Super Output Areas within these neighbourhoods are among the 10% most deprived in terms of proportion of JSA, IB, IS and WACG claimants347348. B.5.30 These areas all contain SOAs with a proportion of JSA claimants349 higher than 5%. In two SOAs in Queen's Park the proportion reaches respectively 9.4% and 8.5%. B.5.31 With the exclusion of Moulsecoomb and Bevendean, these areas all include SOAs with more than 15% (as a percentage of working age population) of Incapacity Benefit claimants. B.5.32 Similarly, these areas all contain SOAs with more than 15% Income Support claimants (as a percentage of working age population). B.5.33 Finally, these areas all host SOAs where the proportion of Working Age Client Group claimants, is higher than 30%350of total working age population. In one SOA in Queen's park this level reaches 48%.

347 St. Peter’s and North lanes are in the top 20% in terms of Income Support claimants. 348 Source: OCSI 2007 (from DWP 2006) 349 As a percentage of working age population.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 93 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

What groups are at risk? Enterprise and Employment among vulnerable groups across Brighton and Hove Brighton and Hove Economically active Unemployment Self-employment England 66.9% 3.3% 8.3% South East 69.3% 2.6% 9.2%

Brighton and Hove

All 67.8% 3.6% 10.4%

Male 74.4% 4.7% 15.2% Female 61.3% 2.6% 5.8%

White British 68.6% 3.6% 10.5% White Other 65.8% 3.6% 9.8% Indian 63.6% 2.6% 13.6% Chinese 51.1% 2.7% 11.5% Bangladeshi 52.4% 4.4% 12.8% Pakistani 59.4% 5.7% 11.7% Black African & 54.5% 5.3% 8.2% Mixed Black Caribbean & 68.2% 5.8% 9.7% Mixed

0-15 - - - 16-17 48.7% 3.8% 0.4% 18-24 62.8% 3.8% 2.1% 25-44 82.6% 4.6% 12.3% 45-59 76.1% 3.6% 16.2% 60+ (NB work and - - - qualification data 60- 74)

Long-term limiting 33.0% 6.8% 10.9% illness Source: OCSI 2007 (Census 2001)

Black Caribbean, Black African and Pakistani ethnic groups are more likely to be unemployed than white ethnic groups across Brighton and Hove B.5.34 Evidence from the 2001 Census suggests that unemployment levels among BME groups as a whole are broadly similar to the white British ethnic group in Brighton and Hove overall. There is a lack of more recent evidence on unemployment patterns among ethnic minority groups across Brighton and Hove, primarily due to a lack of reliable ethnic minority population size denominators351. B.5.35 However, the 2001 Census identified unemployment to be significantly higher among particular ethnic minority groups. People from Black Caribbean, Pakistani and Black

351 The most recent comprehensive ethnic minority population estimates are extracted from the 2001 Census

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 94 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

African backgrounds were one and a half times as likely to be unemployed as people from White British ethnic minority groups. However, these groups only account for just over 4,000 people across Brighton and Hove. B.5.36 More recent evidence based on Jobseekers Allowance claimants broken down by ethnicity (available for 2006/07) shows that just under 8% of all JSA claimants across Brighton and Hove were from a BME group. In total there were 350 people from BME groups claiming JSA across the city, 120 of whom were black, 95 from Chinese or ‘other’ ethnic origin, 75 of Asian ethnicity and 60 of ‘mixed’ ethnicity352. B.5.37 Other minority groups that are likely to face barriers are Gypsies and Travellers. There is limited data on these groups and no data on unemployment among these groups at city level. However, national evidence suggests that unemployment among Gypsies and Travellers is high, and that this is exacerbated by the fact that few programmes aimed at reducing unemployment are designed with Gypsy and Traveller needs in mind. Moreover, low-level literacy and lack of stable housing plays a part in many Gypsies and Travellers not receiving benefits and/or training (for example Jobseeker Plus or New Deal training) that they are entitled to353.

Brighton and Hove’s large proportion of drug users and former users are also likely to face barriers to employment B.5.38 Brighton and Hove has a significantly larger proportion of drug users than elsewhere in the England354. This group is considerably more likely to be unemployed. National estimates are that 79% of former substance users are unemployed355. This is likely to be linked to a ranges of barriers faced by former substance misusers including: • Employers’ views of drug users were that they were more likely to be unreliable, untrustworthy and unsafe. Evidence from the Chartered Institute of personal development suggests that 36% of employers would reject an applicant as a result of substance misuse problems356 • A criminal record which adds to the untrustworthy image and lack of social acceptance357 • Unemployment for months or years brings with it financial deprivation, poor living conditions and a further lowering of self-esteem358.

Worklessness levels are also likely to be high among ex-offenders across Brighton and Hove. B.5.39 There is evidence to suggest that this group is likely to face a range of barriers to employment including: • Housing and homelessness problems due to difficulty in finding accommodation on leaving prison

352 DWP (April 2006- March 7) JSA by ethnicity 353 Klee, H. McLean, I and Yavorsky, C. (2002) Employing drug users: Individual and systemic barriers to rehabilitation, YPS in association with JRF. 354 This population is looked at in more detail in the Healthy Communities and Older People Section 355 DWP (2004) Drug and Alcohol Use: Barriers to employment, DWP. Available at: www.dwp.gov.uk/jad/2004/w193rep.pdf 356 Chartered Institute of personal development - survey of 750 employers, cited at www.clickajob.co.uk/news/ex-offenders-face-jobs-struggle--333.html 357 Klee, H. McLean, I and Yavorsky, C. (2002) Employing drug users: Individual and systemic barriers to rehabilitation, YPS in association with JRF. 358 ibid

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 95 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

• Lack of education and skills - half of male prisoners and more than two-thirds of female adult prisoners across Brighton and Hove have no education qualifications. More than half of all prisoners only reach the education level expected of an 11- year-old in reading, writing and maths359 • Low levels of self confidence and motivation • Lack of work experience • Discrimination from employers: evidence from research carried out by the Department for Work and Pensions (DWP) shows that a criminal record currently results in the rejection of an applicant for an estimated 17% of vacancies while for most offences rejection is probable for around half of vacancies.360

People in low skilled employment are at greater risk of becoming unemployed across Brighton and Hove B.5.40 Of all unemployed people in the 2001 Census, around three quarters were from lower skilled occupation groups (below professional), this compares with 50% of Brighton and Hove’s population as a whole from these groups. The people at greatest risk of unemployment are those from elementary occupations which make up 17% of all former employment groups. B.5.41 As a result, unemployment is higher across Brighton and Hove among less skilled groups. In 2006, just over half the working age population with no qualifications were in employment across the city, compared with nearly three-quarters of the working age population as a whole361. B.5.42 Employment rates of those with no qualifications in Brighton and Hove are below levels for the South East (56%) but above the level across England as a whole 50% and well above that of other NRF areas362.

There is still presence of gender discrimination in the labour market B.5.43 Although female participation in the labour market has increased considerably, it is still below 50%. In 1999, around 54,000 women were economically active and in employment as compared to 67,000 men; in 2006, women and men in employment were respectively 61,000 and 69,500. B.5.44 Female workers, on average, earn less than males, although the gender gap is less wide in Brighton than in the South East and Great Britain. The gender gap for workplace earning in the city is £34 per week, whilst in the South East is £124 and £102 in Great Britain363. B.5.45 The growth in part-time work364 has made a major contribution to the increase in female labour market participation, although such flexible working patterns tend to be

359 Brighton Business (2007) Business supports rehabilitation of ex-offenders. Available at: http://www.brightonbusiness.co.uk/htm/ni20051217.987297.htm 360 DWP (2001) Barriers to employment for offenders and ex-offenders, DWP Research Report, No 155. Available at: http://www.dwp.gov.uk/asd/asd5/155summ.asp, 361 NRU (2006) APS Available at Floor Targets Interactive. Available at: www.fti.neighbourhood.gov.uk/ 362 ibid 363 Source: ONS annual survey of hours and earnings. 364 Part-time jobs accounted for 33% of the total job market in 1995, in 2005 they accounted for 39% of it (ABI 2005).

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 96 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

concentrated in health, education and retail services365. In 2001, women accounted for 46.2% of total employment in Brighton and Hove, yet they accounted for 75% of part- time employment. B.5.46 Women are over represented in Health and Social work (75.8% of total employees), Education (66.5%), Financial Services (53.1%); whilst they are under-represented in Energy and Water (41.5%), Manufacturing (27.5%), Construction (7.8%), Transport and communication (31.9%), Business services (39.4%)366.

Homelessness can cause unemployment and unemployment can cause homelessness B.5.47 There is no local data on unemployment levels among homeless or former homeless people across Brighton and Hove. However, national evidence suggests that homeless groups can be trapped in a vicious circle excluding them from the labour market. A long period of worklessness can be a main cause of homelessness, conversely the need to provide a stable address for most employers means that it is difficult to secure employment which would then help secure a home367. Research on homeless people in London found that lack of suitable accommodation was cited by 24% of homeless people in the study as the primary barrier to employment.368 B.5.48 A further barrier to employment faced by homeless people is the lack of qualifications, with homeless people twice as likely not to possess at least a level 2 qualification (60% of homeless people qualified to below level 2 compared with 32% the adult population). 369 B.5.49 As a result, less than 20% of the homeless population are in any work based training or educational activity compared with just under half of the population as a whole.370

365 Source: Brighton and Hove Socio-Economic Baseline Report (2003) Brighton & Hove and Adur Area Investment Framework. All chapters available at: Available at: http://www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/index.cfm?skin=textonly&request=c1120682

366 Source: Brighton and Hove and Adur Area Investment Framework: Socio-Economic baseline report. 367 EQUAL Brighton and Hove: Barriers to Employment for Homeless People 368 Singh, P. March (2005) No home, no job: moving on from transitional spaces, a report for Off the Streets and Into Work. 369 Opinion Leader Research (2006) Homeless people and learning and skills participation, barriers and progression, Crisis. Available at: www.crisis.org.uk/downloads.php/357/Homeless%20people%20and%20learning%20and%20skills. pdf 370 Opinion Leader Research (2006) Homeless people and learning and skills participation, barriers and progression, Crisis. Available at: www.crisis.org.uk/downloads.php/357/Homeless%20people%20and%20learning%20and%20skills. pdf

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 97 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Appendix C LAA theme: Ensuring all our children and young people have the best possible start in life

C.1 Introduction C.1.1 This Appendix provides analysis of inequality under the Brighton and Hove LAA theme Ensuring all our children and young people have the best possible start in life. C.1.2 The LAA outcomes under the Children and young people theme match the five Every Child Matters key outcomes371: • Enjoying and achieving – getting the most out of life and developing broad skills for adulthood • Economic well-being – Children and young people overcoming socio-economic disadvantage to achieve their full potential in life • Being healthy – Children and young people enjoying good physical and mental health and living a healthy lifestyle • Staying safe – Children and young people being protected from harm and neglect and growing up able to look after themselves • Making a positive contribution – to the community and to society, and not engaging in anti-social or offending behaviour. C.1.3 We examine each outcome in turn below, with an additional final section on those young adults Not Entering Education Employment or Training (NEET). C.1.4 Under each section, we look at overall levels of inequality across the city, identifying those groups and areas faring badly on a range of outcome measures. Where data is available, we look at a range of vulnerable communities including children in care, children on child protection registers, children with disabilities or special educational needs (SEN), teenage mothers, child carers, young adults NEET.

C.2 Enjoying and achieving

GCSE attainment levels are increasing but still below national and regional levels C.2.1 The proportion of pupils gaining 5 or more GCSE passes at grades A*-C has been rising steadily across Brighton and Hove (although there has been a slight drop between 2005 and 2006); increasing by 30%; between 1998 and 2006, faster than the increases seen across the region (21%) and England as a whole (26%) over the same period. C.2.2 Additionally, in 2006 every school in Brighton and Hove reached their GCSE schools target, an improvement from 80% in 2003. This is reflected in people’s attitudes to the education system in Brighton and Hove with 85% of residents believing that education provision has got better or stayed the same over the last three years372. C.2.3 However, the 55% proportion of pupils gaining 5 or more GCSE passes at grades A*-C is still below the national average of 58.5% and the regional average of 59.5% but is slightly above the average for small cities as a whole (53%)373. Of these, 42% receive 5

371 Brighton & Hove (March 2007). Refresh of the Local Area Agreement for Brighton & Hove 2007 -2008. Available from www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/performance_team/Brighton___Hove_LAA_07-08.pdf 372 ODPM (2003/4) General Best Value Survey 373 DfES (2006) Taken from Floor Targets Interactive. Available at: www.fti.neighbourhood.gov.uk/

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 98 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

A*-Cs including English and Maths. This is below the regional 48% and national 45% averages374. C.2.4 Those leaving school without the necessary qualifications to continue education find themselves in one of the most highly educated labour markets in the country, competing for employment with students and educated adults375. As a result, this group are at greater risk of becoming NEET376.

Attainment levels at Key Stage 3 across the city remain well below national and regional levels C.2.5 Key Stage 3 exam results are not showing the same improvement as seen at GCSE and attainment levels are well below national and regional averages. C.2.6 Brighton and Hove still has a significantly lower proportion of pupils receiving a level 5 qualification for Key Stage 3 English (66%) than the region (75%) and England as a whole (73%) for 2006. A similar pattern is seen with Science and Maths at Key Stage 3, where the proportion of pupils achieving level 5 remains below regional and national levels377. C.2.7 This suggests that policies for improving educational attainment should remain focused on this age group.

Key Stage 2 attainment levels are higher across Brighton and Hove than the region and England as a whole and increasing more rapidly C.2.8 Although pupil attainment is below average for the older age groups, younger age groups are performing well relative to the region and England as a whole. Pupil attainment at Key Stage 2 across Brighton and Hove is above the regional and national averages for all subjects378. C.2.9 Moreover, the city has experienced a significant rise in the proportion of pupils gaining level 4 at Key Stage 2, with KS2 English scores increasing by more than a third between 1998 and 2006 and Maths scores increasing by 45% across the city. This is a significantly higher rise than the 20% increase in English level 4 grades and the 25% increase in Maths level 4 grades experienced across the South East as a whole over the same period.

374 DfES (1997-2006) DfES. Taken from Floor Targets Interactive. Available at: www.fti.neighbourhood.gov.uk/ 375 Brighton and Hove Socio-Economic Baseline Report (2003), Labour Market and the Economy (chapter four), p.7. Available at: http://www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/regeneration/Ch_4_Labour_Market_and_the_Economy.pdf 376 This is examined in greater depth in the ‘NEET section’ below. 377 66% of pupils across Brighton and Hove achieve level 5 at Key Stage 3 Science compared with 75% across the South East and 72% across England. The city has experienced a rise of 5% between 2001 and 2005 compared with a rise of 9% across England over the same period. 71% of pupils across Brighton and Hove achieve level 5 at Key Stage 3 Maths compared with 79% across the South East and 77% across England. The city has experienced a rise of 11% between 2001 and 2005 compared with a rise of 17% across England over the same period. 378 For Key Stage 2 English 81% of pupils in Brighton achieve level 4 compared with 80% across the South East and 79% across England as a whole. For Maths at key stage 2 77% of pupils in Brighton and Hove achieve a level 4 grade compared with 75% across the South East and 76% across England.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 99 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Pupil attainment varies widely across Brighton and Hove

There is significant variation in pupil attainment across different areas in Brighton and Hove C.2.10 GCSE attainment varies widely across Brighton, with some areas doing significantly worse than the city (and national) averages. C.2.11 In 2005, the city contained four MSOAs where less than 35% of pupils gained 5+ GCSEs (in the areas covering North East Moulsecoomb, Coldean and Universities, Brunswick379, Whitehawk and Craven Vale and South Moulsecoomb and Bevendean) compared with a national average attainment for 2005 of 56%380. C.2.12 By contrast, there were four MSOAs across the city where more than 80% gained 5 or more GCSE passes at grades A*-C (in the areas covering North Preston and Dyke Road, Rottingdean, Ovingdean and West Saltdean, Ditchling Road and Goldsmid and St Annes Wells) 381.

Inequalities in pupil attainment across different groups in Brighton and Hove

FSM pupils are less than half as likely to achieve 5 A*-C at GCSE as non FSM pupils across Brighton and Hove C.2.13 Across Brighton and Hove in 2005, just over one in four pupils eligible for Free School Meals (FSM) (27%) receive 5 A*-C grades at GCSE. This is less than half the level for non-FSM pupils (60%)382. However, FSM pupils across Brighton and Hove outperform those across the region where only 24% gain 5+GCSE grades A*-C383.

Social class heavily determines pupil attainment across Brighton and Hove C.2.14 Social class is also associated with educational attainment. DfES figures (1997–2003) show that pupils from advantaged backgrounds (management, professional) were more than three times as likely to obtain five or more GCSE A–C grades than their peers at the other end of the social spectrum (unskilled manual) - the gap between them is getting larger every year: in the ten years between 1988 and 1997, the percentage of pupils from managerial and professional backgrounds obtaining five or more GCSE A–C grades moved from 52% to 69%384. The comparable figures for children from unskilled manual backgrounds moved from 12% to 20%.385 C.2.15 More recent figures (2005) for Brighton and Hove based on Acorn classification figures show that whilst 77% of pupils classified as ‘wealthy achievers’ and 65% of pupils classified as ‘urban prosperity’ achieved 5+A*-C, only 19% of those classified as ‘hard pressed’ achieved these grades386.

379 However, only 14 pupils sat GCSE examinations that year in Brunswick 380 DfES (2005) Pupil Attainment by Pupil Residence taken from NeSS 381 ibid 382 DfES (2005) PLASC data taken from NeSS 383 ibid 384 Department for Education and Skills (2005). Available at: http://publications.teachernet.gov.uk/eOrderingDownload/1397-2005PDF-EN-01.pdf [accessed: 28 August 2007]. 385 Department for Education and Skills (2005). Available at: http://publications.teachernet.gov.uk/eOrderingDownload/1397-2005PDF-EN-01.pdf [accessed: 28 August 2007]. 386 DfES/CACA (2005) Pupil Attainment by Acorn Classification.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 100 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Ethnicity has a smaller impact although there is some evidence to suggest that Asian pupils are falling behind other pupils across the city C.2.16 There were comparatively few ethnic minority pupils taking GCSEs across Brighton and Hove in 2006 so rigorous comparison between the attainment of ethnic groups is difficult. However, in general, people from Asian ethnic minority groups performed less well at GCSE than other ethnic minority groups with 41% gaining 5+GCSEs compared with 55% of the population as a whole. However, only 34 pupils identifying as Asian took GCSEs across the city in that year387. C.2.17 The city has a number of programmes working with disadvantaged minority pupils including pupils for whom English is an Additional Language including the SEAL programme (Service for English as an Additional Language). This programme works one to one and in small groups with minority ethnic pupils at risk of academic underachievement. There is some evidence to suggest that they have had a positive impact on pupil attainment among minority groups388. C.2.18 Overall, across the city, the white British majority population performed slightly less well than the ethnic minority population at GCSE level with just under 54% gaining 5+GCSE grades A*-C compared with an average of 55% across the city as a whole389.

387 DfES (2006) Pupil Attainment by ethnicity data. Available at: www.dfes.gov.uk/rsgateway / 388 Information supplied by Lisa Mytton - Neighbourhood Renewal Programme Support Officer 389 ibid

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 101 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

C.3 Economic well-being Children living in ‘out of work’ households in Brighton and Hove and selected comparison areas Children living in Children living in lone Children living in 'out of households with all parent households work' lone parent adults 'out of work' households N % N % N % England 2,243,890 20.4 2,830,220 25.8 1,500,545 53.0 South East 256,505 14.6 362,905 20.6 179,685 49.5

Brighton and 10,960 23.3 13,305 28.3 7,580 57.0 Hove

Bristol 21,085 26.2 25,260 31.4 15,235 60.3 Norwich 6,675 29.2 7,390 32.4 4,460 60.4 Southampton 10,960 25.6 13,195 30.8 7,900 59.9 Wandsworth 13,645 26.7 15,660 30.7 9,955 63.6

East Sussex 17,505 17.1 23,550 23.0 11,935 50.7 West Sussex 20,680 13.0 31,935 20.0 14,565 45.6

Source: OCSI 2006 (from HMRC 2005)

Nearly one-quarter of the city’s children live in ‘out of work’ households C.3.1 Roughly 11,000 children (23%) across Brighton and Hove live in households where all the adults present in the household are out of work390. This is well above the regional (15%) and England (20%) levels and the level across small cities as a whole (21%)391. C.3.2 The relatively low level of pupil attainment in Brighton and Hove is likely to be linked to poverty as children in poor households may have less contact with more qualified adults and therefore have lower educational aspirations392. This is potentially a driver for the low educational attainment among FSM pupils (above).

Lone parent households account for nearly 70% of all out of work households in the city, mainly headed by women 3.15.10 The relatively high levels of children living in ‘out of work’ households is partly driven by a high proportion of out of work lone parent households in the city. The city has a higher proportion of children living in lone parent households (28%) than the region (21%) and England (26%) though comparable to other small cities as a whole393. Additionally, lone parents are more likely to be out of work across Brighton and Hove than elsewhere, with 57% of all lone parents across the city out of work compared with

390 HMRC (2005) Working Tax Credit data from. Please note, out of work households refers to households were parents receive the same level of support as provided by CTC, but where it is paid as child allowances in Income Support or income-based Jobseekers Allowance (IS/JSA) out of work benefits 391 ibid 392 Brighton and Hove Socio-Economic Baseline Report (2003)Poverty and Economic Activity (chapter nine), Brighton & Hove and Adur Area Investment Framework. Available at: www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/regeneration/Ch_9_Poverty_and_Economc_Inactivity.pdf 393 HMRC (2005) Working Tax Credit data

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 102 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

52% across other small cities, 50% across the South East and 53% across England as a whole394. 3.15.11 From Census 2001 data, 91% of lone parents in Brighton and Hove are women. Additionally, the employment rate of male lone parents is above the employment rate of female lone parents (61% compared with 46%), and only 17% of female lone parents are in full-time employment compared with 51% of male lone parents. This suggests that that the vast majority, i.e. above 90%, of lone parent out-of-work households are headed by women. C.3.3 Research by the Royal Bank of Scotland revealed that lack of appropriate or affordable childcare was the largest barrier to employment among lone parent groups, with 31% of lone parents leaving employment or reducing hours as a result of lack of suitable childcare395. Additional barriers to employment cited in the report included employer barriers relating to lack of flexible working arrangements or support which was identified by 14% of lone parents396. C.3.4 Across Brighton and Hove there were 3,700 lone parents on income support, representing one third of all Income Support claimants across the city397. Linked to this, 59% of all Income Support claimants across the city are female C.3.5 Research into lone parents on Income Support has found that the support required to help return into employment included help with building confidence and skill levels, information on available child care and job matching services398. These services are provided as part of the New Deal for Lone Parents support provided through Jobcentre plus. However, of the 3,700 lone parents on Income Support across the city only 580 received New Deal for Lone Parent Support in 2005399.

Child Poverty is heavily concentrated in the Eastern areas of Brighton and Hove C.3.6 In seven Super Output Areas (SOAs) across Brighton and Hove more than 50% of children live in out of work families. All seven areas are located in the east of the city, three in East Brighton, two in Moulsecoomb and Bevendean and one each in Hollingbury and Stanmer and Queens Park. C.3.7 Children living in ‘out of work’ lone parent households make up more than 50% of all ‘out of work’ households in Brighton and Hove in all but eight of the 164 Super Output Areas in the city400.

394 HMRC (2005) Working Tax Credit data. 395 Royal Bank Scotland, Press Release. Available at: www.rbs.com/media03.asp?id=MEDIA_CENTRE/PRESS_RELEASES/2004/JULY/20_LONE_PAR ENTS 396 Royal Bank Scotland, Press Release. Available at: www.rbs.com/media03.asp?id=MEDIA_CENTRE/PRESS_RELEASES/2004/JULY/20_LONE_PAR ENTS 397 Income Support DWP August 2006 (taken from NeSS) 398 Royal Bank Scotland, Press Release. Available at: www.rbs.com/media03.asp?id=MEDIA_CENTRE/PRESS_RELEASES/2004/JULY/20_LONE_PAR ENTS 399 DWP (2005). Available from NeSS. 400 HMRC (2005) Working Tax Credit data. Out of work households refers to households were parents receive the same level of support as provided by CTC, but where it is paid as child allowances in Income Support or income-based Jobseekers Allowance (IS/JSA) out of work benefits

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 103 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

C.4 Being healthy

Children with disabilities C.4.1 The Every Child Matters programme identifies improving the outcomes of disabled children as a priority, recognising that the needs of disabled children are complex and cross-cutting service boundaries401.

A higher proportion of children across Brighton and Hove have disabilities compared with the region and England as a whole C.4.2 Fewer than 1,300 children aged 0-15 in Brighton and Hove receive Disability Living Allowance (DLA). This represents 3.1% of the total 0-15 population in the city. This is a higher proportion of child DLA claimants then the region and England as a whole (both 2.4%)402. Children make up more than 11% of total DLA claimants across the city403. C.4.3 This is likely to be an underestimate of the total number of disabled children as benefit take-up of DLA among children is relatively low. The audit commission has found that many families miss out on benefits because services do not pass on key information at the right time404.

Disabled children are at greater risk of living in poverty C.4.4 These groups are likely to face a number of inequality issues. Research from ‘Every Child Matters’ suggests that ’29% of disabled children live in poverty’.405 C.4.5 This reflects the difficulty of combining work with caring for a disabled child. In 2003, it was estimated that 85% of mothers with disabled children were not in paid employment406. This is compounded by the fact that disabled children are more likely to live in lone parent households and therefore be reliant on a sole carer. For example, 29% of lone parents have a sick or disabled child407. C.4.6 As well as being more concentrated in low-income households, disabled children are also more likely to have lower aspirations, and less likely to reach these aspirations. Research on a sample of young people born in 1958 found that the proportion of disabled youngsters aspiring to semi-skilled and unskilled jobs was six times the

401 Audit Commission (2003) Services for disabled children - A review of services for disabled children and their families. Available at: http://www.audit- commission.gov.uk/reports/NATIONAL-REPORT.asp?CategoryID=andProdID=EE944EBA- B414-4d76-903E-A4CA0E304989andSectionID=sect1# [accessed: 27 August 2007]. 402 DWP (August 2006) DLA data. 403 ibid 404 Audit Commission (2003) Services for disabled children - A review of services for disabled children and their families. Available at: http://www.audit- commission.gov.uk/reports/NATIONAL-REPORT.asp?CategoryID=andProdID=EE944EBA- B414-4d76-903E-A4CA0E304989andSectionID=sect1# [accessed: 27 August 2007]. 405 Disabled children: facts and figures (2005) Available at: www.everychildmatters.gov.uk/socialcare/disabledchildren/facts/ [accessed : 27 August 2007]. 406 Council for Disabled Children (2003) Disabled Children, Their Families and Child Poverty, End Child Poverty, Briefing Paper, Council for Disabled Children. 407 DWP (2004), Families and Children in Britain: Findings from the 2002 Families and Children Study (FACS), Department of Work and Pensions, Research Report 206.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 104 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

proportion for non-disabled young people408. Attainment of these more modest aspirations was also lower with only one fifth of disabled 18-year olds achieving the occupational group of the job they had desired at age 16, compared to one third of non-disabled youngsters409. C.4.7 Whilst there is no nationally available data on educational attainment of disabled children specifically, there is information on the broader category of children with special educational needs (SEN).

Brighton pupils with Special Educational Needs (SEN) are less than one-quarter as likely to attain good GCSEs compared with those pupils without SEN C.4.8 There were 345 pupils with Special Educational Needs (SEN) without statements and 117 pupils with SEN with statements taking GCSEs in 2005 in Brighton and Hove410. C.4.9 Nationally, pupils with SEN (without statements), are less than one-fifth as likely to achieve five or more GCSE passes at A*-C grade than those pupils without SEN (65%). Statemented pupils are even less likely to reach this mark411. This is mirrored across Brighton, with only 14% of pupils with SEN (without statements), and 8.5% of pupils with SEN (with statements) achieving five or more GCSE passes at A*-C grade412.

Pupils with SEN without statements across Brighton are less likely to achieve 5 or more GCSE passes at grades A*-C than SEN pupils across England C.4.10 Pupils with SEN, without statements, across Brighton and Hove are less likely to achieve 5+GCSE grades A*-C (14%) than pupils with SEN across England as a whole (17%). By contrast, pupils without SEN across the city are more likely to achieve 5 GCSE grades A*-C (65%) than non-SEN pupils across England413. C.4.11 This suggests that SEN pupils are falling further behind non-SEN pupils in Brighton compared with elsewhere in England.

Child Carers C.4.12 Data from the 2001 Census suggested there were 360 carers across Brighton and Hove in 2001 aged 15 and under. Of these, over 13% provided care for more than 20 hours per week and 5% provided care for more than 50 hours per week414. C.4.13 More recent evidence from the Young Carers project showed that in 2004/05 the city supported a total of 123 young carers across Brighton and Hove,415 where a young carer is defined as a child or young person who carries a caring role which would be associated with that of an adult.

408 Burchardt, T. (2005) The education and employment of disabled young people: Frustrated ambition, published for the Foundation by The Policy Press. Extract available at: www.jrf.org.uk/knowledge/findings/socialpolicy/0565.asp . 409 ibid 410 DfES (2005) Pupil Attainment by SEN from PLASC 2005. Available at: Available at: www.dfes.gov.uk/rsgateway/ . 411 ibid 412 ibid 413 ibid 414 Census (2001) Unpaid Care 415 Brighton and Hove Children and Young People’s Plan (2006-2009), p.19. Available at: www.brighton-hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/cypp/CYPPJulyV4.pdf

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 105 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

C.4.14 These groups are particularly likely to face barriers to learning, including difficulty in attendance and punctuality, and problems with homework/coursework416. Additional problems highlighted in a study of young carers in Enfield included difficulties joining in extra curricular activities, low attainment, anxiety and fatigue417.

Teenage Pregnancy C.4.15 Teenage pregnancy is associated with increased risk of poor social economic and health outcomes for mother and child. It can also lead to both social and economic exclusion. Around 15% of people Not in Education Employment or Training (NEET) were either teenage mothers or pregnant.

Teenage conception levels are declining across Brighton and Hove, and are well below NRF averages (although higher than regional and national averages C.4.16 The most recent data identifies 45 under-18 conceptions per 1,000 population across Brighton and Hove. Although the teenage conception rate has declined by 9% between 1998-2000 and 2003-2005, the city still has a higher proportion of teenage conceptions than the levels across the South East (34 per 1,000 15-17) and England as a whole (42)418. C.4.17 However, the levels are low when considered in the context of teenage pregnancy rates in other NRF areas. The average number of teenage conceptions per 1,000 across NRF areas is 53 compared with 45 across Brighton and Hove. Moreover, there is some evidence that teenage conceptions are reducing at a faster rate across Brighton and Hove (by 9% between 1998-2000 and 2003-2005) than across other NRF areas (6% over the same period). C.4.18 The most recent available data on teenage pregnancy levels (for 2005) identifies that rates in the Neighbourhood Renewal Areas are above the rest of the city, and suggests that recent progress in closing the gap between NRA and the rest of the city may be levelling off419.

Healthy Births across Brighton and Hove

The infant mortality rate across Brighton and Hove is above national and regional levels C.4.19 There were 6.2 deaths per 1,000 births between 2003 and 2005 across Brighton and Hove. This is above the regional average of 4 and the national average of 5.1. The city has the fourth highest infant mortality rate in the South East of England420.

416 Marsden, R. (1995) Young Carers and Education, London: Borough of Enfield, Education Department, cited in Carers UK (2003) Young Carers and education, Carers UK. Available at: http://www.carersuk.org/Policyandpractice/PolicyResources/Research/yceduc.pdf 417 Marsden, R. (1995) Young Carers and Education, London: Borough of Enfield, Education Department, cited in Carers UK (2003) Young Carers and education, Carers UK. Available at: http://www.carersuk.org/Policyandpractice/PolicyResources/Research/yceduc.pdf 418 Office of National Statistics. Data taken from NRU, Floor Targets Interactive. Available at: www.fti.neighbourhood.gov.uk/ 419 Brighton and Hove PCT (2007). Strategy to Reduce Health Inequalities in Brighton and Hove: Technical Supplement 2007. Available from: http://www.brightonandhovepct.nhs.uk/healthylives/inequalities/index.asp. 420 Office for National Statistics. Taken from NeSS

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 106 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Brighton and Hove has a lower proportion of babies born with low birth weight than England as a whole C.4.20 In Brighton and Hove, 6.9% of babies born in the city were recorded as having a low birth weight across Brighton and Hove, compared with 7.7% across England as a whole. Between 2000 and 2004, there were just under 1,000 low birth weight babies born across the city421. C.4.21 Brighton and Hove performs fairly well on postnatal outcomes with breastfeeding significantly above the national averages422. Health outcomes of children across Brighton and Hove

Brighton and Hove has a higher proportion of children with a limiting long-term illness than the national average C.4.22 Data from the 2001 census indicated that across Brighton and Hove 5% of 0-15 year olds had a limiting long-term illness. This is above levels across the South East (3.9%) and England as a whole (4.3%).

However, Brighton and Hove’s children have healthier lifestyles compared with elsewhere in England C.4.23 Local data suggests that Brighton and Hove’s children lead healthier lifestyles than children elsewhere in the region. C.4.24 Across the city, twenty-two schools have achieved the local silver/national level 3 award for healthy schools (Brighton and Hove Children and Young People’s Plan 2006- 2009, p.28). This is reflected in lower obesity rates particularly in young children were Rates of obesity in 5 year olds are marginally below the national average, at 10.1%423. Rates of smoking and alcohol use are also lower than national averages424.

Health outcomes are lower for children among particular vulnerable groups including lone parents C.4.25 However, in view of the relationship between material hardship and the development of health problems among parents and children, certain groups are more likely to have poorer healthier outcomes. . C.4.26 A study of health among lone parents found that in only four in ten households the mother and children remained free of long-term or limiting illness throughout the four years whilst 1 in 8 households, both parent and child were ill425. This can create a cycle of poverty and ill health, as lone parents in ill health are three times less likely to have worked continuously than those in good health426.

421 Office for National Statistics. Taken from NeSS 422 Brighton and Hove Children and Young People’s Plan (2006-2009), p.20. Available at: www.brighton-hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/cypp/CYPPJulyV4.pdf

423 Brighton and Hove Children and Young People’s Plan (2006-2009), p.20. Available at: www.brighton-hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/cypp/CYPPJulyV4.pdf 424 ibid 425 Ford, R. and Marsh, A. (1998) Health Declines for Lone Parents and Their Children, PSI. Press release available at: http://www.psi.org.uk/news/pressrelease.asp?news_item_id=45 426 ibid

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 107 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

C.4.27 The high levels of ‘out of work’ lone parent households in Brighton and Hove are therefore likely to be linked to high levels of children with a limiting long-term illness across the city.

C.5 Staying safe

Children on child protection registers

The number of children on child protection registers has declined across Brighton and Hove between 2001 and 2005 C.5.1 There were 135 children on child protection registers in Brighton and Hove in 2005. This represents 29 children per 10,000 children in Brighton and Hove aged under 18. This is a higher proportion than across the region (20 per 10,000 children) and England as a whole (23 per 1,000 children)427. C.5.2 However, the number of children on child protection registers has declined significantly between 2001-2005. In 2001 there were 205 children on the register (45 per 10,000 children more than double the regional average (21)) 428. This represents a fall of over one-third.

Neglect and emotional abuse are the primary reasons for placing children on the child protection register in Brighton and Hove C.5.3 Just under half of all children (44%) on the child protection register are placed on the register as a result of neglect in Brighton and Hove. This broadly compares with the regional (46%) and national (44%) picture429. C.5.4 The other major reason for placing children on the child protection register across Brighton and Hove is emotional abuse which accounts for 41% of all placements across the city. This is around double the proportion of people registered as a result of emotional abuse across the region (22%) and England (20%)430. C.5.5 By contrast, no children have been placed on the register as a result of violent abuse. This is likely to reflect a different way of recording violent abuse across the city rather than the absence of any abuse. Particularly as there is a high level of domestic violence recorded in the city - nearly 2,600 domestic violence crimes and incidents were recorded in 2003-04, with around half of the victims recorded as parents – with LGBT youth more vulnerable to abuse within the home431. The Women’s Refuge received 1,304 referrals of children in 2003/4432. C.5.6 In addition to domestic violence, children have been the victims of a range of crime across the city. Recorded crime figures for 2005 estimate that there were just under 1,900 crime victims aged under 18 years old433.

427 All Children on Child Protection Registers data taken from DfES. Available from: www.data4nr.net/search-results/528/ 428 ibid 429 ibid 430 ibid 431 Brighton and Hove Youth Homelessness Strategy 2007- 10. Available at: www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/housing/Youth_Homelessness_Strategy.pdf 432 Brighton and Hove Children and Young People’s Plan (2006-2009), p.24. Available at: www.brighton-hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/cypp/CYPPJulyV4.pdf 433 ibid

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 108 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Bullying

There is a high level of bullying in schools in Brighton and Hove particularly among the LGBT community C.5.7 The children consulted in the Children’s Young People Plan (2006-2009) all stated that ‘feeling unsafe, fear of crime and bullying were all issues which concerned them’434. C.5.8 Nonetheless, the Safe at School Survey 2006 highlights a continuing downward trend for pupils reporting that they have experienced bullying or have bullied during the term they were surveyed. In 2006, 25% of 11 – 15 year olds had been bullied during the term the survey was carried out: a drop in 1% on the previous year. In terms of 8-11 year olds: 28% had been bullied – a drop in 5% on the previous year. With regard to those who had claimed to have bullied other children: 21% of 11 – 15 year olds had, a finding which saw no change on the previous years’ results. In terms of – 11 year olds however, 14% had claimed to have bullied others - a drop in 4% since the previous year435. C.5.9 Research suggests that particular communities are more at risk of bullying than others. Thus, the Safe at School Survey 2006 highlights some gender differentiation around bullying for children between 7 and 11 years of age with 24% of males and 17% of females having bullied others. However, there was an equal amount of males and females having experienced bullying (25%) 436. Furthermore, females were more likely to be aware of the Helpline437 and poster based438 campaigns whilst males were more aware of web-based awareness campaigns and advice439. C.5.10 Research into experiences of gay people in schools found that almost two-thirds (65 per cent) of young lesbian, gay and bisexual pupils have experienced direct bullying440. This problem is often exacerbated because only 6% have policies that recognise homophobia441 and less than a quarter (23 %) of young gay people have been told that homophobic bullying is wrong in their school.442 C.5.11 Homophobic bullying can have severe educational consequences. A Select Committee on Education and Skills (2006) found that bullying had a significant impact on school experience and mental wellbeing. The report also stressed that 72% of LGBT adults surveyed reported a regular history of absenteeism at school due to homophobic

434 Ibid, p. 16. 435 Healthy Schools Team - Safe At School Survey 2006 Brief to the CYPT DMT Sub Group Safe in Schools Survey – Summary of Results (2006) Performance Data Team 436 Safe in Schools Survey – Summary of Results (2006) Performance Data Team 437 89% of females were aware of the Help Line as compared to 77% of males. 438 90% of females were aware of the “Bully proof” as compared to 85% of males. 439 32% of males were aware of the website as compared to 30% of females. 440 Hunt, R. and Jensen, J. (2007) The experiences of young gay people in Britain’s schools – The School Report, Stonewall. Available at: http://www.stonewall.org.uk/documents/school_report.pdf 441 Douglas Scott, S., Pringle, A. and Lumsdaine, C. (2004) Sexual Exclusion -Homophobia and health inequalities: a review, UK’s Gay Men’s Health Network. Available at: http://spectrum- lgbt.org/downloads/health/gmhn_report.pdf 442 Hunt, R. and Jensen, J. (2007) The experiences of young gay people in Britain’s schools – The School Report, Stonewall. Available at: http://www.stonewall.org.uk/documents/school_report.pdf

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 109 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

harassment. Furthermore, 50% who had been bullied at school had contemplated self- harm or suicide with 40% having made at least one attempt to self harm.443 C.5.12 In addition to high levels of bullying among LGBT children, children from LGBT families have also experienced homophobic bullying. The ‘Count Me In Too’ study found that across Brighton and Hove 28% of parents said their child had been bullied or taunted because of the parent’s sexual or gender identities.444 C.5.13 Homophobic bullying at school can also be seen to reflect in the high levels of youth homelessness in Brighton and Hove with homophobic bullying and assaults at school and in the neighbourhood identified as a major contributing factor in young LGBT people leaving home.445 Some young people were evicted from the family home, or chose to leave, because their parents were intolerant of the young person’s sexual identity; others chose to leave because they presumed their parents would have a negative reaction if they did know about the young person’s sexual identity. 446 C.5.14 The ‘Count Me in Too’ study found high instances of homelessness among the LGBT community in Brighton and Hove with over one five people surveyed (21%) reported as having been homeless at one time or another447. C.5.15 Sexual identity and transgender identity were also implicated in young people’s subsequent episodes of homelessness. Homophobia from other tenants or residents in rented accommodation and in supported housing contributed to further episodes of homelessness.448

Youth Homelessness C.5.16 The high proportion of homelessness among the LGBT community has contributed to a high level of youth homelessness across Brighton and Hove. C.5.17 The Brighton and Hove homeless strategy document highlighted the fact that young people in Brighton and Hove are disproportionately likely to become homeless compared to people of other ages, with youth homelessness above national and

443 Select Committee on Education and Skills (2006) Memorandum submitted by Stonewall. Available at: http://www.parliament.the-stationery- office.com/pa/cm200607/cmselect/cmeduski/85/85we21.htm 444 Browne, K. (2007) Count me in too: LGBT Lives in Brighton and Hove Initial Findings: Academic Report. Available at: www.spectrum- lgbt.org/cmiToo/downloads/CMIT_AcademicReport_final_June07.pdf 445 Brighton and Hove Youth Homelessness Strategy 2007- 10. Available at: www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/housing/Youth_Homelessness_Strategy.pdf 446 Brighton and Hove Youth Homelessness Strategy 2007- 10. Available at: www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/housing/Youth_Homelessness_Strategy.pdf 447 Browne, K. (2007) Count me in too - LGBT Lives in Brighton and Hove - Initial Findings: Academic Report, p.3. Available at: www.spectrum- lgbt.org/cmiToo/downloads/CMIT_AcademicReport_final_June07.pdf 448 Cull, M., Platzer, H. and Balloch, S. (2006) On My Own: Understanding the Experiences and Needs of Homeless Lesbian, Gay, Bisexual and Transgender Youth, University of Brighton - Health and Social Policy Research Centre. Available at: http://www.brighton.ac.uk/sass/research/reports/LGBT_summary.pdf

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 110 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

regional averages. In 2005/06 just under half of homeless acceptances were from people aged 16-24 with 13% from 16-17 year olds449 C.5.18 The impact of homelessness on young people’s health and life chances is considerable. Homelessness among young people can lead the development of, or increase in, mental health problems. This can lead to a self-reinforcing vicious circle as mental health problems are also a risk factor for homelessness.450. C.5.19 Another vicious circle for young homeless groups is drug taking. Research from the ‘Youth Homelessness and Substance Use: Report to the Drugs and Alcohol Research Unit’ (2003) found that 43% of homeless people had taken heroin and 38% crack cocaine451. This was often a cause of homelessness with parents throwing children out for drug offences as well making securing accommodation more challenging. C.5.20 Homeless groups were also vulnerable to other risk taking behaviour such as self-harm, sexual-risk behaviour, suicide and criminal activity as well as being more likely to be a victim of a crime452. C.5.21 This group are also more likely to experience exclusion from education and employment (see NEET figures below).

Pupil Absences

Brighton and Hove has higher levels of pupil absence than England and the region as a whole C.5.22 Unauthorised pupil absence across Brighton and Hove is comparatively high in the context of the region with 1.9% of all half-days lost across the city due to pupil absence in 2005/06. This is higher than the regional and national (both 1.4 days) averages453.

Pupils eligible for Free School Meals (FSM) are more than three times as likely to be absent than the population as non-FSM pupils C.5.23 Certain groups are more likely to be absent from school than others. Among FSM pupils across the city, more than 4.4% of half days are lost through unauthorised absence. This is more than three times the level for non-FSM pupils (1.4%)454.

Bangladeshi and Black Caribbean pupils had higher levels of absence than other groups across Brighton and Hove C.5.24 Black Caribbean and Bangladeshi ethnic minority groups have higher unauthorised absence rates than the population as a whole with Black Caribbean pupils Bangladeshi’s

449 Brighton and Hove Youth Homelessness Strategy 2007- 10. Available at: www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/housing/Youth_Homelessness_Strategy.pdf 450 The Mental Health foundation (2002) The Mental Health Needs of Homeless Children and Young People (up date), Vol. 3, Issue 22. Available at: http://www.mentalhealth.org.uk/publications/?EntryId=38765 451 Home Office (2003) Youth homelessness and substance use: report to the drugs and alcohol research unit, Home Office Research, Development and Statistics Directorate. Available at: http://www.homeoffice.gov.uk/rds/pdfs2/hors258.pdf 452 The Mental Health foundation (2002) The Mental Health Needs of Homeless Children and Young People (up date), Vol. 3, Issue 22. Available at: http://www.mentalhealth.org.uk/publications/?EntryId=38765 453 DfES 2005/06, Pupil Absence. Cited on DfES website: http://www.dfes.gov.uk/rsgateway/DB/SFR/s000718/index.shtml 454 ibid

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 111 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

experiencing absence rates of 2.5% and 2.4% respectively compared with 1.8% of half days lost across the city as a whole455. C.5.25 However, these pupils constitute a very small proportion of the school population 88 pupils in total456.

Unauthorised absence rates are higher among girls than boys across Brighton and Hove C.5.26 Girls miss a higher proportion of half-days (2%) than boys (1.8%) across Brighton and Hove. This contrasts with the national picture which is the same for both girls and boys457.

C.6 Making a positive contribution

Young Offenders C.6.1 Just under a third of all crimes committed across Brighton and Hove were committed by people aged under 20. C.6.2 The percentage of all children aged 10 -17 living in the local police force area who had been given a final warning / reprimand / caution or convicted during the previous calendar year has been increasing since 2003/04 to 3% in 2005/06458. However, Brighton and Hove is among the 25% of areas in the country with lowest proportion of children given a final warning / reprimand / caution or convicted during the previous calendar year. C.6.3 This is higher among certain young people, for example children in care are more than twice as likely to have been convicted or cautioned for an offence with 8% having been a final warning / reprimand / caution or convicted during the previous calendar year. C.6.4 Data from the Young Offending Team (YOT) suggest that 26% of all young offenders are from the EB4U area. The YOT also note that 76% of young offenders are on the special needs register at school, and 76% have serious literacy difficulties459. One in five of those sentenced by the youth court have a statement of special educational needs compared with only 2–3 per cent of all secondary school pupils. (Fletcher et al.; Lloyd, 1999; Stafford et al., 1999)460 C.6.5 Young offenders are particularly likely to face barriers to employment education and training with12% of all NEETs across the city registered with the Youth Offending Team461. Furthermore, it is particularly common for young offenders aged 16 to 20 years to run away from home and to become homeless.462

455 ibid 456 ibid 457 ibid 458 CSCI, Social Services Performance Assessment Framework 459 Wilson, C. & Johnson, J. EQUAL Brighton and Hove Research Report, p. 23. [unpublished]. 460 Fletcher, D.R., Woodhill, D. and Herrington, A. (1998) Building Bridges into Employment and Training for Ex-offenders. York Publishing Services for the Joseph Rowntree Foundation; Lloyd, T. (1999) Young Men, the Job Market and Gendered Work. York Publishing Services for the Joseph Rowntree Foundation; Stafford, B., Heaver, C., Ashworth, K., Bates, C., Walker, R., McKay, S. and Trickey, H. (1999) Work and Young Men. York Publishing Services for the Joseph Rowntree Foundation. 461 Local Connexions data. December 2006 462 The Mental Health foundation (2002) The Mental Health Needs of Homeless Children and Young People (up date), Vol. 3, Issue 22. Available at: http://www.mentalhealth.org.uk/publications/?EntryId=38765 [accessed: 29 August 2007].

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 112 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Excluded pupils

Brighton and Hove has a higher proportion of pupils who have been excluded from school than England as a whole C.6.6 Brighton and Hove has one of the highest exclusions rates in the country. There were 2,000 fixed period exclusions at secondary school across Brighton and Hove in 2005/06. This makes up 16.5% of the secondary school population. This is significantly higher than the fixed period exclusion rate across the South East 11.7% and England as a whole 10.4%. C.6.7 Brighton and Hove also has a slightly higher percentage of permanent exclusions than the regional average with 0.15% of pupils permanently excluded compared with 0.13% across the region and England as a whole. However, this still represents a small overall number of pupils, as only 50 pupils permanently excluded across the city as a whole. C.6.8 Permanently excluded pupils are more likely to become young offenders. Research for the Joseph Rowntree Foundation found out that three-quarters of excluded pupils offend, compared with only a third of those who are not excluded463.

C.7 Those Not entering Education, Employment or Training (NEET) C.7.1 Research identifies significant issues facing NEET young adults, for example they are 20 times more likely to commit a crime and 22 times more likely to be a teenage parent. NEETs are estimated to cost the taxpayer an extra £100,000 over the course of their lifetime. C.7.2 As a result, one experienced commentator on this issue has argued that ‘the potential paybacks for really making a difference to this group exceed the payback you can get from almost any other area of public spending’.464

650 young people are NEET across Brighton and Hove C.7.3 Data from December 2006 shows 657 16-18 year olds NEETs across Brighton and Hove465. Between November to January 2004-5 and November to January 2005-6 the average NEET numbers have increased by 17% across the city.

More than two-thirds of these are seeking employment or training 3.15.12 Of the 657 NEET young adults across Brighton and Hove, nearly two-thirds (420) are in transition between school and further education or employment. Although this might suggest that NEET issues across the city are overstated by the statistics, it is important to understand how people move in and out of “NEET status”. For example, it is not

463 Fletcher, D.R., Woodhill, D. and Herrington, A. (1998) Building Bridges into Employment and Training for Ex-offenders. York Publishing Services for the Joseph Rowntree Foundation; Lloyd, T. (1999) Young Men, the Job Market and Gendered Work. York Publishing Services for the Joseph Rowntree Foundation; Stafford, B., Heaver, C., Ashworth, K., Bates, C., Walker, R., McKay, S. and Trickey, H. (1999) Work and Young Men. York Publishing Services for the Joseph Rowntree Foundation. 464 Cox, S. (2005) A ‘NEET’ solution, BBC News. Available at: news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/magazine/4158696.stm Geoff Mulgan became director of the Young Foundation in September 2004. Between 1997 and 2004 he had various roles in government including director of the Government’s Strategy Unit and head of policy in the Prime Minister’s office. He is credited with the discovery of NEETS as a distinct group 465 OCSI (2007) analysis of CYPT Connexions (December 2006) NEET datasets

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 113 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

clear what happens to the “in transition” group, and whether they do in fact take-up employment or education opportunities.

There are barriers to employment and training among less skilled young adults in Brighton and Hove C.7.4 The labour market across Brighton and Hove provides significant issues to employment for those young people at risk of becoming NEET. They compete in a labour market that is geared toward service sector and creative industries. These industries typically require communication skills and flexible working arrangements, perhaps more suited to the city’s large student and professional populations than with school leavers. School leavers are at greater risk of becoming persistent NEET466. C.7.5 Vocational training opportunities for young NEET adults are also poorer when compared with elsewhere in England. The level of modern apprenticeships offered across Brighton and Hove has decreased across the city467 and represents a small proportion of post-16 learning in the area. Less than one in six 16-18 year olds who are in learning are following a modern apprenticeship468. However, only a small proportion of NEET adults across the city suggested inadequate training opportunity was a reason for being NEET. C.7.6 In addition to inadequate training, educational providers in the city are more heavily focused on high skilled courses with less emphasis on low skilled courses. Provision for 16-18 year olds in Brighton and Hove focuses mainly on Level 3 courses with less than 9% of enrolments on level 1 courses469.

And NEET groups are likely to need additional support and be involved with specialist agencies C.7.7 Across Brighton and Hove, there are additional structural barriers to employment among young adults. C.7.8 One of the prominent factors in being NEET includes a lack of access to housing, with 3.7% of Brighton and Hove’s NEET population inadequately housed, while 7.6% were recorded as homeless. C.7.9 Another key barrier is illness, with 9.4% citing health reasons as reasons for being NEET. C.7.10 In addition, certain NEET groups across Brighton and Hove are likely to need support from specialist agencies. Among Brighton and Hove’s NEET population at December 2006: • 10% were recorded as teenage parents and a further 5% were pregnant • 7% were recorded as having specific learning difficulties and a further 13% were recorded as having emotional behaviour problems

466 Brighton and Hove Socio-Economic Baseline Report (2003), Labour Market and the Economy (chapter four), pp.26-7. Available at: http://www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/regeneration/Ch_4_Labour_Market_and_the_Economy.pdf 467 Learning and Skills Council: Sussex (2005). Strategic Area Review Report for Brighton and Hove, p.14. Browne, K. (2007) Count me in too - LGBT Lives in Brighton and Hove - Initial Findings: Academic Report. Available at: www.spectrum- lgbt.org/cmiToo/downloads/CMIT_AcademicReport_final_June07.pdf 468 Brighton and Hove Socio-Economic Baseline Report (2003) Learning and Skills (chapter six), Brighton & Hove and Adur Area Investment Framework p.17. Available at: www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/regeneration/Ch_6_Learning_and_Skills.pdf 469 Wilson, C. & Johnson, J. EQUAL Brighton and Hove Research Report,p.27 [unpublished].

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 114 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

• 4.7% were in care or care leavers • 12% were registered with the Youth Offending Team. • 1.4 % had substance misuse problems.

Young adults make up a significant proportion of benefit claimants across Brighton and Hove. C.7.11 One of the major consequences of NEET is reflected in poor subsequent labour market experience. C.7.12 Investigation of benefit claimants rates by age across Brighton and Hove show that the population aged 16-24 across the city make up: • 12% of all working age DWP benefit claimants across the city • Over one quarter (26%) of Jobseekers Allowance (JSA) claimants • Over 10% of Income Support claimants • 6% of Incapacity Benefit claimants. C.7.13 These are smaller proportions than across England as a whole but still represent substantial proportions of the city’s workless and low-income populations. C.7.14 One initiative for reducing the NEET population across the city is the New Deal programme. However, many young people who are NEET are not aware of the various New Deal opportunities. C.7.15 Between 2001 and 2005, around 500 people started on New Deal for Young People each year (2,500 over the period as a whole)470. Over this same period, just over 1,600 jobs were gained under the NDYP scheme across Brighton and Hove suggesting a strong success rate in reducing NEET levels across the city. C.7.16 In addition to providing employment for those currently in work, a strategy for reducing NEET should aim to focus on groups that are more vulnerable to becoming NEET. C.7.17 Evidence from the Social Exclusion Unit (1999) identifies those with special educational needs or disabilities, young offenders, care leavers, young carers, young women who become pregnant, pupils who have been truant and pupils who are excluded from school as groups most at risk of becoming of becoming NEET471. In addition, groups in unstable housing situations particularly those homeless or in temporary accommodation are particularly likely to be disengaged from the labour market472.

470 DWP (2001-2005) accessed from NeSS 471 Social Exclusion Unit (1999) Bridging the gap: New opportunities for 16-18 year olds not in education, employment or training, Cm 405, London: The Stationery Office. Available at: http://www.asylumsupport.info/publications/socialexclusionunit/thegap.pdf 472 Allen, M. (2003) Into the mainstream: Care leavers entering work, education and training, JRF. Available at: http://www.jrf.org.uk/KNOWLEDGE/findings/socialpolicy/053.asp

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 115 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

C.8 Children experiencing multiple disadvantage

Children with multiple needs are heavily concentrated in the most deprived areas Most Deprived 20% of areas in Brighton Brighton and Hove Number Share % Rate % Number Rate % All children 6,296 21.0% - 29,952 - Free School Meal Eligibility 2,049 42.3% 32.5% 4,840 16.2% (FSM) Special Educational Needs 2,305 33.5% 36.6% 6,888 23.0% (SEN) FSM and SEN 991 48.5% 15.7% 2,042 6.8% C.8.1 Analysis of children attending Brighton and Hove LEA schools473 identifies that just under one-quarter of all children have Special Educational Needs, with 16% of all children eligible for Free School Meals (a measure of low income). Children in the most deprived areas are significantly more likely to be eligible for Free School Meals or have Special Educational Needs. C.8.2 Children with multiple issues are heavily concentrated in the most deprived areas – nearly one-half of all children across the city experiencing both low income and Special Educational Needs live in the most deprived 20% of areas. This group with multiple needs is more heavily concentrated in the most deprived areas than those pupils experiencing only one of the two issues.

473 OCSI analysis of CYPT Pupil Level Annual School Census (PLASC) data.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 116 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Appendix D LAA theme: A healthy city that cares for vulnerable people and tackles deprivation and injustice

D.1 Introduction D.1.1 This Appendix provides analysis of inequality under the Brighton and Hove LAA theme A healthy city that cares for vulnerable people and tackles deprivation and injustice.

The local LAA policy context D.1.2 The LAA outcomes under the Healthier Communities and Older People theme are474: • Reduce premature mortality rates and reduce inequalities in premature mortality rates between wards/neighbourhoods with a particular focus on reducing the risk factors for heart disease, stroke and related diseases (CVD) (smoking, diet and physical activity) • Improve information and choice for older people enabling them to access the services they need speedily • Improve the health and well-being of older people • Implement a falls prevention strategy to reduce emergency hospital admissions • Better supporting carers and maximising their own quality of life • Improve housing and create sustainable communities • Improve older people’s access to good quality homes.

About this Appendix D.1.3 This Appendix examines the following: • How healthy is Brighton and Hove? • Mental health issues across the city • Disability across Brighton and Hove • Older people experiencing deprivation • People providing care • Housing. D.1.4 Under each section, we look at overall levels of inequality across the city, identifying those groups and areas faring badly on a range of outcome measures.

D.2 How healthy is Brighton and Hove? D.2.1 Health is a fundamental determinant of quality of life, having a direct impact on an individual’s ability to live a fulfilling and enjoyable life and also indirectly impacting their ability to sustain standards of living through income. Ill health may also have a severe effect on other people, either directly through changing relationships (for example forcing people into informal unpaid care), or through indirect effects such as change in household income. D.2.2 Brighton and Hove recognise that The health and welfare of the residents… are central to achieving a socially inclusive and economically prosperous area. The Brighton and Hove Community

474 Brighton & Hove (2007). Refresh of the Local Area Agreement for Brighton & Hove 2007 - 2008. Available from www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/performance_team/Brighton___Hove_LAA_07-08.pdf

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 117 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Strategy recognises that the ‘health divide’ between rich and poor households continues to widen and that the ability to tackle health issues in the area is dependant upon the ability to tackle other interconnected issues such as employment, crime, housing, transport, safety, education and poverty.475 D.2.3 In this section we look at: • Health levels across the city • What areas are doing poorly on health measures? • Which groups experience poor health? • People with multiple needs - how is poor health linked to other outcomes? • Health behaviours.

Health levels across the city

Women across Brighton and Hove live slightly longer on average than women across England as a whole D.2.4 The average life expectancy of females in Brighton and Hove is 81.3. This is below the regional average (82) but above the average across England (81.1)476. D.2.5 Brighton and Hove, the South East and England have all seen increases in female life expectancy between 1996-1998 and 2003-2005 of around 1.5%477.

However, male life expectancy in Brighton and Hove is among the lowest in the country D.2.6 The average life expectancy of a man in Brighton and Hove is 76.1 years. This is below the national average 76.9 and well below the regional average 78.1478. D.2.7 Male life expectancy across the city has been rising at a slightly higher rate than across the region and England as a whole, with the average life expectancy across Brighton and Hove increasing by 2.9% between 1996-1998 and 2003-2005. This compares with rises of 2.7% across both the South East and England as a whole479. D.2.8 Low life expectancy among males is likely to be linked to mortality from key diseases. Men are more vulnerable to cardiovascular disease than women, and at a younger age, and are also diagnosed with the majority of cancers480. It is important to look at mortality rates for these diseases in order to understand low life expectancy across Brighton and Hove. There also may be links with the high suicide rates identified below.

Cancer Mortality in Brighton and Hove is above national levels and falling at a slower rate D.2.9 Brighton and Hove has a higher cancer mortality rate than the South East or England as a whole with 123 cancer deaths per 100,000 population between 2003-2005 compared with 111 across the South East and119 across England481.

475 Brighton and Hove Socio-Economic Baseline Report (2003)Health and Social Care (chapter eleven), Brighton & Hove and Adur Area Investment Framework. http://www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/regeneration/Ch11_Health_and_Social_Care.pdf 476 Office of National Statistics (2003-2005), taken from NRU Floor Targets Interactive. Available at: www.fti.neighbourhood.gov.uk/ 477 ibid 478 ibid 479 ibid 480 Doyal, L. (2001) Sex, gender, and health: the need for a new approach, BMJ 323:1061-1063. 481 Office for National Statistics (ONS)/Department of Health (DH) (2003-2005)

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 118 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

D.2.10 In common with the region and England as a whole, cancer mortality has been falling across Brighton and Hove. However, deaths across the city have not fallen at the same rate as across the South East or England, with the cancer mortality rate across Brighton and Hove falling by 3% between 1996-98 and 2003-2005. This compares with falls of 15% across the South East and 16% across England as a whole482.

However, coronary heart disease mortality rates are below national levels D.2.11 Brighton and Hove has a lower coronary heart disease mortality rate (88 per 100,000) than England (91 per 100,000) although higher than the South East region (76) 483. D.2.12 Coronary Heart disease is declining across Brighton and Hove. In common with the region and England as a whole, the city has seen a decline in the proportion of people with coronary heart disease of around 30% between 1996-98 and 2003-2005484. D.2.13 Therefore, in terms of mortality rates from key diseases, Brighton and Hove is getting healthier with mortality rates declining, however the city still has higher mortality rates than across the region as a whole. D.2.14 Further reductions in mortality rates from circulatory disease and coronary heart disease can be achieved by decreasing smoking rates; improving diet and nutrition; increasing physical activity; reducing the prevalence of obesity; reducing alcohol and drug misuse485.

What areas are doing poorly on health measures? D.2.15 The 2007 Health Inequalities Technical Supplement486 identifies that life expectancy has increased for both males and females across the city. However, there remain wide variations within the city; analysis of trends suggests that the gap between the Neighbourhood Renewal Areas and the rest of the city is widening.

482 Office for National Statistics (ONS)/Department of Health (DH) (2003-2005) 483 Office for National Statistics (ONS)/Department of Health (DH) 2003-2005 484 ibid 485 Brighton and Hove Socio-Economic Baseline Report (2003)Health and Social Care (chapter eleven), Brighton & Hove and Adur Area Investment Framework. http://www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/regeneration/Ch11_Health_and_Social_Care.pdf. 486 NRA data cited in: Brighton and Hove PCT (2007). Strategy to Reduce Health Inequalities in Brighton and Hove: Technical Supplement 2007. Available from: http://www.brightonandhovepct.nhs.uk/healthylives/inequalities/index.asp

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 119 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Table: Life expectancy for males and Females (2003-5) Area Life Expectancy in years Males Females Bevendean NRF 69.4 76.7 Bristol Estate NRF 69.8 80.2 Brunswick and Regency 75.2 81.8 NRF eb4u 73.9 76.3 Hangleton and Knoll NRF 75.0 80.5 Hollingdean NRF 75.6 79.1 Portland Road and 76.4 78.6 Clarendon NRF Portslade NRF 76.5 81.0 Queen's Park and Craven 74.4 78.5 Vale NRF Tarner NRF 67.1 77.0

All Brighton and Hove 76.1 81.3 South East 78.1 82.0 England 76.9 81.1 Source: Brighton and Hove PCT (2007) 487

Healthy life expectancy D.2.16 Analysis of healthy life expectancy488 data from ONS identifies a high variation in healthy life expectancy among wards. The more deprived areas of Queen’s Park, East Brighton, Moulsecoomb and Bevendean have the lowest healthy life expectancy at birth, which is, respectively of 64.7, 65.7 and 67.3 years. D.2.17 The areas with the highest healthy life expectancy are Rottingdean Coastal (74.3), Withdean (74.9) and Stanford (75.2). D.2.18 Brighton and Hove has a lower healthy life expectancy than England and the South East. In the city healthy life expectancy is 70.3 years as compared with 73.3 in the region and 70.6 years in England.

Which groups experience poor health?

In general, BME groups are less likely to experience poor health than White British groups D.2.19 Other minority groups are less likely to experience poor health compared with white British groups across Brighton and Hove. Just under 19% of white British people across Brighton and Hove have a limiting long-term illness compared with 17% for the Pakistani population (the group with the next highest proportion)489.

487 NRA data cited in: Brighton and Hove PCT (2007). Strategy to Reduce Health Inequalities in Brighton and Hove: Technical Supplement 2007. Available from: http://www.brightonandhovepct.nhs.uk/healthylives/inequalities/index.asp 488 Healthy life expectancy is the length of time people can expect to live without disability. 489 Census (2001)

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 120 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

D.2.20 Moreover, only 3.6% of all finished consultant episodes (hospital admissions) were from ethnic minority communities in 2006490. This is partly linked to the younger age profile of ethnic minority groups across the city, with the student community comprising a large proportion of the BME population. D.2.21 However, sickness and disability rates among the working age population are higher for Bangladeshi ethnic minority groups than the city average, with 6% of the working age Bangladeshi population permanently sick or disabled across Brighton and Hove compared with 5% of the population as a whole (census 2001). Limiting Long-term Illness and sickness and disability for different groups across Brighton and Hove Vulnerable groups across Percentage with limiting Percentage who are Brighton and Hove long-term illness permanently sick or disabled - All people across Brighton 17.5% 5.1% and Hove

- Male 16.9% 5.8% - Female 18.1% 4.4%

- White British 18.8% 5.4% - White Other 11.4% 3.0% - Indian 12.3% 3.0% - Chinese 7.6% 1.2% - Bangladeshi 12.1% 6.0% - Pakistani 17.0% 4.7% - Black African and Mixed 12.6% 5.4% - Black Caribbean and Mixed 13.1% 5.6%

- 0-15 5.0% - - 16-17 5.3% 0.3% - 18-24 5.5% 0.9% - 25-44 10.2% 3.8% - 45-59 21.9% 10.3% - 60+ 46.5% - Source: OCSI 2006 (2001 Census)

Homeless communities have poor health outcomes and access to health care D.2.22 Local research has highlighted a range that a significant proportion of the homeless population are in poor health. In 2000 17% of all contacts described themselves as being unwell - over and above the 70% who described themselves as having mental health or substance misuse problems (Rough Sleepers Annual Report 1999-2000). D.2.23 Poor mental and physical health among the homeless community is additionally compounded by poor access to primary care491.

490 Hospital Episode Statistics (HES) by Ethnicity. Available at: http://www.neighbourhood.statistics.gov.uk/dissemination/datasetList.do?JSAllowed=true&Functi on=&%24ph=60&CurrentPageId=60&step=1&CurrentTreeIndex=- 1&searchString=&datasetFamilyId=1713&Next.x=12&Next.y=17&bhcp=1 491 Brighton and Hove City Council (2001) Brighton and Hove Homeless strategy for single homeless people, Brighton and Hove City Council. Available at: www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/housing/shstrategy.pdf [accessed 29 August 2007].

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 121 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Asylum Seekers also face barriers to accessing health care D.2.24 Asylum Seekers are at greater risk of poor mental and physical health. This is likely to be related to heightened stress as a result of experience, and in some cases serious injuries resulting from experience of torture. Furthermore, they face additional health risks and outcomes associated with being a low income or in some cases a destitute group. Research focusing upon destitute asylum seekers suggests that nearly two-thirds (65%) attributed poor health outcomes as a result of inability to support themselves through work492. D.2.25 As suggested above, health risks are compounded by difficulties faced by these groups in accessing primary health care. There is some evidence to suggest that language barriers and lack of knowledge of rights play some role in making access to health care more difficult. Additional barriers centre on the fear of being sent back, of being challenged by their GP to show proof of eligibility to health care493.

Gypsy and Traveller groups D.2.26 Another minority group facing poor health outcomes is the Gypsy and Traveller community. D.2.27 Despite lack of reliable data, there is some evidence to suggest that infant mortality is particularly high among the Gypsy and Traveller community while on average Gypsy and Traveller women live 12 years less than women in the general population and Gypsy and Traveller men ten years less than men in the general population494.

People with multiple needs - how is poor health linked to other outcomes? D.2.28 Nearly 45,000 people were identified with limiting long-term illness across Brighton and Hove in the Census 2001, 18% of the population as a whole495. This is above the South East (15%) and England (17%) averages, despite the fact that Brighton and Hove has a younger age profile than the region and country as a whole496. As expected, there is a strong relationship between limiting long-term illness and age – of the total across the city, less than half (21,000) are of working age. D.2.29 The Table below shows the link between poor health and other outcomes

492 Care Services Improvement Partnership (2006) Mental Health, Destitution and Asylum- Seekers - A study of destitute asylum-seekers in the dispersal areas of the South East of England, Care Services Improvement Partnership. Available at: http://www.asylumscotland.org.uk/assets/downloads/research/Mental%20Health,%20Destitution %20and%20AS%20FINAL%20REPORT.pdf 493 ibid 494 Brighton and Hove City Council (2006) Brighton and Hove City Council Race Equality Scheme 2006 – 2009. Available at: www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/performance_team/RES_2006-2009_Final_P_R_19_April.pdf [accessed: 27 August 2007]. 495 Census (2001) 496 ibid

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 122 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

How is poor health linked to other outcomes?

People with limiting long- All people in term illness in Brighton and Brighton and Hove Hove Number of people 45,000 247,817 Percent who are economically active 33% 68% Economically active who are unemployed 6.8 3.6% Economically active who are self- 11% 10% employed Percent who are permanently sick or 62% 5% disabled Percent living in housing lacking central 12% 8% heating Percent living in overcrowded households 12% 12% Percent living in social housing 23% 15% Percent living in households with no 46% 27% access to car or van

Source: OCSI 2006 (2001 Census)

People with limiting long-term illness are significantly more likely to be workless than the population as a whole across Brighton and Hove D.2.30 Only one in three people with a limiting long-term illness is economically active across the city. This is less than half the economic activity rate of the population as a whole (68%)497. D.2.31 The levels of people with a limiting long-term illness that are economically active but unemployed (6.8%) are almost double the unemployment rate for the city as a whole (3.6%)498.

People with a limiting long-term illness are more likely to live in poor quality housing D.2.32 People with a limiting long-term illness in Brighton and Hove are more likely to live in housing that is lacking amenities than the population as a whole. Across the city, 12% of the population who have a limiting long-term illness live in housing that is lacking central heating499. Housing with inadequate heating is likely to be even more detrimental to the health of those with a limiting long-term illness.

People with a limiting long-term illness have poorer access to their own transport D.2.33 Access to health care and other services is also likely to be impeded for those with a limiting long-term illness. People with a limiting long-term illness are almost twice as likely to have no access to their own transport compared to the population as a whole, with 46% of those with a limiting long-term illness living in households with no car or van. This contrasts to 27% of the population as a whole500.

497 Census (2001) 498 ibid 499 ibid 500 ibid

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 123 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

D.2.34 There are links here with the Social Exclusion Unit findings on how the lack of transport is a barrier to finding work, taking up learning and accessing healthcare501.

Health behaviours

Smoking levels are highest in Neighbourhood Renewal Areas, and the gap is not closing D.2.35 The 2007 Health Inequalities Technical Supplement502 identifies that the highest rates of smoking are amongst people living in the more deprived areas of the city, but the rate of successful quitters is highest amongst people living in the more affluent parts of the city. The inequality gap as measured by the proportion of smoking quitters from the eb4U area compared to the service as a whole has increased.

Brighton and Hove has among the highest levels of drug use in the country D.2.36 Brighton and Hove has one of highest rates of drug misuse in the country. Research for the Director of Public Health annual report identifies that the city has the highest rate of problem drug users (opiates and/or crack cocaine) in the South East503. In 2003 Brighton and Hove was identified as one of the 37 national ‘crack priority areas’. These areas were designated by the Home Office as areas where use of drugs and associated criminal activity, are considered to be a major cause for concern504. 3.15.13 Based on 2001 data, Brighton and Hove has the second highest rate of drug-related deaths in the country. Approximately 80% of drug-related deaths are in men and the average age is 40 years. Benzodiazepines are implicated in around 40 % of the deaths, heroin in 50% of deaths and alcohol in 60% of the deaths505. D.2.37 Of particular concern is the high numbers of heroin users in the city. Research by Imperial College during 2001/02 suggests that there are approximately 2,300 injecting misusers in the city, a higher rate than Liverpool and parts of Inner London. Consequently the city has higher rates of disease as a result of needle sharing than elsewhere, with around 1% of injecting drug users dying from an overdose every year 506. D.2.38 Additionally, an estimated 45,000 adults of working age in Brighton and Hove are hazardous drinkers. Between 2001 and 2003 Brighton and Hove was ranked the second

501 Social Exclusion Unit (2003) Making the Connections: Final Report on Transport and Social Exclusion. Available from: http://archive.cabinetoffice.gov.uk/seu/publications7790.html?did=229 502 NRA data cited in: Brighton and Hove PCT (2007). Strategy to Reduce Health Inequalities in Brighton and Hove: Technical Supplement 2007. Available from: http://www.brightonandhovepct.nhs.uk/healthylives/inequalities/index.asp 503 Figures quoted from Brighton and Hove Director of Public Health (forthcoming) Annual Report. 504 Brighton and Hove City Council (2003) Notice of Motion: Tackling Drug/Alcohol Abuse and Associated Crime and Disorder in Brighton and Hove: Improved Ways of Working. Available at: http://216.239.59.104/search?q=cache:ZR5oUC25DHMJ:peace.brighton- hove.gov.uk/Intranet/CommitteeMgt.NSF/0/F822BA90DE56453980256DA4005713DF/%24File/I tem%2B11(e)%2BNM-Drug%2Babuse- partnerships.doc+%2237+national+crack+priority+areas%22andhl=enandct=clnkandcd=1andgl= uk [accessed: 27 August 2007]. 505 Figures quoted from Brighton and Hove Director of Public Health (forthcoming) Annual Report. 506 Home Office (2004) Estimating prevalence of problem drug use: multiple methods in Brighton, Liverpool and London, Home Office. Available at: http://www.homeoffice.gov.uk/rds/pdfs04/rdsolr3604.pdf

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 124 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

highest local authority (LA) in England and Wales for alcohol-related deaths in men. Alcohol-related death rates have almost doubled in men over the last 15 years507

The homeless community have particularly high levels of drug use D.2.39 One community particularly at risk of heavy drug use in the city is the large homeless community, particularly rough sleepers. D.2.40 Nationally, drug taking among the homeless community is high with 43% having taken heroin and 38% crack cocaine and just over a quarter having injected drugs508.

People in deprived areas show poorer diet D.2.41 Analysis of the lifestyle survey 2003 identifies that the lowest levels of people eating the recommended five portions of fruit and vegetables per day were found in Queen’s Park and Moulsecoomb & Bevendean509.

D.3 Mental health issues across the city

Mental health levels across the city

Over half of those out of work due to long-term sickness across Brighton and Hove have mental health problems D.3.1 As explored in the employment section, mental illness is the primary cause of worklessness through sickness in Brighton and Hove. 6,700 people in Brighton and Hove were claiming Incapacity Benefit in November 2006 as a result of mental health disorders510. This is the highest number of mental health claimants any authority in the South East, and the 19th highest number in the country. D.3.2 Analysis of the Labour Force Survey in London identified that people with mental illness have lower rates of employment compared with people with other disabilities: 18% are in employment compared with 44% of other disabled groups (and 76% for non-disabled people)511.

Brighton and Hove contains the area with the highest level of mental health needs in England D.3.3 SOA E01016947 in Queens Park has the highest concentration of people with mental health issues in England and was ranked as the most deprived SOA in England on the ID 2004 Mental Health Indicator512. This indicator is a measure of adults under 60 suffering from mood or anxiety disorders, based on prescribing, suicides, and health benefits data. D.3.4 In total, nearly 40% of Brighton and Hove’s SOAs were ranked among the most deprived 10% in England on the ID 2004 Mental Health Indicator513.

507 Figures quoted from Brighton and Hove Director of Public Health (forthcoming) Annual Report. 508 Home Office Women Drug Users and Drugs Service Provision: service level responses to engagement and retention, Home Office. Available at: http://drugs.homeoffice.gov.uk/publication-search/diversity/women-drugs-users.pdf?view=Binary 509 Mapped data quoted from Director of Public Health (2005). Health in a healthy city. 510 DWP (2006) Incapacity Benefit, November 511 DMAG Briefing 2007-05 (2007). Disabled people and the labour market in London: key facts, Analysis of the 2005 Annual Population Survey 512 ODPM (2004) ID, Mental Health Indicator 1997-2002 513 ibid

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 125 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

D.3.5 More recent data identifies that the picture in Brighton has slightly improved, although the city still contains a significant number of areas with high numbers of adults with mental health problems. Based on data from 1999-2003, the updated mental health indicator showed that 36% of the SOAs in the city were among the most deprived 10% of areas across England514.

Brighton and Hove has one of the highest suicide rates in the country D.3.6 Linked to the high prevalence of mental health issues across Brighton and Hove, the city has among the highest suicide rates in the country. This contributes to the low life expectancy among males in the city with suicide the major cause of death in men under 44 in the UK. 515 D.3.7 Between 1996 and 1998, Brighton and Hove had the fourth highest suicide rate in the country with 15.9 suicides per 100,000 population516. This was over 70% higher than the national suicide rate (9.3 per 100,000). D.3.8 In recent years the suicide rate has declined with an 11% drop in suicide rates recorded between 1996-1998 and 2003-2005, however the suicide rate across the city is still significantly above the national and regional averages (14.1 per 100,000 compared with 8.2 across the South East and 8.5 across England517. D.3.9 This is likely to be linked to the prevalence of particular groups and communities across the city, who tend to show higher levels of suicide. These groups include homeless, LGBT and drug users. D.3.10 The extent of suicide among the LGBT has been explored in the Count Me in Too study518across Brighton and Hove. In the study, just under a quarter of all respondents reported serious thoughts of suicide, with 6% having attempted suicide, in the last 5 years. Three percent had attempted suicide in the last year alone519. High suicide rates among the LGBT community are likely to be associated with risk factors such as bullying and familial rejection. D.3.11 Suicide rates also tend to be higher in coastal areas with Eastbourne, Hastings, Blackpool and parts of Cornwall, all having among the highest suicide rates520.

What areas are doing poorly on health measures? D.3.12 The ID 2004 Mental Health Indicator and Incapacity Benefit (IB) Mental Health claimant maps provide a more detailed picture of the location of people with mental health issues across Brighton and Hove. D.3.13 One SOA in Queen's park has almost 18% of all working-age people receiving IB Mental Health. Other Super Output Areas in Queen's Park, Hollingsbury & Stanmer and Wish have more than 10% of claimants521.

514 DCLG (2004) ID, Mental Health Indicator 1999-2003 515 Doyal, L. (2001) Sex, gender, and health: the need for a new approach, BMJ 323:1061-1063. 516 Office for National Statistics (ONS)/Department of Health (DH), available from Floor Target Interactive 1996-1998. Available at: www.fti.neighbourhood.gov.uk/ 517 ibid 518 Browne, K. (2007) Count me in too: LGBT Lives in Brighton and Hove Initial Findings: Academic Report. Available at: www.spectrum- lgbt.org/cmiToo/downloads/CMIT_AcademicReport_final_June07.pdf [accessed 27 August 2007]. 519 ibid 520 Office for National Statistics (ONS)/Department of Health (DH) from FTI. Available at: www.fti.neighbourhood.gov.uk/

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 126 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

D.3.14 A similar picture emerges from the Health Domain of the IMD. The same three neighbourhoods are highlighted as with the IB Mental Health indicator together with East Brighton, St. Peter's & North Laine and Goldsmith contain the 10% most deprived SOAs.

Which groups experience poor mental health?

Brighton and Hove’s ethnic minority population are particularly at risk of experiencing mental health issues D.3.15 Across England as a whole, one in five mental health in-patients comes from a black and minority ethnic (BME) background522. However, the BME community makes up only one in ten of the population as a whole. D.3.16 As well as being more likely to experience mental health issues, the BME community across Brighton and Hove are likely to experience inequalities in receiving mental health services in terms of access, experience and outcome. For example, ethnic minorities are more likely to be detained compulsorily or diagnosed with schizophrenia523. D.3.17 The BME groups most at risk of mental health problems are refugees and asylum seekers. Experiences of fleeing persecution and in some cases torture are linked with higher levels of anxiety and stress with research on destitute asylum seekers revealing that more than half (55%) said that they were receiving medication for depression524.

Depression and Mental Health problems are also high in the LGBT community D.3.18 The LGBT group are at greater risk of depression and mental health issues than the population as a whole. Just under 14% of LGBT CMI respondents were suffering from depression at the time of the survey, whereas the national prevalence is approximately 5-10%. D.3.19 Mental health remains a priority health issue, with only 1 in 5 people reporting no mental health difficulties in the past 5 years525. By contrast, almost 1 in 5 respondents had attempted suicide.526

521 Source: OCSI, 2007 (from DWP 2006) 522 Department of Health (2007) www.dh.gov.uk/en/Policyandguidance/Healthandsocialcaretopics/Mentalhealth/BMEmentalhealth/ index.htm 523 Department of Health (2007) www.dh.gov.uk/en/Policyandguidance/Healthandsocialcaretopics/Mentalhealth/BMEmentalhealth/ index.htm 524 Care Services Improvement Partnership (2006) Mental Health, Destitution and Asylum- Seekers - A study of destitute asylum-seekers in the dispersal areas of the South East of England, Care Services Improvement Partnership. Available at: http://www.asylumscotland.org.uk/assets/downloads/research/Mental%20Health,%20Destitution %20and%20AS%20FINAL%20REPORT.pdf 525 Browne, K. (2007) Count me in too: LGBT Lives in Brighton and Hove Initial Findings: Academic Report. Available at: www.spectrum- lgbt.org/cmiToo/downloads/CMIT_AcademicReport_final_June07.pdf 526 Count Me In: Brighton and Hove Lesbian, Gay, Bisexual and Transgender Community Strategy 2001 – 2006. Available at: www.spectrum- lgbt.org/downloads/count_me_in_strategy.pdf

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 127 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Students are also at risk of mental health problems D.3.20 With two Universities home to 33,000 students527, Brighton and Hove has one of the largest student populations of any authority in England. This group are also particularly at risk of mental health problems. D.3.21 Research has shown that students have increased mental health problems compared to other young people who are not participating in higher education. This is likely to be due to an increase in stress factors relating to the stress associated with independent study in a less structured learning environment, the pressures of examinations coupled with adapting to living away from home, additional money worries and of the role of alcohol and drug misuse.528

Depression is also common among lone parent and elderly groups D.3.22 Other groups under stress include lone parents. Research into depression among lone parent groups has found that lone mothers have prevalence rates of depressive episode of around three times higher than any other group529. D.3.23 Depression is also common among elderly groups with one in four older people who are living outside of residential care exhibiting depression symptoms that are severe enough to warrant intervention530. Furthermore, this group are less likely to receive intervention as it is estimated that only a third of older people with depression ever discuss it with their GP531.

D.4 Disability across Brighton and Hove D.4.1 Disability can be defined as the loss of or limitation of opportunities to take part in the normal life of the community on an equal level with others due to physical or social barriers532. The range of people who experience such barriers will include those whose mobility is impaired, people with sensory impairment, those with learning disabilities, those with mental illness, and many elderly people.

Access to health care is an issue for the disabled community D.4.2 One significant barrier is in relation to accessing health care. Research by the Scottish Accessible Information Forum identified a set of barriers for disabled people in accessing healthcare and obtaining advice. These included; attitudinal barriers; physical barriers; social isolation; problems in understanding information as a result of sensory impairment or learning disability; and lack of motivation resulting from a feeling of helplessness.533

527 Higher Education Statistics Agency. Data available at: www.hesa.ac.uk/ 528 Royal College of Psychiatrists (2003) The mental health of students in higher education. Available at: http://www.hero.ac.uk/uk/inside_he/archives/2003/a_sane_agenda5482.cfm 529 Targosz, S. and Bebbington, P. and Lewis, G. and Brugha, T. and Jenkins, R. and Farrell, M. and Meltzer, H. (2003) Lone mothers, social exclusion and depression. Psychological Medicine, 33 (4). pp. 715-722. 530 Age Concern (2007) Improving Services and Support for Older People with Mental Health Problems, Age Concern. Available at: www.ageconcern.org.uk/AgeConcern/Documents/full_report.pdf 531 ibid 532 Borsay, A. (2004) Disability and Social Policy in Britain since 1750. Basingstoke: Palgrave 533 Scottish Accessible Information Forum (2001) Enabling Information: A report on improving access and raising standards in information services for disabled people and their carers in

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 128 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

D.4.3 Estimates of disability in all its severity levels are difficult to obtain, however DWP benefits provide us with estimates of the proportion of people needing care as a result of disability.

Brighton and Hove has a higher proportion of Disability Living Allowance claimants than the region and England as a whole D.4.4 Disability Living Allowance is provided to people who need help with personal care or getting around. Nearly 12,000 people were claiming Disability Living Allowance across Brighton and Hove in February 2007. This represents 4.5% of the city’s population, higher than the comparable rate for the region (3.2%) and England (4.3%) but slightly below other ‘small cities’ (5%)534. D.4.5 In addition, there are 5,200 Attendance Allowance claimants in Brighton and Hove of whom 2,400 receive the higher rate for 24 hour care535. Attendance Allowance is provided to people over the age of 65 who are so severely disabled, physically or mentally, that they need a great deal of help with personal care or supervision. In total, just under 20% of all people aged over 60 in Brighton and Hove receive disability related benefits536.

D.5 Older people experiencing deprivation D.5.1 Older groups are likely to face poorer outcomes as inevitable consequences of ageing. The Table below shows data from the 2001 Census for older people. Deprivation levels for older people in Brighton and Hove

People aged 60 and All people over Number 51,000 248,000

People with limiting long-term illness 47% 18% Adults with no or unknown 27% qualifications 65% Adults with level 4 or 5 qualifications 15% 29% People in housing lacking central 8% heating 12% People in overcrowded households 6.1% 12% People in social housing 16% 15% People in households with no car 42% 27%

Source: OCSI 2006 (from 2001 Census) D.5.2 This identifies that 47% have a limiting long-term illness, with the latest DWP benefit figures for Brighton and Hove suggesting that 20% are in need of care due to physical disabilities537. D.5.3 In addition to having poorer health outcomes, older groups across Brighton and Hove likely to face barriers to accessing health care. Many of these barriers relate to

Scotland. Available at: http://www.saifscotland.org.uk/publications/EnablRpt/Background/Background2.html

534 DWP (Feb 2007) DLA claimants 535 DWP AA claimants February 2007. From WPLS survey on tabulation tool 536 DWP (February 2007) 537 Disability Living Allowance and Attendance Allowance figures (November 2006)

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 129 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

restricted mobility. Across the city more than 40% of the population aged 65 and over have no access to a car or van, compared with 27% of all people. D.5.4 Other poor health outcomes relate to substandard accommodation. For example, 12% of older people across Brighton and Hove live in households lacking central heating, which is one and a half times the city average538. Further, more than 6% of elderly people across the city live in overcrowded households539. Living in substandard or unsuitable accommodation is likely to have a detrimental effect on the health and livelihood of older people.

Brighton and Hove has a higher proportion of older people claiming low income benefits than the average for England D.5.5 Although seaside resorts are traditionally stereotyped as places where affluent older people come to retire. Older groups are more likely to live in low income in Brighton and Hove than elsewhere. D.5.6 The proportion of people claiming the income guarantee element of pension credit (providing financial help for people aged 60 or over whose income is below a certain level set by the law) is almost double the regional average (9.6% compared with 5% across the region) and significantly above the national average540. D.5.7 This is likely not provide a full picture of low income among older groups: research identifies that older people on limited incomes do not access all the public benefits they are entitled to541.

Which areas have the highest levels of older people experiencing income deprivation? D.5.8 Analysis of Pension Credit data at small area level (these maps are provided on CD accompanying this report) identifies that the highest levels of Pension Credit claimants are in Queen's Park, East Brighton, Hangleton and Knoll, Moulsecoomb & Bevendean and Goldsmid . D.5.9 In these areas more than half of all adults aged 65 and over claim Pension Credit. In some areas of Queen's Part, the proportion of claimants reaches 58%.

D.6 People providing care

There are over 20,000 people providing unpaid care in Brighton and Hove D.6.1 Nearly 22,000 people provide unpaid care across Brighton and Hove542. This represents 8.8% of the city’s population, slightly lower than the proportion across the South East (9.2%) and England as a whole (9.9%)543. Of these, 30% provide care for over 20 hours per week while just under one in five provides care for over 50 hours a week544.

538 ibid 539 ibid 540 Pension Credit data (August 2006) 541 DCLG (2007) Spatial variations in the take-up of means-tested benefits, Department for Communities and Local Government.; University of York, Social Policy Research Unit. Available at: www.publications.communities.gov.uk/pubdetails.asp?pubid=2636 . This report estimated that non take-up of pension credit among those entitled between 2003-2005 was 56% (Pension Credit: case non take-up rates by characteristics: page 12) 542 Census (2001) 543 Census (2001) 544 Census (2001)

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 130 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

D.6.2 However, this is likely to be an underestimate of the total number of carers across Brighton and Hove. A study for Carers UK (2006)545 found that 65% of people with a caring responsibility did not identify themselves as a carer in the first year of caring. For a third of them (32%) it took over 5 years before they recognised they were a carer. These people are often referred to as ‘hidden carers’. D.6.3 Carers Allowance figures provide an additional picture of the number of carers in the area. Carers Allowance is made payable to those who are not in employment providing at least 35 hours of care to a severely disabled person. Across Brighton and Hove there were 1,640 people receiving Carers Allowance in February 2007546. This represents an increase from 1,360 since 2003 highlighting an increase in informal care across the city. D.6.4 It is estimated that the support provided by carers makes up a £57 billion per year across the country as a whole547.

Unpaid Carers are likely to face substantial financial barriers D.6.5 Despite this, carers face substantial financial barriers of their own; a survey of 4,500 carers in 2006-7 identified nearly two-thirds of carers (62%) worry about their financial circumstances a lot or all the time548 whilst one in three cannot afford to make ends meet and many are in debt.549

A high proportion of unpaid carers are economically inactive across Brighton and Hove D.6.6 A primary reason for this is economic inactivity is that the people providing high levels of care are more likely to have given up work to care for a relative or a friend. Around 40% of the working age population providing unpaid care across Brighton and Hove are economically inactive, this figure rises to 70% for those providing care of more than 50 hours per week. People providing care make up 14% of all economically inactive people across the city550. D.6.7 Carers face a number of barriers to employment. These can be individual barriers, for example a lack of skills and confidence due to isolation in the home551. Also they may face labour market barriers such as difficulty of accessing jobs that are sufficiently local or accessible to combine with caring roles. Furthermore, employers are not always attuned to carer needs or to provide flexible working arrangements to enable carers to combine work and caring responsibilities552.

545 Carers UK (2006) In the Know – The Importance of Information for Carers. Available at: www.carersuk.org/Policyandpractice/PolicyResources/Research/InTheKnowFinalCopy.pdf 546 DWP (Feb 2007) 547 Carers UK (2007) Real Change – Not Short Change. Available at: www.carersuk.org/Policyandpractice/PolicyResources/Research/ResearchRealchangenotshortch angeMay2007.pdf 548 Carers UK (2007) Real Change – Not Short Change. Available at: www.carersuk.org/Policyandpractice/PolicyResources/Research/ResearchRealchangenotshortch angeMay2007.pdf 549 Ibid. 550 Census (2001) Table CS025 551 Carers UK. (2007) Real Change, Not Short Change. Available at: http://www.carersuk.org/Policyandpractice/PolicyResources/Research/ResearchRealchangenotsh ortchangeMay2007.pdf 552 Ibid.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 131 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

D.6.8 Even after caring has ceased, former carers encounter problems getting re-employed due to gaps in their employment history553.

Older carers are also likely to be on lower incomes D.6.9 Employment is also a key issue for older with carers over the age of 60 three times less likely to be in employment compared to non-carers of the same age554. Moreover gaps in the employment history of retired carers mean that one in six older carers estimated that their pensions have been affected by caring555. D.6.10 This has been exacerbated by low claimant rates of benefits to which older carers are entitled. ‘Caring and Pensioner Poverty - A report on older carers, employment and benefits’ (2005)556 highlighted that nearly 250,000 carers aged over 60 could be missing out on Pension Credit and a further 64,000 carers throughout the UK are not claiming a top up to Pension Credit known as the Carer's Addition.

Carers have poorer overall mental health compared with non-carers D.6.11 Caring can also have a negative effect on carers' mental health with analysis of British Household Panel Survey identifying that carers experienced a higher levels of psychological distress in the form of anxiety, depression, loss of confidence and self- esteem when compared against non-carers557. These risks increased where carers did not get a break from caring558, therefore economically inactive carers across Brighton and Hove face an increased risk of mental health problems.

D.7 Housing D.7.1 We cover the following sections: • Affordable housing across the city • Affordable warmth and fuel poverty • Homeless issues • People with multiple needs living in social housing.

Affordable housing across the city D.7.2 Lack of access to affordable housing is a significant problem across Brighton and Hove. Brighton and Hove had the second highest average house price increases of any city in

553 Carers National Association (2000) ‘Caring on the Breadline: the financial implications of caring’, Carers National Association (now Carers UK). 554 Carers UK (2005) Caring and Pensioner Poverty - A report on older carers, employment and benefits. Available at: www.carersuk.org/Policyandpractice/PolicyResources/Research/ResearchCaringandpensionerpo vertyNovember2005.pdf 555 ibid 556 ibid 557 Carers National Association (1998) Ignored and Invisible: carers' experiences of the NHS. Carers National Association. 558 36% of those who provided substantial care and did not get a break suffered ill-health compared to 17% of those who accessed a break. Cited in: Singleton et al. (2002) Mental Health of Carers, Office of National Statistics, The Stationery Office.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 132 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

the country over the decade between 1996 and 2006, with house prices increasing by 260%559. D.7.3 This has made housing unaffordable for many people; the house price to income ratio for Brighton in 2004 was 5.5, compared with 4.2 nationally 560. The Brighton and Hove Housing Strategy Unit estimated in 2004 that a household would require an income of around £37,000 to secure a prudent mortgage for a one bedroom flat561. With recent house price rises in the city this problem is growing; in 2007 a household income of £88,000 would be required to afford an average terrace house562. D.7.4 Lack of affordable housing can have a detrimental effect on community stability. Some of the implications include: • Pricing long-term local residents out of the area • Moving the population into more short term lets in the private sector rented accommodation • Driving up levels of homelessness • Increasing inequality between the propertied “haves” and the renting “have nots”.

There are significant barriers to housing prevalent across the majority of areas in the city D.7.5 Barriers to owner occupation were examined as part of the IMD 2004 where wider barriers to housing sub-domain made up a component of the Index. ‘Wider barriers’ refers to barriers associated with access to suitable housing caused by household overcrowding, difficulties in access to owner occupation (affordability) and homelessness. D.7.6 Unsurprisingly, given the high housing costs in the city, ‘wider barriers’ are widespread throughout Brighton and Hove. More than three quarters of SOAs across Brighton and Hove are in the most deprived 10% in England in terms of wider barriers to housing. D.7.7 Furthermore, over 30% of Brighton and Hove’s SOAs are in the most deprived 1% in the region in terms of Wider Barriers to Housing (all bar three SOAs in the most deprived 1% in the South East are in Brighton and Hove)563.

Less than 15% of Brighton and Hove’s population could access the owner occupation market based on income levels alone. D.7.8 In order to explain high levels of wider barriers in the city it is important to break this down into individual indicators. D.7.9 The ‘difficulty of access to owner occupation’ indicator looks at cost of housing in relation to income levels and was based on 2002 data. In the ID 2004 Brighton and Hove was the 11th most deprived district in terms of difficulty access to owner occupation in the country with an estimated 86% of people unable to access owner

559 AboutProperty.co.uk, Property News, House prices rise fastest in Truro, 22 May 2006. Available at: www.aboutproperty.co.uk/News/house-prices/halifax/house-prices-rise-fastest-in- truro-$440508.htm 560 Audit Commission Area Profiles. Available at: www.areaprofiles.audit- commission.gov.uk/(eirra445pvmavzn3hljkdf45)/StaticPage.aspx?info=25&menu=57 561 The Brighton and Hove and Adur Area Investment Framework, p38. Available at: http://www.brighton-hove.gov.uk/index.cfm?skin=textonly&request=c1120682 562 Based on lending for a mortgage of 3.5% of two peoples salary. The average house price for a terrace house in Brighton is currently £308,000 (Land Registry of England and Wales, April- June 2007) 563 All data on Wider Barriers from the ID 2004 (ODPM)

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 133 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

occupation on the basis of their income levels564. In other words, the city is among the 5% of Local Authorities in the country where affordable housing issues are most acute. D.7.10 This indicator was updated in 2004, however the picture was unchanged with 86% of the population still unable to access owner occupation. D.7.11 The high proportion of people unable to access the housing market on the basis of income levels alone is particularly significant in Brighton and Hove. Owner occupation levels are particularly low in the city (62% across Brighton and Hove compared with 72% across the region and 69% across England), with people less likely to have the capital from existing home ownership to purchase a home.

This is leading to high levels of inequality across the city D.7.12 In a city where property prices are rising rapidly, a two tier situation is developing where the 38% of the population who are renting are increasingly unable to access to housing market while those that do own are getting increasingly asset wealthy. D.7.13 Children and young people are one of the client groups adversely affected by a chronic shortage of affordable housing in the city, with 23% of the city’s children and young people living in social housing565. D.7.14 High housing costs can lead to a concentration of more deprived people in affordable enclaves as high housing costs price them out of more affluent areas. This has led to a concentration of less well off people in larger housing estates in recent years566.

Lack of affordable accommodation can result in a range of inequalities issues. D.7.15 High housing costs is one of the principle obstacles to employment. The Housing Benefit trap, where people are reluctant to move back into employment due to loss of benefits is a significant issue across the city. The Area Investment Framework estimated that for every £1 earned above the previous benefit rate, 65p of Housing Benefit is withdrawn567. D.7.16 This is particularly true for homeless households in expensive private sector temporary accommodation. Research by the Greater London Authority (GLA) found that a homeless household with three children living in private sector temporary accommodation needs to earn £960 per week before they are significantly better off in work568.

564 This indicator does not reflect actual rates of owner occupation but estimates the proportion who would be able to access owner occupation if they had no capital behind them (e.g. in the form of a property to sell). 565 Brighton and Hove Children and Young People’s Plan (2006-2009), p36. Available at: www.brighton-hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/cypp/CYPPJulyV4.pdf 566 DTZ Consulting and Research (2006) Housing, Economic Development and Productivity: Literature Review. Available at: www.berr.gov.uk/files/file32669.pdf [accessed 567 Brighton and Hove Socio-Economic Baseline Report (2003)Poverty and Economic Activity (chapter nine), Brighton & Hove and Adur Area Investment Framework, p.3. Available at: www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/regeneration/Ch_9_Poverty_and_Economc_Inactivity.pdf 568 Greater London Authority (GLA) “When Work Doesn’t Pay”. In London Housing, No 113 Apr 2005

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 134 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

D.7.17 Other groups likely to be adversely affected by high housing costs are ex-offenders. The Joseph Rowntree Foundation found that ex-prisoners are more likely to re-offend if they do not find satisfactory accommodation on release569. D.7.18 Barriers to owner occupation can also have an impact on business and enterprise. The equity in housing is a key factor in enabling capital to start up businesses. Those groups that are excluded from owner occupation are least likely to be able to raise their enterprise levels and exploit their entrepreneurial capacity. D.7.19 Moreover, it is more difficult to attract people to jobs in the city if wage levels to not match the high housing costs. A recent business survey in South East England found that 12% of companies had experienced difficulty in recruiting and retaining staff due to high housing costs570 while 10% of businesses have considered relocation from the region due to high housing costs571.

The city also suffers from high levels of household overcrowding D.7.20 Difficulty in accessing affordable housing has also led to a high degree of household overcrowding across Brighton and Hove as larger accommodation to meet people’s needs becomes unaffordable. D.7.21 The city has the second highest levels of people living in overcrowded households outside of London with nearly 10% of households in the city overcrowded. In some areas of Brighton and Hove more than one in five adults live in overcrowded households572.

Affordable warmth and fuel poverty D.7.22 Preliminary analysis from Brighton and Hove City Council identifies the “most deserving” wards across the city in terms of high estimated levels of households experiencing fuel poverty. This analysis is based on Stock Report information contained in the Building Research Establishment (BRE) Housing Predictive Model. The league table of Wards is based on scoring marked from BRE statistics relating to “under 30 SAP rating”, “Decent Home Standard failings”, and “inadequate thermal comfort” D.7.23 The areas identified as having the highest estimated levels of households experiencing fuel poverty include Regency, Central Hove, Westbourne, Goldsmid, Brunswick & Adelaide wards. Stanford, Patcham, North Portslade and Woodingdean wards are identified as having the lowest estimated levels of households experiencing fuel poverty. D.7.24 Further assessment is needed of the data to explore these findings, in particular the relationship against overall levels of deprivation. Homeless issues

Brighton and Hove has one of the largest homeless populations in the country D.7.25 Another key impact of the high cost of housing in Brighton and Hove is the high levels of homelessness in the city, as high housing costs raise the price of renting in the private sector.

569 JRF (1996) The housing needs of ex-prisoners. Available at: www.jrf.org.uk/knowledge/findings/housing/pdf/H178.pdf 570 DTZ Consulting and Research (2006) Housing, Economic Development and Productivity: Literature Review. Available at: www.berr.gov.uk/files/file32669.pdf 571 ibid 572 Overcrowded household data is taken from the 2001 census.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 135 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

D.7.26 Although the number of unintentionally and intentionally homeless households in priority need fell from 1,057 to 573 between 2003/04 and 2005/06573, the most recent national data (2004/5) identifies the city as among the 10% of Local Authorities in England with the highest number of homeless households574. D.7.27 City Council evidence to the ODPM Select Committee in 2004575 identified a number of key driving factors leading to high levels of homelessness across the city: • Geography: being bordered by the downs and the sea has meant it has not been possible to build more housing • Shortage of housing supply has raised the costs of housing across the city which has trickled down to the rental sector. D.7.28 Lack of social housing in the city is also an obstacle in reducing homeless levels, as social rented housing has traditionally been an escape route for homeless people. However, social housing levels are decreasing, with more homeless households than vacant social housing to accommodate them. D.7.29 At an individual level, just over two-thirds of homelessness in Brighton and Hove is caused by three primary causes576: • 29% of all homelessness is due to loss of private rented accommodation • 21% of all homelessness is due to eviction by family and friends • 16% of all homelessness is due to eviction by parents.

The city has the greatest number of homeless people living in B&B accommodation outside London D.7.30 Seventy-three homeless households across Brighton and Hove are housed in Bed and Breakfast accommodation. This is the highest anywhere outside of London577. D.7.31 However, homeless acceptances in Bed and Breakfast accommodation make up only 14% of the homeless acceptances across Brighton and Hove with the remaining 86% in other temporary accommodation578.

Brighton and Hove’s rough sleeper population has declined significantly since 1998 but is still among the highest in England D.7.32 Numbers of homeless people recorded as sleeping rough are fairly low across England as a whole. Brighton and Hove has the 4th largest rough sleeper population albeit with only 12 people recorded as sleeping rough across the city in the latest DCLG street count579. D.7.33 The rough sleeper population has fallen dramatically from 1998 when there were 44 recorded rough sleepers in Brighton and Hove. This figure does not marry with

573 ODPM/DCLG. Data extracted from NeSS 574 ODPM/DCLG. Data extracted from NeSS 575 Select Committee on Office of the Deputy Prime Minister: Housing, Planning, Local Government and the Regions (2004) Memorandum by Brighton and Hove City Council (HOM 47). Available at: www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm200304/cmselect/cmodpm/1116/1116we50.htm 576 Brighton and Hove Housing Strategy Team (2007). Statistical Bulletin 2006/7 Q4, Issue 10, May 2007. 577 ODPM/DCLG. Data extracted from NeSS 578 ibid 579 Last DCLG street count was 17/05/2006. Data is drawn from Local Authority Housing Strategy Statistical Appendix (HSSA, formerly HIP returns) made in June 2006

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 136 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

resident’s perceptions however, where two-thirds of people described rough sleeping as a big problem in their local area in 2003/04580.

Homeless people are particularly likely to experience inequality D.7.34 The 2004 Social Exclusion Unit ‘Breaking the Cycle’ report cited homelessness a key driver of social exclusion and inequality581. D.7.35 The risk of homeless groups experiencing inequality has been exemplified by Jim Bennett, Shelter's Policy Project Manager: People are often caught in a 'no job - no home' vicious circle, as they do not have the resources to resolve their homelessness and are unable to get a job until they have somewhere to live. Other practical barriers include lack of sleep, no contact address and difficulty in keeping possessions or maintaining a smart appearance for interviews.582 D.7.36 There are a range of factors that put people at risk of homelessness. These range from structural factors such as adverse housing and labour market trends; rising levels of poverty; family re-structuring; changes in the benefit system583. There are also individual factors to consider, including family breakdown; enforced or voluntary exclusion from the family home; being looked after or a care leaver; insecure housing; drug and alcohol dependency and criminal activity.584

People with multiple needs living in social housing D.7.37 The Brighton and Hove Housing Tenants Status Survey (2006) highlights living conditions of those in social accommodation by focusing on five types of inequality: income, dependence on state benefits, poor health, crime and poor living environment. D.7.38 Evidence from the Survey identifies that more than 61% of the households have an income below £10,400 p.a.; almost 57% of the families receive some type of state benefits (JSA, Pension tax credits, Income Support, DLA or other); nearly 53% of the households have problems related to poor health. Crime and living environment problems are less frequent, and are experienced by roughly one-quarter of the survey respondents. D.7.39 The level of those with multiple needs in the survey is high: more than 68% of the households are experiencing at least two of the abovementioned inequalities. Multiple needs are driven by health, income and reliance on state benefits. Among the households with multiple needs, 81% rely on state benefits and have low income; 78% depending on state benefits have health problems; 73% have both poor health and low income.

580 ODPM (2003-4) Best Value General Survey 581 Social Exclusion Unit (2004) Breaking the Cycle of Social Exclusion. Available at: http://archive.cabinetoffice.gov.uk/seu/page6396.html?id=42 [accessed 11 September 2007]. 582 Promoting Employment Opportunities for All: Social inclusion – Homeless (Shelter) http://www.esf.gov.uk/01_News/61_News_Magazine_- _Issue_6_(Jul_02)/Compendium.asp?txtSearch=%7CSocial+inclusion%20%7C 583 Fitzpatrick, S. and Klinker, S. (2000) Research on single homelessness in Britain, JRF. Available at: http://www.jrf.org.uk/Knowledge/findings/housing/410.asp 584 The Mental Health foundation (2002) The Mental Health Needs of Homeless Children and Young People (up date), Vol. 3, Issue 22. Available at: http://www.mentalhealth.org.uk/publications/?EntryId=38765

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 137 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Appendix E LAA theme: A safe city that values our unique environment

E.1 Introduction E.1.1 This Appendix provides analysis of inequality under the Brighton and Hove LAA theme A safe city that values our unique environment.

The local LAA policy context E.1.2 The LAA outcomes under the Safer and Stronger Communities theme are585: • Reduce crime and the harm caused by drugs and alcohol • Build respect, reduce anti-social behaviour and the fear of crime and improve people’s pride in their neighbourhoods - working with local communities particularly in hotspot areas • Engage with local communities, empowering them to participate in decision-making and influence service delivery • Improve the quality of the local environment • Better support the Cultural Quarter by continuing to invest in its heritage assets and the quality of the environment • Improve awareness and encourage use of sustainable transport choices • Road safety – reduce the number of people killed or seriously injured on Brighton & Hove’s roads • Tackling Climate Change - by reducing carbon emissions, supporting energy efficiency and renewable energy.

About this Appendix E.1.3 This Appendix examines the following: • Crime and community safety across Brighton and Hove • Fear of crime • Community strength and participation • Sustainable transport and road safety • Other issues. E.1.4 Under each section, we look at overall levels of inequality across the city, identifying those groups and areas faring badly on a range of outcome measures.

E.2 Crime and Community Safety across Brighton and Hove E.2.1 Improvement in crime levels was seen by Brighton and Hove residents as the second highest priority for improvement in the local area586. Crime levels and fear of crime can have a detrimental impact upon people’s quality of life in a number of ways: individuals can be physically victimised (e.g. assaulted), materially victimised (e.g. burgled), or psychologically victimised (e.g. afraid to leave the house or walk alone after dark).

585 Brighton & Hove (March 2007). Refresh of the Local Area Agreement for Brighton & Hove 2007 -2008. Available from www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/performance_team/Brighton___Hove_LAA_07-08.pdf 586 The first priority was “clean streets”. ODPM Best Value General Survey 2003/4, available from http://www.areaprofiles.audit- commission.gov.uk/(30vmgz55jpidqdyt3fqgpb55)/DetailPage.aspx?entity=10004833

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 138 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

E.2.2 The negative effects of crime are not just restricted to those individuals who are personally victimised, but also transfer to friends, family, neighbours and colleagues. If such problems persist over time, a neighbourhood may gain a reputation as a dangerous place to live and work, resulting in businesses and population out-migration, which can further reinforce the cycle of decline.

Measuring crime levels E.2.3 We use police recorded crime data to explore crime and community safety issues (we explore fear of crime in the following section). Although there are issues with under- reporting of particular crimes587, as well as difficulty in identifying accurate crime rate population denominators588, the data gives the best available indication of the risk of victimisation at for particular crimes and in particular neighbourhoods. E.2.4 We look at • Crime levels across the city • Which groups are at risk? • Which areas have the highest crime levels across Brighton and Hove? • Who is committing crime? Profile of offenders. Crime levels across the city

Overall crime levels are declining, however they remain above national and regional levels E.2.5 Overall Crime across Brighton and Hove is relatively high with 68.7 crimes per 1,000 residents. This is higher than the regional (53.6 per 1,000 residents) and national (61.1) averages589. E.2.6 Overall crime levels have slowly declined between 2003/04 and 2006/07, however crime across England (-11%) is falling 3 times as fast as crime across the city (-3%) and in 2006/07 the city had a roughly comparable crime rate with England as a whole590. E.2.7 Compared with other NRF areas, Brighton and Hove has a relatively low crime rate. The average crime rate for NRF areas is 78.1 compared with 68.7 across the city591.

Violent crime is rising sharply - the city has among the highest levels of violent incidents in the country E.2.8 Although crime as a whole has declined across Brighton and Hove, there has by contrast been an increase in violent crimes across the city. High level of violent crime

587 For example, the 2003/04 British Crime Survey estimated that only 44% of total crime experienced by adults is reported to police and, of those crimes that are reported, approximately 30% are not recorded by the police. This is lower for particular crime types, for example certain types of violent crime, domestic violence and sexual offences. Reporting rates are higher for crimes such as domestic burglary, where considerations such as insurance claims ensure higher levels of recording. 588 Using resident populations to calculate crime levels per population can lead to an overestimation of crime rates in urban areas with high workplace or visitor populations. As daytime populations are likely to be greater than resident populations, using the (smaller) resident population as the denominator can lead to over-inflated estimates of crime rates. However, there is little up-to-date information on daytime populations, especially at neighbourhood level, so we use resident population as the best estimate. 589 Overall recorded crime (BCS comparator) 2006/07 Home Office. Taken from NRU FTI 590 Overall recorded crime (BCS comparator) 2006/07 Home Office. Taken from NRU FTI 591 Overall recorded crime (BCS comparator) 2006/07 Home Office. Taken from NRU FTI

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 139 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

can have a significant impact on fear of crime as well as being more likely to have a lasting traumatic impact on a victim compared with theft of property. There are also additional costs associated with violent crime, for example in providing A&E services as well as increasing police presence. E.2.9 In 2006/07 there were 29.9 violent crime incidents per 1,000 population. This is well above regional (18.6) and national (19.3) averages and above average across NRF areas as a whole (24.6) 592. The recorded violent crime rate has increased by 82% between 1999/2000 to 2006/07. This mirrors a national increase of 77%593. E.2.10 The Crime and Disorder Strategic Assessment-2007 identifies that of all crimes, 23% were recorded as Violent Crime. Violence Against the Person forms the majority of all Violent Crime, with the prevalent offences being Public Order Harassment, Assault Occasioning Actual Bodily Harm and Common Assault. E.2.11 The peaks in the crime rates within these classifications can be linked to the impact of changes in the recording of such crimes594. For example, the increase in Pubic Order offences is attributed to the use of early preventative Fixed Penalty Notices: dealing with the offence at an early stage is carried out to prevent escalation into more serious violence later in the evening.595 E.2.12 In terms of these practices and other policing approaches to this area, it is suggested that ‘these tactics are beginning to take effect, as although both Common Assault and Public Order Harassment are continuing to rise, they are increasing at a reduced rate’596. E.2.13 Also, in terms of issues around the recording of offences, both Public Place ABH and Public Place Common Assault saw a steep rise in offences post May 2004 due to the impact of the changes in the National Crime Recording Standards. Thus, as a result of these changes some incidents such as ‘minor scuffles’ or where victims do not want to proceed, are be recorded as a crime where they previously would not have been.597

Alcohol is a key contributor to high levels of violent crime across the city E.2.14 One of the primary contributors to high levels of violent crime in Brighton and Hove is alcohol. The Brighton and Hove Crime and Disorder Strategic Assessment (2007) reports that at least 40% of all recorded violent crime is alcohol-related. Evidence from the BVPI survey for the city suggest that just under two thirds of residents perceive drunk and rowdy behaviour to be a big problem across the city, placing the city among the worst 25% in the country in terms of perceived alcohol related disorder598. E.2.15 Certain groups are more likely to misuse alcohol. For example a survey by the DAAT found that more than 50% of the student community across the city binge drink at least once a week599.

592 Home Office. Taken from NRU FTI 593 Overall recorded crime (BCS comparator) 2006/07 Home Office. Taken from NRU FTI 594 Crime and Disorder Strategic Assessment - 2007 595 ibid 596 Ibid, p.25. 597 ibid 598 Audit Commission Area Profiles. See: www.areaprofiles.audit- commission.gov.uk/(30vmgz55jpidqdyt3fqgpb55)/DataProfile.aspx for analysis relating to BPVIs. 599 Brighton and Hove Community Safety Crime and Drugs Audit 2004

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 140 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Domestic violence also makes up a significant proportion of violent crime across the city E.2.16 The city has a high level of domestic violence: in 2006/07, 3,591 incidents and crimes of domestic violence were recorded by the police, of which 1,472 were recorded as crimes600.601. It is also likely that the extent of domestic violence is underestimated602. Fears of reprisal or a lack of concern from the authorities have historically contributed to the lack of reporting of these types of crimes. E.2.17 People experiencing domestic violence are at greater risk of becoming homeless. Brighton and Hove received 12,600 homeless applications for reasons of domestic violence between 2001 and 2005603 In 2006/2007 of the 289 presentations to the Housing service related to domestic violence. 62 became homeless applications604. E.2.18 Domestic violence impacts not just on direct victims, but can also have a long-term negative impact on families, children and young people. Around half of domestic violence victims recorded in Brighton and Hove’s supporting people framework were parents605. Exposure to violence in the home is also linked to juvenile crime and aggression606.

An increase in ‘face-to-face’ offences E.2.19 The increase in violent crime has been part of a wider increase in ‘face to face’ offences across Brighton and Hove. Other personal attacks that have been on the increase are sexual offences which have also increased by 62% between 1999/00 and 2006/07 (albeit from a low starting point). The city has a slightly higher proportion of sexual offences (1.3 per 1,000 population) than the regional and national figures (both 1.1)607. E.2.20 In 2006/07 there were 1.6 robberies per 1,000 population in Brighton and Hove. This is slightly below the national level of 1.9 robberies per 1,000 population but is double the average across the South East region608. E.2.21 The robbery rate across Brighton and Hove has been steadily increasing between 1999/00 and 2006/07 with an increase in robberies of just under 15% over the period. This is slightly faster than the 12% rise experienced across England as a whole. However, the city still has less than half the Robbery rate of the average across other NRF areas (3.4 per 1,000 population)609.

600 Brighton and Hove Crime and Disorder Strategic Assessment 2007 (Draft) 601 Brighton and Hove Community Safety Crime and Drugs Audit 2004 602 Indeed National evidence suggests that only 23% of domestic crimes are recorded (Brighton and Hove Crime and Disorder Strategic Assessment 2007, Draft). 603 Brighton and Hove Community Safety Crime and Drugs Audit 2004 604 Brighton and Hove Crime and Disorder Strategic Assessment 2007 (Draft) 605 Brighton and Hove Community Safety Crime and Drugs Audit 2004 606 Brighton and Hove Socio-Economic Baseline Report (2003) Poverty and Economic Activity (chapter nine), Brighton & Hove and Adur Area Investment Framework, p.33. Available at: www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/regeneration/Ch_9_Poverty_and_Economc_Inactivity.pdf 607 Home Office. Taken from NRU FTI 608 Home Office. Taken from NRU FTI 609 Home Office. Taken from NRU FTI

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 141 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

By contrast burglary rates across Brighton and Hove have fallen significantly in recent years and are now below the South East average E.2.22 Police recorded offences for 2006/07 show that there were 8.6 burglaries per 1,000 households across Brighton and Hove. This represents a fall in recorded burglaries of 62% from 1999/00610. E.2.23 Brighton and Hove now has a lower burglary rate than the South East region (9.7 per 1000 households) and England as a whole (13.4 per 1,000 households) 611. E.2.24 The burglary rate across Brighton and Hove is less than half the average across NRF areas as a whole (18.7) 612.

Falls in burglary levels may be linked to higher numbers of drug users receiving treatment E.2.25 Brighton and Hove has relatively high levels of drug users, with 70% of the residents regarding people using or dealing drugs as a “very big or fairly big problem” across the city613. High levels of drug use has been linked to high levels of acquisitive crime in the past, as hard drug users often resort to thefts and burglaries to feed habits. E.2.26 There is some evidence to suggest that a fall in burglary rates across Brighton and Hove can be linked to an increase in drug users receiving treatment. The recent the launch of the Operation Reduction initiative614 in 2005 has seen more than 100 drug users receive treatment and support. This has resulted in a drastic reduction in burglary levels across the city with burglaries in east Brighton down by 86%. 615 E.2.27 Other initiatives have also helped reduce acquisitive crime, for example the Shoplifting Project which helps prolific shoplifters, who regularly steal to buy drugs, get treatment to tackle their addiction. The initiative resulted in a 45% reduction in shoplifting incidents reported to Brighton and Hove’s Business Crime Reduction Partnership616.

Vehicle crime is relatively low across the city, and falling E.2.28 Other property theft has also been declining across the city of Brighton and Hove. Vehicle crime referring to theft of or from a vehicle has been significantly declining across Brighton and Hove by just under 60% between 1999/00. This is nearly double the rate of decline across England as a whole. E.2.29 There are currently lower rates of recorded vehicle crime across Brighton and Hove (10.1 per 1,000 population) than across the South East region (10.8) and England as a whole (13) 617.

610 Home Office. Taken from NRU FTI 611 Home Office. Taken from NRU FTI 612 Home Office. Taken from NRU FTI 613 Audit Commission Area Profiles. See: www.areaprofiles.audit- commission.gov.uk/(30vmgz55jpidqdyt3fqgpb55)/DataProfile.aspx [accessed 11 September 2007] for analysis relating to BPVIs. 614 A crime reduction programme launched jointly by Brighton Police, Crime Reduction Initiatives and the DAAT in 2005 615 Minister for crime reduction visits Brighton and Hove DAAT on tackling drugs day (2007) Home Office. Available at: www.gnn.gov.uk/Content/Detail.asp?ReleaseID=286465andNewsAreaID=2 616 Minister for crime reduction visits Brighton and Hove DAAT on tackling drugs day (2007) Home Office. Available at: www.gnn.gov.uk/Content/Detail.asp?ReleaseID=286465andNewsAreaID=2 617 Home Office. Taken from NRU FTI 2006/07

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 142 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Which groups are at risk?

LGBT, ethnic minorities and the disabled are particularly vulnerable to violent crime and hate crime E.2.30 Certain groups are particularly likely to be victims of violent crime. The number of racial incidents recorded by the authority per 100,000 population for Brighton and Hove was 206 (in 2005/06), almost double the rate recorded in 2003/04 (110) and higher than the city’s comparator areas (with the exception of Bristol). Overall, since July 2004, 1795 racist or religiously driven crimes and incidents have been recorded. Local estimates also suggest that an average of 13 foreign students a week were victims of crime in Brighton and Hove618. E.2.31 Other hate crime is also high across the city. The ‘Count Me In Too’ study (2006) found that almost three quarters of LGBT respondents had experienced hate crime in the past 5 years (ranging from verbal harassment to physical violence) because of their sexual and/or gender identities. Despite the introduction of remote/self reporting mechanisms such as the ‘True Vision’ reporting packs, there is a significant under- reporting of hate crime with only a quarter of LGBT people across the city reporting any of the hate crime incidents they’d experienced.619 One of the reasons for this is that hate crime is often in the form of abuse, violence or harassment from a family member or someone in the household with around two-thirds of trans people and 44 % of bisexual people experiencing violent hate crimes from a family member or someone close to them.620 E.2.32 Another group particularly likely to be a victim of violent crime are disabled people. A survey by the Disability Rights Commission (DRC) on hate crime among disabled groups found that almost half of those who took part in the survey had experienced verbal abuse, intimidation and /or physical attacks because of their disability. Just over a third of incidents were physical attacks, with the main type of attack being verbal abuse and intimidation621. E.2.33 These attacks can have a dramatic impact on people’s daily lives, with around one-third of victims having to avoid specific places and change their routine; one in four had moved home as a result 622.

618Freedman, N. (2007) Thugs spared jail for gang attack on students, The Argus, 7 August 2007. Available from: http://www.theargus.co.uk/mostpopular.var.1599243.mostcommented.thugs_spared_jail_for_ga ng_attack_on_students.php 619 Browne, K. (2007) Count me in too: LGBT Lives in Brighton and Hove Initial Findings: Academic Report. Available at: www.spectrum- lgbt.org/cmiToo/downloads/CMIT_AcademicReport_final_June07.pdf 620 Browne, K. (2007) Count me in too: LGBT Lives in Brighton and Hove Initial Findings: Academic Report. Available at: www.spectrum- lgbt.org/cmiToo/downloads/CMIT_AcademicReport_final_June07.pdf 621 Disability Rights Commission (2006) Hate Crime Against Disabled people in Scotland - a survey report. Available at: http://www.drc- gb.org/about_us/drc_scotland/library/other_issues/hate_crime_against_disabled_pe.aspx 622 Disability Rights Commission (2006) Hate Crime Against Disabled people in Scotland - a survey report. Available at: http://www.drc- gb.org/about_us/drc_scotland/library/other_issues/hate_crime_against_disabled_pe.aspx

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 143 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Which areas have the highest crime levels across Brighton and Hove?

The highest overall crime levels in Brighton and Hove are situated in central Brighton E.2.34 Data provided by the Community Safety team623 identifies that the city Centre SOA E01016952 (in Regency ward, covering West Street) has the highest crime count in Sussex. In the twelve months between July 2006 and Jun 2007 there were over 4,200 recorded incidents across the area. There were only two other areas of the city with over 1,000 recorded crime counts in 2006/07: St Peters and the North Laine. E.2.35 Over 40% of all crime across Brighton and Hove was committed in the central wards of Regency, Queens Park and St Peters and the North Laine. These areas have the highest concentration of shops, businesses and nightlife as well as the largest daytime and nighttime populations in the city. E.2.36 In Regency ward, one SOA registered more 1,100 violent offences. Queen's Park, St. Peter's and North and Laine contain the second and third most violent SOAs, which registered respectively 321 and 258 violent crimes.

Comparison with the Indices of Deprivation 2004 crime domain E.2.37 There are differences between the crime data at SOA level and the Indices of Deprivation 2004 crime domain. The ID 2004 crime domain identifies four of the 12 SOAs with the highest levels of crime across the city to be located in East Brighton, while the more recent Community Safety data identifies lower crime levels in these areas. E.2.38 This may reflect real change on-the-ground; however differences here may also be due to differences in the way that the population denominator is calculated. The ID 2004 domain uses a daytime population (workplace plus residents). This would tend to downplay crime rates in central areas with large workplace populations.

623 Thanks to Ruth Condon at the Community Safety team for providing this information.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 144 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Who is committing crime? Profile of offenders

Profile of offenders and victims in Brighton and Hove 2002/03 Age Total Crime % Share of Total Crime % Share of Offenders Offenders Victims Victims 0-10 25 0.4 118 0.5 11-20 2147 31.2 3148 13.5 21-30 2214 32.1 6670 28.6 31-40 1651 24.0 5918 25.4 41-50 585 8.5 3427 14.7 51-60 210 3.0 2131 9.1 61-70 37 0.5 918 3.9 71-80 15 0.2 590 2.5 81+ 4 0.1 397 1.7 sum 6888 100.0 23317 100.0 Number of 6323 21.0 22956 76.4 records with value Number of 23722 79.0 7089 23.6 records without value Number of 30045 100.0 30045 100.0 records total Source: Brighton and Hove and Adur Area Investment Framework: Chapter 12 Community Safety and Crime Reduction

Just under two-thirds of all crime across Brighton and Hove is committed by people aged under 30 E.2.39 Crime across the city of Brighton and Hove is disproportionately committed by children and young adults. In 2002/03 just under two-thirds (64%) of all offenders in the city were aged 30 or under. Of these, nearly half were children and young adults aged under 20. Furthermore, there were 488 first time entrants to the criminal justice system in 2006/07; this represents an increase of 37% as compared to the previous year (356). E.2.40 .

The 21-30 age group were the most likely to be perpetrators and victims of crime E.2.41 People aged 21-30 across the city were more likely to commit crime than any other age group with 32% of all offences across the city committed by this age group. E.2.42 The 18-30 year olds are also more likely to be victims of crime than any other age group with just under 30% of all crimes across Brighton and Hove committed against this age group. E.2.43 An examination of the number of offenders does not provide a full pattern of crime levels as the most active offenders commit disproportionately greater amounts of crime (estimated at about 10% of offenders committing 70% of the crime)624.

624 Chris Wilson, Jackie Johnson Equal Brighton and Hove Research Report page 23

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 145 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

E.3 Fear of crime

Fear of crime in Sussex is lower than elsewhere in the country E.3.1 Information on fear of crime from the BCS is only available at Police Force Level for Sussex Police Force as a whole, so does not provide the full picture of fear of crime across Brighton and Hove. E.3.2 Fear of the three main crime types across Sussex was below regional and national levels in 2006. In 2006, 8% of residents across Sussex were recorded as having a high level of concern about burglary levels compared with 9% of residents across the South East and 13% across England as a whole. 9% were worried about car crime (compared with 10% across the region and 14% across England) and 9% were worried about violent crime (compared with 13% across the region and 17% across England as a whole). E.3.3 While fear of crime is lower in the city’s police force area than the country as a whole, there is also some evidence to suggest that fear of crime within the city is falling as well. Concern about anti-social behaviour across Brighton and Hove is falling with 36% concerned about anti-social behaviour in the 2006/07 Local Government User Satisfaction Survey (LGUSS), compared with 46% in the 2003/04 survey.

Older groups and people in poor health are more likely to have high levels of fear of crime E.3.4 Certain groups are more likely to be concerned about crime than others. For example elderly people are not at higher risk than other age groups, but they are often more concerned about crime.625 E.3.5 People with poor health are also particularly likely to have high fear of crime. A MORI poll identified that just under half of adults (44%) with mental health problems felt unsafe from harm in their local area while 35% of women with a disability or long-term health condition felt unsafe626. E.3.6 The survey also revealed that disabled groups had particular concerns, with a third of disabled adults feeling unsafe in their locality and almost a quarter say they have difficulty using police services627. E.3.7 The LGUS survey highlights how different groups experience different fear of crime at different times of the day. Women, the elderly, people with limiting illness and individuals from White British/Irish ethnicity feel less safe after dark628. E.3.8 Barriers to accessing police services greatly impacts upon feelings of safety and security. Groups across Brighton and Hove for whom English is not a first language are likely to be more isolated from services and therefore, have a greater fear of crime629.

625 Home Office (2007) Stay safe if you're elderly. Available at: http://www.homeoffice.gov.uk/crime-victims/how-you-can-prevent-crime/staying-safe-if-elderly/ 626 Disability Rights Commission (2006) Hate Crime Against Disabled people in Scotland - a survey report. Available at: http://www.drc- gb.org/about_us/drc_scotland/library/other_issues/hate_crime_against_disabled_pe.aspx 627 Ipsos MORI conducted 1,504 telephone interviews, in December 2006 and January 2007, with adults in England and Wales with a long-standing health condition or disability. The survey found that safety is an issue for a third of disabled adults, with 32% disagreeing that they feel safe from harm when out and about in their local area. While over half (51%) find it very or fairly easy to make use of police services in their area, 24% said it was fairly or very difficult. 628 LGUSS (2006) quoted in Brighton and Hove Crime and Disorder Strategic Assessment 2007 (Draft)

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 146 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Do people living in particular areas have a greater fear of crime? E.3.9 Local geographical differences have also emerged: residents of North Portslade, Woodingdean and Rottingdean Coastal ward were found to feel least safe in Brighton & Hove, while those of Westbourne, Preston Park, Hanover/Elm Grove and St Peter’s/North Laine felt most safe after dark (and to a more limited extent also in the day)630. E.3.10 The Home Office ‘Crime Reduction toolkit’631 identifies that fear of crime is higher in areas with high crime levels, where people have been victims of crime, and where there is persistent anti-social behaviour. Fear of crime is also higher in areas where people feel vulnerable, or poorly informed, or powerless and isolated. These issues are likely to overlap with community strength and engagement, explored in the next section.

E.4 Community strength and participation E.4.1 The refreshed Brighton and Hove LAA includes a key outcome on community participation – “Engage with local communities, empowering them to participate in decision-making and influence service delivery”632. This emphasises the commitment to strengthening communities outlined under the Community Strategy priority “Strengthening communities and involving people – so that communities are strong, inclusive and involved and have opportunities to influence decision-making.”633

Community strength contributes to economic and social outcomes, but is difficult to measure E.4.2 Research indicates that community strength and social capital contribute to a range of economic and social outcomes including: growth in GDP634; higher educational attainment635; lower levels of crime636; and better health637. However it is notoriously difficult to accurately define, let alone measure, social capital and community strength / engagement.

629 Richards, M. Ndebele, D. and Kelshall, H. (2001) Challenging Racism - A Celebrating Diversity guide, Brighton and Hove City Council. Available at: http://www.celebratingdiversity.co.uk/forms/CDracism.pdf 630 LGUSS (2006) quoted in Brighton and Hove Crime and Disorder Strategic Assessment 2007 (Draft) 631 http://www.crimereduction.gov.uk/ 632 Brighton & Hove (March 2007). Refresh of the Local Area Agreement for Brighton & Hove 2007 -2008. Available from www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/performance_team/Brighton___Hove_LAA_07-08.pdf 633 Brighton and Hove 2020 Partnership (2007). Creating the city of Opportunities: A sustainable community strategy for the city of Brighton & Hove. Available from http://www.brighton-hove.gov.uk/web/sites/site2020/holdingpage/files/communityStrategy.pdf 634 For an overview of this area see: Knack, S. & Keefer, P. (1997) ‘Does social capital have an economic payoff? A cross-country investigation’ Quarterly Journal of Economics, Nov97, Vol. 112 Issue 4, pp. 1251-1288. 635 For an overview of this area see: Portes, A. (1998) ‘Social Capita;: Its Origins and Applications in Modern Sociology’ Annual Review of Sociology, Vol. 24, Issue .1 636 For an overview of this area see: Forrest, R & Kearns, A. (2001) ‘Social Cohesion, Social Capital and the Neighbourhood’ Urban Studies, Volume 38, Issue. 12, pp. 2125 – 2143. 637 For an overview of this area see: Pevalin, D.J. & Rose, D. (2003) Social capital for health: Investigating the links between social capital and health using the British Household Panel Survey, Health Development Agency, NHS. Available at: www.renewal.net/Documents/RNET/Research/Socialcapitalinvestigating.pdf, [accessed 09 September 2007].

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 147 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

E.4.3 In other words, it is difficult for us to robustly identify those neighbourhoods and groups facing inequality in terms of low levels of engagement and participation. In this section we highlight information on: • The strength of the Voluntary and Community Sector (VCS) nationally and locally • Community involvement can help deliver local outcomes • Voter participation and local perceptions The strength of the Voluntary and Community Sector (VCS) nationally and locally

The strength of the VCS nationally E.4.4 Nationally, the sector consists of an estimated 700,000-1,000,000 organisations in the UK employing 560,000 people employed-equivalent to 471,000 full-time jobs.638 In addition are the 3 million volunteers – equivalent to additional 1.3 million full-time jobs. Volunteers’ contribution is valued at over 15 billion GBP639 E.4.5 Recent estimates are that the VCS generates 20.8 billion GBP a year. In real terms, statutory income rose from approximately 3.17 billion GBP in 1991 to 7.53 billion GBP in 2001-2.640

The strength of the VCS locally E.4.6 The most recent Social and Economic Audit641 of Brighton and Hove’s VCS estimated that there are between 1,400 and 1,500 community and voluntary organisations in Brighton and Hove. Two thirds of these organisations said that they work on a citywide basis; the remainder work in particular neighbourhoods.642 E.4.7 More than 10,000 people are involved in the organisations that responded to the VCS audit (2003). 1,750 people are involved as members of management committees; 6,300 people are involved as volunteers; and 2,200 are involved as paid employees. This is equivalent to one in every twenty adults aged between 16 and 75 living in the city.643 E.4.8 The turnover reported by the community and voluntary organisations that responded to the audit was £22.9 million in their most recent financial year. If the in-kind value of volunteering is added to turnover, the total is £40.6 million. The Gross Value Added to the local economy (similar to GDP) using government conversion ratios is £20.7 million.644

Community involvement can help deliver local outcomes E.4.9 Helliwell & Putnam (1995) have evaluated the extent to which economic development is faster in areas (in Italian regions) with more social capital, using three measures: an index of the extent of civic community, an index of various direct measures of the effectiveness of regional government, or surveys of citizen satisfaction with their regional governments. Their analysis of direct measures of citizen satisfaction with

638 Learning and Skills Council (2005) Working together in practice. Available at: http://readingroom.lsc.gov.uk/LSC/2005/quality/goodpractice/working-together-in-practice-vol- 2-working-smarter.pdf 639 Ibid. 640 The UK Voluntary Sector Almanac (2004) 641 The current audit of Brighton and Hove’s VCS is due to be completed in Spring 2008. 642 Ahmed,S; Holloway,S; Palmer, J & Watson, L. (2003) Economic and Social Audit of the Community and Voluntary Sector in Brighton and Hove, North Harbour Consulting Limited. 643 ibid 644 ibid

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 148 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

regional government suggest that these perceived increases in the effectiveness of regional government also led to greater economic growth645. E.4.10 Nationally, the Treasury recognises that the VCS are “uniquely placed to reach marginalised groups and enable individuals to participate actively in their communities”646 Evaluation of the Single Regeneration Budget (SRB) programme identified that ownership and development of projects, and the commitment of commitment of local communities to the regeneration process, was “most successful where community organisations and local activity is well established, and has facilitated the integration of SRB projects on to existing initiatives as in Hangleton Knoll”647 E.4.11 Locally, surveys of local partner managers for the Neighbourhood Renewal team648 highlight that the generic community engagement that has been funded through NRF over the last few years has improved the delivery of services at a neighbourhood level. They also found: • Services/partners had established links with the communities they aimed to connect with, and had held forums and events to improve accountability • Most managers expressed that generic community engagement at the neighbourhood level helped their service achieve its targets • Most managers and front-line workers identified that their service would suffer in the future if generic community engagement workers were no longer present E.4.12 Responses from the Police and people from the BHCC Environment Directorate were the most positive, whilst negative responses have come from the Housing Department. E.4.13 Front-line workers are more appreciative of support from community engagement workers (CEWs) than some managers. This may be because they are more aware of the support that CEWs give or have had more contact with CEWs.649 E.4.14 An audit was commissioned by the Local Strategic Partnership (LSP) in Brighton & Hove (2020 Community Partnership) to identify the levels of community infrastructure in the fifteen Neighbourhood Renewal areas across Brighton and Hove. The Trust for Developing Communities identified six key indicators of community capacity to engage with Neighbourhood Renewal and other regeneration programmes: • Representative Community Association or Forum • Multi Agency Forum (or Neighbourhood Management Group) • Community Newspaper • Community Development/Capacity Building worker • Neighbourhood Action Plan or similar recent research report • Community Buildings.

645 Helliwell, J.F & Putnam, R.D. (1995) Economic growth and social capital in Italy, Eastern Economic Journal. 646 HM Treasury (2002) The Role of the Voluntary and Community Sector in Service Delivery – A Cross-Cutting Review. 647 DTLR (2001). 647 Neighbourhood regeneration: lessons and evaluation evidence from ten Single Regeneration Budget case studies. Urban Research Summary Number 1. Available from http://www.renewal.net/Documents/RNET/Research/Neighbourhoodregenerationlessons.pdf 648 Brighton and Hove NR Team (2007) Community Engagement and Service Providers in Neighbourhood Renewal Areas - Summary of Questionnaire Results, Brighton and Hove Council. 649 Brighton and Hove NR Team (2007) Community Engagement and Service Providers in Neighbourhood Renewal Areas - Summary of Questionnaire Results, Brighton and Hove Council.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 149 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

E.4.15 The audit highlights that some Neighbourhood Renewal areas are more engaged with community capacity activity than others. For example, Hangleton and Knoll, Laburnum and Moyne; Hollingdean and Portland Road, Poets Corner and Clarendon Estate carry out activities relating to all six indicators. Portslade does also, albeit only in part of the area in terms of ‘representative community association or forum.650

Voter participation and local perceptions

Voter participation E.4.16 At the national elections, Brighton and Hove had a slightly higher electoral turnout than the national average. In 2005, turnout was over 60% in all three Brighton and Hove parliamentary constituencies, with the highest turnout in Hove (64%). A different picture is seen for the most recent European elections (2004), with a 33% turnout across the city, compared with 39% nationally. Brighton and Hove was among the bottom quartile of Local Authorities in the country in terms of European election turnout651. E.4.17 As in other areas, local election turnout (39% across the city) is significantly lower than general election turnout. The highest levels of turnout were in Stanford (50%) and Wish (47%) wards; areas with older more stable resident populations. The lowest levels of turnout were seen in Moulsecoomb and Bevendean (27%) and Brunswick and Adelaide wards; these areas have high proportions of students and adults in short term rented accommodation.

Resident perceptions E.4.18 Local residents highlight that community activities are improving (or at least, not worsening: In 2003-4, 88% of Brighton and Hove residents thought that for their local area, over the past three years, community activities have got better or stayed the same, compared to a mean of 85% nationally.652 E.4.19 However, local residents also identify that hate crime is a big issue: In 2003-4, 38% of Brighton and Hove residents thought that people being attacked because of their skin colour, ethnic origin or religion is a very big or fairly big problem in their local area, compared to a mean of 22% nationally653. This links in with the findings on high levels of violent crime and hate crime in the city highlighted in the crime and community safety section above of.

E.5 Sustainable transport and road safety E.5.1 Lack of adequate transport can contribute to inequality and exclusion in a number of ways. The Social Exclusion Unit identifies654:

650 The Trust for Developing Communities (2004) Extract from the Audit of Community Level Infrastructure in the Neighbourhood Renewal Areas in Brighton and Hove. 651 LGC Elections Centre. www.areaprofiles.audit- commission.gov.uk/(30vmgz55jpidqdyt3fqgpb55)/DetailPage.aspx?entity=10004856 652 ODPM Best Value General Survey. Available at: www.areaprofiles.audit- commission.gov.uk/(30vmgz55jpidqdyt3fqgpb55)/DetailPage.aspx?entity=10004855 653 ODPM Best Value General Survey. Available at: www.areaprofiles.audit- commission.gov.uk/(30vmgz55jpidqdyt3fqgpb55)/DetailPage.aspx?entity=10004855 654 Social Exclusion Unit (2003) Making the connections: final report on transport and social exclusion. Available from http://archive.cabinetoffice.gov.uk/seu/publications7790.html?did=229

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 150 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

• Barriers to employment: two out of five jobseekers say lack of transport is a barrier to getting a job • Barriers to learning: nearly half of 16–18-year-old students say they find their transport costs hard to meet • Barriers to healthcare: over a 12 month period, 1.4 million people miss, turn down or choose not to seek medical help because of transport problems. E.5.1 Older people and those disabled are likely to find it more difficult to access public transport, so these groups are likely to face additional difficulty in accessing healthcare and other services. E.5.2 Brighton and Hove analysis using the Accession accessibility mapping software identifies that most residents are within relatively short distance of healthcare, education, employment, leisure and food services, and that more deprived areas are generally well served by public transport links655.

Road safety E.5.3 The 2004 Local Transport Plan (LTP) for Brighton and Hove indicates that Brighton is making good progress in terms of reducing road casualty levels, and has succeeded in reducing casualty levels to a greater extent than the levels set out by central government in the ten year road casualty reduction programme656. E.5.4 Between 2001 and 2005 the number of people killed on the city’s roads has been decreasing year on year, with only four road deaths in 2004. However, there were 1,072 accidents in 2004 with 1,321 people recorded as being hurt657. E.5.5 More recent data for 2005 shows that although the overall road accident casualty rate is declining across the city, there were still 5.1 road accident casualties per 1,000 population in 2005658. This is higher than the average across England (4.8) and NRF areas as a whole (4.7).The relatively high level of traffic accidents across the city can be partially attributed to the high population density in many areas of the city, leading to high concentrations of traffic on certain roads. The influx of tourists and students less familiar with the traffic system and pattern in the city may also contribute towards higher levels of accidents as well as the relatively high levels of walking, cycling and bus use, leading to an increase in pedestrian journeys altering interactions between vehicles and pedestrians659.

E.6 Other issues

Environmental quality

Local environmental quality E.6.1 Residents in the city identify their first priority for improvement in the local area as “clean streets”, with 63% of residents identifying that vandalism, graffiti and other

655 Brighton and Hove City Council.Local Transport Plan 2006/7-2010/11. Available from http://www.brighton-hove.gov.uk/index.cfm?request=c3221 656 Brighton and Hove City Council.Local Transport Plan 2006/7-2010/11. Available from http://www.brighton-hove.gov.uk/index.cfm?request=c3221 page 63 657 ibid 658 Overall road accident casualty rate per 1,000 population (DfT), 2005 http://www.fti.neighbourhood.gov.uk/document.asp?id=146 659 Brighton and Hove City Council.Local Transport Plan 2006/7-2010/11. Available from http://www.brighton-hove.gov.uk/index.cfm?request=c3221 Page 64

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 151 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

deliberate damage to property or vehicles is a very big or fairly big problem in their local area660. E.6.2 National research identifies a strong relationship between levels of deprivation in an area and the quality of the immediate local environment661. E.6.3 Data on the quality of the outdoors environment is available from the Indices of Deprivation 2004 analysis, which includes measures of air quality, road traffic accidents, involving injury to pedestrians and cyclists. Analysis of the ID 2004 Outdoors Living Environment sub-domain (GIS maps of the indicators are provided on an accompanying CD) identifies that the areas with the poorest outdoor environmental quality are located mainly in the city centre.

Air quality E.6.4 The concept of “environmental equity” was investigated by the Neighbourhood Renewal Unit in 2004. This work examined the relationship between deprived areas and poor environmental quality and found:

• For five pollutants - NO2, PM10, sulphur dioxide (SO2), carbon monoxide (CO), and benzene – the highest concentrations are found in areas with the highest levels of deprivation662 • The distribution of NO2 is typical, showing that people in the 10% most deprived wards are typically exposed to concentrations 41% higher than those wards of average deprivation • Although there is a strong correlation overall for England, the research notes that this does not apply universally to all deprived areas. E.6.5 Our analysis of the correlation between the IMD 2004 and the Indices of Deprivation 2004 Air Quality indicator found that, although the most deprived area in Brighton showed among the worst air quality in the city, there was only a weak overall correlation between the two datasets.

Climate change E.6.6 A study linked to the then DETR’s UK Climate Impacts Programme (UKCIP) found that in the South East:663 • Storms, floods and drought will be more frequent and severe • Sea level will rise by 19—79cm, adding to wave energy and the destruction of shorelines. The South East can expect large increases in storm surge heights off its coastline. Taking all the 2080s scenarios, the “once in 50 years” storm surge off parts of our coast will increase by 20—140cm • By the 2080s, 30—60 more “extremely warm” days per year are expected. These days will be 3—8 degrees C hotter than at present

660 ODPM Best Value General Survey. Available at: www.areaprofiles.audit- commission.gov.uk/(30vmgz55jpidqdyt3fqgpb55)/DetailPage.aspx?entity=10004855 661 Brook Lyndhurst for ODPM /NRU (July 2004) Environmental Exclusion Review. 662 Environment Agency technical summary (2003) Environmental Quality and Social Deprivation quoted Brook Lyndhurst for ODPM /NRU (July 2004) Environmental Exclusion Review 663 Rising to the Challenge http://www.climatesoutheast.org.uk/downloads/RTC_Summary_Document.pdf and South East Climate Change Guide Part 2 – Impacts http://www.climatesoutheast.org.uk/downloads/SE_Climate_Change_Guide_P2&3.pdf

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 152 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

• The number of “intense rainfall” days, with 20mm of rain, could double by the 2080s and the amount of rainfall we now expect on one day in every 20 winters could increase by 15—30% • The risks of back-to-back drought or flood in successive years will be higher as a result • Without adaptation there could be water shortages every summer and more damage from flooding almost every winter • Floodplains such as those of the Upper Medway in Kent and River Arun in West Sussex may become more hazardous places to live. E.6.7 It is difficult to accurately forecast the direct effects of climate change on inequality across Brighton and Hove. Although if sea-levels rise significantly, it is likely that housing in Brighton will rise steeply in price with height above sea-level664. E.6.8 However, the indirect effects, for example through ‘green taxes’ on flights, road use, and consumer items, are likely to have a more significant impact on disposable incomes for those people with lower incomes. This impact could be ameliorated by additional subsidy of, for example, public transport. However, there is likely to be a limited role for local public sector agencies here.

664 See http://flood.firetree.net/ for Google maps of the UK coast-line showing sea-level rises of 0 to 14 metres.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 153 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Appendix F Key indicator maps

F.1.1 Key indicators have been mapped across the city, and provided as image files on CD. The following indicators have been mapped: Indicator Source Date Level Of Analysis Index of Multiple Deprivation 2004 Indices of Deprivation 2004, 2004 SOA ODPM Modelled IMD 2004 at Output Area level OCSI, based on ID 2004, ODPM 2007 OA Barriers to Housing and Services Domain Indices of Deprivation 2004, ODPM 2004 SOA Crime Domain Indices of Deprivation 2004, ODPM 2004 SOA Education Skills and Training Domain Indices of Deprivation 2004, ODPM 2004 SOA Employment Domain Indices of Deprivation 2004, ODPM 2004 SOA Health Deprivation and Disability Domain Indices of Deprivation 2004, ODPM 2004 SOA Income Domain Indices of Deprivation 2004, ODPM 2004 SOA Living Environment Domain Indices of Deprivation 2004, ODPM 2004 SOA Income Deprivation Affecting Children Indices of Deprivation 2004, ODPM 2004 SOA Index Income Deprivation Affecting Older People Indices of Deprivation 2004, ODPM 2004 SOA Index Wider Barriers to Housing Sub-domain Indices of Deprivation 2004, ODPM 2004 SOA Geographical Barriers to Services Sub- Indices of Deprivation 2004, ODPM 2004 SOA domain Skills Sub-domain (Education) Indices of Deprivation 2004, ODPM 2004 SOA Children and Young People Sub-domain Indices of Deprivation 2004, ODPM 2004 SOA (Education) Indoors Living Environment Sub-domain Indices of Deprivation 2004, ODPM 2004 SOA Outdoor Living Environment Domain Indices of Deprivation 2004, ODPM 2004 SOA IMD Mental Health Indicator Indices of Deprivation 2004, ODPM 2004 SOA Disability Living Allowance Department of Work and Pensions Nov 2006 SOA Pension Credit Department of Work and Pensions Nov 2006 SOA Incapacity Benefit / Severe Disablement Department of Work and Pensions Nov 2008 SOA Allowance Jobseeker Allowance Department of Work and Pensions May 2006 SOA Working age client group Department of Work and Pensions August SOA 2006 Income Support Department of Work and Pensions Nov 2006 SOA IB Severe Disabled Allowance, Mental Department of Work and Pensions Nov 2006 SOA Health Recorded violent crime offences Sussex Police/CADDIE 2006/2007 SOA Recorded total crime Sussex Police/CADDIE 2006/2007 SOA Children living in out of work families HMRC 2005 SOA People earning less than 10K a year CACI 2005 SOA Households with multiple needs 2001 Census 2001 2001 SOA Households with multiple needs 2001 Census 2001 2001 SOA Households with multiple needs 2001 Census 2001 2001 SOA Children with Special Educational Needs CYPT (2006) PLASC 2006 SOA Children Eligible for Free School Meals CYPT (2006) PLASC 2006 SOA

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 154 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Appendix G Bibliography of sources

G.1.1 The following sources have been used in this project: AboutProperty.co.uk, Property News, House prices rise fastest in Truro, 22 May 2006. Available at: www.aboutproperty.co.uk/News/house-prices/halifax/house-prices-rise-fastest-in- truro-$440508.htm [accessed 11 September 2007].

Age Concern (2007) Improving Services and Support for Older People with Mental Health Problems, Age Concern. Available at: www.ageconcern.org.uk/AgeConcern/Documents/full_report.pdf [accessed: 29 August 2007].

Ahmed,S; Holloway,S; Palmer, J & Watson, L. (2003) Economic and Social Audit of the Community and Voluntary Sector in Brighton and Hove, North Harbour Consulting Limited.

Allen, M. (2003) Into the mainstream: Care leavers entering work, education and training, JRF. Available at: http://www.jrf.org.uk/KNOWLEDGE/findings/socialpolicy/053.asp [accessed: 29 August 2007].

Audit Commission (2003) Services for disabled children - A review of services for disabled children and their families. Available at: http://www.audit- commission.gov.uk/reports/NATIONAL-REPORT.asp?CategoryID=andProdID=EE944EBA- B414-4d76-903E-A4CA0E304989andSectionID=sect1# [accessed: 27 August 2007].

Barnados (2006) Failed by the System - The views of young care leavers on their educational experiences. Available at: www.barnardos.org.uk/failed_by_the_system_report.pdf [accessed 11 September 2007].

Bennett, J. (2002) Cited in: News Magazine- European Social Fund. Available at: www.esf.gov.uk/01_News/61_News_Magazine_- _Issue_6_(Jul_02)/Compendium.asp?txtSearch=%7CSocial+inclusion%20%7C#bookmark55614 9201News61NewsMagazine-Issue6Jul02Compendiumasp1 [accessed 11 September 2007].

Bradshaw, J; Levitas, R & Finch, N. (1999) Lone Parents, Poverty and Social Exclusion. Working Paper 11. Adapted from the 1999 Poverty and Social Exclusion Survey of Britain, Joseph Rowntree Foundation. Available from: www.bris.ac.uk/poverty/pse/99PSE-WP11.pdf [accessed: 28 August 2007].

Brighton and Hove 2020 Partnership (2007). Creating the city of Opportunities: A sustainable community strategy for the city of Brighton & Hove. Available from http://www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/web/sites/site2020/holdingpage/files/communityStrategy.pdf [accessed: 27 August 2007].

Brighton and Hove and Adur - Area Investment Framework (2003). See: www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/regeneration/AIFFinalReport-December03[PDF,609kb].pdf [accessed 11 September 2007].

Brighton and Hove Children and Young People’s Plan (2006-2009). Available at: www.brightonhove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/cypp/CYPPJulyV4.pdf [accessed 11 September 2007].

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 155 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Brighton and Hove City Council (2001) Brighton and Hove Homeless strategy for single homeless people, Brighton and Hove City Council. Available at: www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/housing/shstrategy.pdf [accessed 29 August 2007].

Brighton and Hove City Council (2003): Best Value Review. Available from peace.brighton-hove.gov.uk/.../$File/Item+20+-+BVR+Economic+Development+full+Report.doc [accessed: 27 August 2007].

Brighton and Hove City Council (2003) Notice of Motion: Tackling Drug/Alcohol Abuse and Associated Crime and Disorder in Brighton and Hove: Improved Ways of Working. Available at: http://216.239.59.104/search?q=cache:ZR5oUC25DHMJ:peace.brighton- hove.gov.uk/Intranet/CommitteeMgt.NSF/0/F822BA90DE56453980256DA4005713DF/%24File/I tem%2B11(e)%2BNM-Drug%2Babuse- partnerships.doc+%2237+national+crack+priority+areas%22andhl=enandct=clnkandcd=1andgl= uk [accessed: 27 August 2007].

Brighton and Hove Economic Partnership (2005): Brighton and Hove Economy Strategy 2005- 2008.Available at: www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/economicdevelopment/Brighton___Hove_Economic_Strategy.pdf [accessed 13 Sep. 07 2007].

Brighton and Hove Socio-Economic Baseline Report (2003) Brighton & Hove and Adur Area Investment Framework. All chapters available at: http://www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/index.cfm?skin=textonly&request=c1120682 [accessed: 27 August 2007].

Brighton and Hove City Council - Local Transport Plan 2006/7-2010/11. Available from www.brighton-hove.gov.uk/index.cfm?request=c3221

Brighton and Hove Youth Homelessness Strategy 2007- 10. Available at: www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/housing/Youth_Homelessness_Strategy.pdf [accessed 29 August 2007].

Brighton and Hove City Council (2001) Challenging Racism - A Celebrating Diversity guide, Brighton and Hove City Council. Available at: http://www.celebratingdiversity.co.uk/forms/CDracism.pdf [accessed: 27 August 2007].

Brighton and Hove City Council (2004). Memorandum to the Select Committee on Office of the Deputy Prime Minister: Housing, Planning, Local Government and the Regions (HOM 47). Available at: www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm200304/cmselect/cmodpm/1116/1116we50.htm [accessed: 27 August 2007].

Brighton and Hove City Council (2004), Setting the Scene: a Review of Brighton and Hove Economy.

Brighton and Hove City Council (2006) Race Equality Scheme 2006 – 2009. Available at: www.brighton-hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/performance_team/RES_2006- 2009_Final_P_R_19_April.pdf [accessed: 27 August 2007].

Brighton & Hove (March 2007). Refresh of the Local Area Agreement for Brighton & Hove 2007 -2008. Available from www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/performance_team/Brighton___Hove_LAA_07-08.pdf [accessed: 27 August 2007].

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 156 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Brighton and Hove Regeneration Partnership (2007) NRA data taken from Brighton and Hove PCT, Strategy to Reduce Health Inequalities in Brighton and Hove: Technical Supplement 2007. Available from http://www.brightonandhovepct.nhs.uk/healthylives/inequalities/index.asp

Brighton and Hove Housing Strategy Team (2007). Statistical Bulletin 2006/7 Q4, Issue 10, May 2007.

Brighton and Hove PCT (2007). Strategy to Reduce Health Inequalities in Brighton and Hove: Technical Supplement 2007. Available from: http://www.brightonandhovepct.nhs.uk/healthylives/inequalities/index.asp [accessed: 27 August 2007].

Brighton and Hove Youth Homelessness Strategy 2007- 10. Available at: www.brighton- hove.gov.uk/downloads/bhcc/housing/Youth_Homelessness_Strategy.pdf [accessed 29 August 2007].

Brighton Business (2007) Business supports rehabilitation of ex-offenders. Available at: http://www.brightonbusiness.co.uk/htm/ni20051217.987297.htm [accessed: 27 August 2007].

Borsay, A. (2004) Disability and Social Policy in Britain since 1750. Basingstoke: Palgrave.

Browne, K. (2007) Count me in too - LGBT Lives in Brighton and Hove - Initial Findings: Academic Report. Available at: www.spectrum- lgbt.org/cmiToo/downloads/CMIT_AcademicReport_final_June07.pdf [accessed: 29 August 2007].

Burchardt, T. (2005) The education and employment of disabled young people: Frustrated ambition, published for the Foundation by The Policy Press. Extract available at: www.jrf.org.uk/knowledge/findings/socialpolicy/0565.asp [accessed: 29 August 2007].

Carers National Association (1998) Ignored and Invisible: carers' experiences of the NHS. Carers National Association. Available at: www.carersinformation.org.uk/showdoc2.asp?id=707&maincatid=49&dt=118&zz [accessed: 11 September 2007].

Carers National Association, 2000, ‘Caring on the Breadline: the financial implications of caring’, Carers National Association (now Carers UK).

Care Services Improvement Partnership (2006) Mental Health, Destitution and Asylum-Seekers - A study of destitute asylum-seekers in the dispersal areas of the South East of England, Care Services Improvement Partnership. Available at: www.asylumscotland.org.uk/assets/downloads/research/Mental%20Health,%20Destitution%20an d%20AS%20FINAL%20REPORT.pdf [accessed 27 August 2007].

Carers UK (1995) Young Carers and Education, London: Borough of Enfield, Education Department, cited in Dearden, C and Becjer, S. (2003) Young Carers and education, Carers UK. Available at: http://www.carersuk.org/Policyandpractice/PolicyResources/Research/yceduc.pdf [accessed: 27 August 2007].

Carers UK (2006) In the Know – The Importance of Information for Carers. Available at: Carers UK (2006)

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 157 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

In the Know – The Importance of Information for Carers. Available at: www.carersuk.org/Policyandpractice/PolicyResources/Research/InTheKnowFinalCopy.pdf [accessed: 27 August 2007].

Carers UK (2007) Real Change – Not Short Change. Available at: www.carersuk.org/Policyandpractice/PolicyResources/Research/ResearchRealchangenotshortch angeMay2007.pdf.

Carers UK (2005) Caring and Pensioner Poverty - A report on older carers, employment and benefits. Available at: www.carersuk.org/Policyandpractice/PolicyResources/Research/ResearchCaringandpensionerpo vertyNovember2005.pdf [accessed: 27 August 2007].

DWP (2004) Drug and Alcohol Use: Barriers to employment, DWP. Available at: www.dwp.gov.uk/jad/2004/w193rep.pdf [accessed: 27 August 2007].

Census 2001. [online] www.statistics.gov.uk/census2001/census2001.asp [accessed: 27 August 2007].

Commission for Racial Equality (CRE) Gypsies and Travellers: The Facts: http://www.cre.gov.uk/gdpract/g_and_t_facts.html#three [accessed: 27 August 2007].

Council for Disabled Children (2003) Disabled Children, Their Families and Child Poverty- End Child Poverty, Briefing Paper, Council for Disabled Children. Available at: http://pegasus.xssl.net/~admin315/assets/files/reports/Child_Poverty_and_Disability_A4.pdf [accessed 11 September 2007].

Cox, S. (2005) A ‘NEET’ solution, BBC News. Available at: news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/magazine/4158696.stm [accessed: 11 September 2007].

Cull, M., Platzer, H. and Balloch, S. (2006) On My Own: Understanding the Experiences and Needs of Homeless Lesbian, Gay, Bisexual and Transgender Youth, University of Brighton - Health and Social Policy Research Centre. Available at: http://www.brighton.ac.uk/sass/research/reports/LGBT_summary.pdf [accessed: 28 August 2007].

Department for Education and Skills (2005). Ensuring the attainment of white working class boys in writing. Available at: http://publications.teachernet.gov.uk/eOrderingDownload/1397- 2005PDF-EN-01.pdf [accessed: 28 August 2007].

Department of Health (2007) Black and minority ethnic mental health [range of online reports]. Available at: www.dh.gov.uk/en/Policyandguidance/Healthandsocialcaretopics/Mentalhealth/BMEmentalhealth/ index.htm [accessed 11 September 2007]

Disabled children: facts and figures (2005) Available at: www.everychildmatters.gov.uk/socialcare/disabledchildren/facts/ [accessed : 27 August 2007].

Disability Rights Commission (2006) Hate Crime Against Disabled people in Scotland - a survey report. Available at: http://www.drc- gb.org/about_us/drc_scotland/library/other_issues/hate_crime_against_disabled_pe.aspx [accessed: 27 August 2007].

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 158 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Douglas Scott, S., Pringle, A. and Lumsdaine, C. (2004) Sexual Exclusion -Homophobia and health inequalities: a review, UK’s Gay Men’s Health Network. Available at: http://spectrum- lgbt.org/downloads/health/gmhn_report.pdf [accessed 28 August 2007].

Doyal, L. (2001) Sex, gender, and health: the need for a new approach, BMJ 323:1061-1063. DTZ Consulting and Research (2006) Housing, Economic Development and Productivity: Literature Review. Available at: www.berr.gov.uk/files/file32669.pdf [accessed 11 September 2007].

DTLR (2001). 1 Neighbourhood regeneration: lessons and evaluation evidence from ten Single Regeneration Budget case studies. Urban Research Summary Number 1. Available from http://www.renewal.net/Documents/RNET/Research/Neighbourhoodregenerationlessons.pdf [accessed: 27 August 2007].

Department for Education and Skills (1999) A Fresh Start - improving literacy and numeracy.

Department for Education and Skills (2003). The Skills for Life survey: A national needs and impact survey of literacy, numeracy and ICT skills. London: Department for Education and Skills. Available at: www.dfes.gov.uk/research/programmeofresearch/index.cfm?type=5&keywordlist1=0&keywordli st2=0&keywordlist3=0&andor=or&keyword=skills+for+life&x=35&y=12 [accessed 11 September 2007].

DWP (2001) Barriers to employment for offenders and ex-offenders, DWP Research Report, No 155, Leeds: CDS. Available at: http://www.dwp.gov.uk/asd/asd5/155summ.asp [accessed: 11 September 2007].

DWP (2004) Families and Children in Britain: Findings from the 2002 Families and Children Study (FACS), Department of Work and Pensions. Available at: www.dwp.gov.uk/asd/asd5/summ2003-2004/206summ.pdf [accessed 11 September 2007].

EQUAL, ‘A Review of barriers to Employment for Roma and Travellers’ , EQUAL: Brighton & Hove.

Fitzpatrick, S. and Klinker, S. (2000) Research on single homelessness in Britain, Joseph Rowntree Foundation. Available at: http://www.jrf.org.uk/Knowledge/findings/housing/410.asp [accessed 29 August 2007].

Fletcher, D.R; Woodhill, D. and Herrington, A. (1998) Building Bridges into Employment and Training for Ex-offenders. York Publishing Services for the Joseph Rowntree Foundation.

Ford, R. and Marsh, A. (1998) Health Declines for Lone Parents and Their Children, PSI. Press release available at: http://www.psi.org.uk/news/pressrelease.asp?news_item_id=45 [accessed: 28 August 2007]

Forrest, R & Kearns, A. (2001) ‘Social Cohesion, Social Capital and the Neighbourhood’ Urban Studies, Volume 38, Issue. 12, pp. 2125 – 2143.

Freedman, N. (2007) Thugs spared jail for gang attack on students, The Argus, 7 August 2007. Available from: http://www.theargus.co.uk/mostpopular.var.1599243.mostcommented.thugs_spared_jail_for_ga ng_attack_on_students.php [accessed 11 September 2007].

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 159 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Greater London Authority (GLA) When Work Doesn’t Pay, London Housing, No 113 Apr 2005 Health Development Agency (2003) Social capital for health: Investigating the links between social capital and health using the British Household Panel Survey, Health Development Agency, NHS.

Health Development Agency (2003) Social capital for health: Investigating the links between social capital and health using the British Household Panel Survey, Health Development Agency, NHS.

Helliwell, J.F & Putnam, R.D. (1995) Economic growth and social capital in Italy, Eastern Economic Journal.

Home Office (2002) Women Drug Users and Drugs Service Provision: service level responses to engagement and retention, Home Office. Available at: http://drugs.homeoffice.gov.uk/publication-search/diversity/women-drugs-users.pdf?view=Binary [accessed: 27 August 2007].

Home Office (2003) Youth homelessness and substance use: report to the drugs and alcohol research unit, Home Office Research, Development and Statistics Directorate. Available at: http://www.homeoffice.gov.uk/rds/pdfs2/hors258.pdf [accessed 29 August 2007].

Home Office (2004) Estimating prevalence of problem drug use: multiple methods in Brighton, Liverpool and London, Home Office. Available at: http://www.homeoffice.gov.uk/rds/pdfs04/rdsolr3604.pdf [accessed: 27 August 2007].

Home Office (2007) Minister for crime reduction visits Brighton and Hove on tackling drugs day. Available at: www.gnn.gov.uk/Content/Detail.asp?ReleaseID=286465andNewsAreaID=2 [accessed: 27 August 2007].

Home Office (2007) Stay safe if you're elderly. Available at: http://www.homeoffice.gov.uk/crime-victims/how-you-can-prevent-crime/staying-safe-if-elderly/ [accessed 29 August 2007].

House of Commons website http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm200304/cmselect/cmodpm/1116/1116we50.htm [accessed: 27 August 2007].

Hospital Episode Statistics (HES) by Ethnicity http://www.neighbourhood.statistics.gov.uk/dissemination/datasetList.do?JSAllowed=true&Functi on=&%24ph=60&CurrentPageId=60&step=1&CurrentTreeIndex=- 1&searchString=&datasetFamilyId=1713&Next.x=12&Next.y=17&bhcp=1

Hunt, R. and Jensen, J. (2007) The experiences of young gay people in Britain’s schools – The School Report, Stonewall. Available at: www.stonewall.org.uk/documents/school_report.pdf [accessed: 27 August 2007].

HM Treasury (2002) The Role of the Voluntary and Community Sector in Service Delivery – A Cross-Cutting Review.

Joseph Rowntree Foundation (1996) The housing needs of ex-prisoners. Available at: www.jrf.org.uk/knowledge/findings/housing/pdf/H178.pdf [accessed 27 August 2007].

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 160 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Klee, H. McLean, I and Yavorsky, C. (2002) Employing drug users: Individual and systemic barriers to rehabilitation, YPS in association with JRF.

Knack, S. & Keefer, P. (1997) ‘Does social capital have an economic payoff? A cross-country investigation’ Quarterly Journal of Economics, Nov 97, Vol. 112 Issue 4, pp. 1251-1288.

Kodz, J. and Eccles, J. (2001) Evaluation of New Deal 50 Plus. Qualitative Evidence from Clients: Second Phase, Employment Service Research Report ESR70. Available at: www.employment- studies.co.uk/summary/summary.php?id=esr70 [accessed 29 August 2007].

Learning and Skills Council: Sussex (2005) Strategic Area Review Report for Brighton and Hove. Available at: http://readingroom.lsc.gov.uk/lsc/2005/ourbusiness/strategy/nat- StARsussexbrightonandhove-re-2005.pdf [accessed 11 September 2007].

Learning and Skills Council (2005) Working together in practice. Available at: http://readingroom.lsc.gov.uk/LSC/2005/quality/goodpractice/working-together-in-practice-vol- 2-working-smarter.pdf [accessed 13 September 2007].

Lloyd, T. (1999) Young Men, the Job Market and Gendered Work. York Publishing Services for the Joseph Rowntree Foundation.

Mental Health foundation (2002) The Mental Health Needs of Homeless Children and Young People (up date), Vol. 3, Issue 22. Available at: http://www.mentalhealth.org.uk/publications/?EntryId=38765 [accessed: 29 August 2007].

Neighbourhoods Results – Local and National Context (2001) SRB5 Participation Programme – consulting people and communities in Brighton and Hove, Brighton and Hove Regeneration Partnership.

Office of the Deputy Prime Minister (2003) Housing and Black and Minority Ethnic Communities: Review of the evidence base, Office of the Deputy Prime Minister. Available at: www.renewal.net/Documents/RNET/Research/Housingblackminority.pdf [accessed 11 September 2007].

Ofsted (1999). Raising the attainment of ethnic minority pupils, OFSTED Publications Centre. Available at: www.ofsted.gov.uk/assets/771.pdf [accessed 11 September 2007].

Portes, A. (1998) ‘Social Capita;: Its Origins and Applications in Modern Sociology’ Annual Review of Sociology, Vol. 24, Issue .1

Royal Bank Scotland, Press Release. Available at: www.rbs.com/media03.asp?id=MEDIA_CENTRE/PRESS_RELEASES/2004/JULY/20_LONE_PAR ENTS

Royal College of Psychiatrists (2003) The mental health of students in higher education. Available at: http://www.hero.ac.uk/uk/inside_he/archives/2003/a_sane_agenda5482.cfm [accessed: 28 August 2007].

Scottish Accessible Information Forum (2001) Enabling Information: A report on improving access and raising standards in information services for disabled people and their carers in Scotland. Available at: http://www.saifscotland.org.uk/publications/EnablRpt/Background/Background2.html [accessed: 27 August 2007].

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 161 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Select Committee on Office of the Deputy Prime Minister: Housing, Planning, Local Government and the Regions (2004) Memorandum by Brighton and Hove City Council (HOM 47). Available at: www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm200304/cmselect/cmodpm/1116/1116we50.htm [accessed 11 September 2007].

Select Committee on Education and Skills (2006) Memorandum submitted by Stonewall. Available at: http://www.parliament.the-stationery- office.com/pa/cm200607/cmselect/cmeduski/85/85we21.htm [accessed 28 August 2007].

Social Exclusion Unit (1999) Bridging the gap: New opportunities for 16-18 year olds not in education, employment or training, Cm 405, London: The Stationery Office. Available at: http://www.asylumsupport.info/publications/socialexclusionunit/thegap.pdf [accessed 11 September 2007].

Social Exclusion Unit (2003) Making the connections: final report on transport and social exclusion. Available at: http://archive.cabinetoffice.gov.uk/seu/publications7790.html?did=229 [accessed 11 September 2007].

Social Exclusion Unit (2004) Breaking the Cycle of Social Exclusion. Available at: http://archive.cabinetoffice.gov.uk/seu/page6396.html?id=42 [accessed 11 September 2007].

South East Plan (2006) Sussex Coast Spatial Strategy. Available at: www.southeast- ra.gov.uk/southeastplan/plan/march_2006/core_document/016_seera_sep_e02.pdf[accessed 11 September 2007].

Stafford, B; Heaver, C; Ashworth, K; Bates, C; Walker, R; McKay, S. & Trickey, H. (1999) Work and Young Men. York Publishing Services for the Joseph Rowntree Foundation.

Targosz, S; Bebbington, P; Lewis, G; Brugha, T; Jenkins, R; Farrell, M & Meltzer, H. (2003) Lone mothers, social exclusion and depression. Psychological Medicine, 33 (4). pp. 715-722.

Trust for Developing Communities (2004) Extract from the Audit of Community Level Infrastructure in the Neighbourhood Renewal Areas in Brighton and Hove.

Wilson, C. & Johnson, J.EQUAL Brighton and Hove Research

Work Foundation (2006), Ideopolis: Knowledge city Regions, Brighton Case Study.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 162 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Appendix H Geography of Brighton and Hove

Tier 1 Priority Neighborhoods Neighbourh Resident Description ood population Renewal (MYE Area 2004)665 Tier 1 Neighbourhood Renewal Areas East 20,200 The NDC area is situated in the East of Brighton covering much Brighton of the Whitehawk and Moulsecoomb estates NDC Bevendean 4,600 The Bevendean NRA is situated in the east of Brighton. The demographic profile shows a high proportion of children, an above average percentage of people looking after home/family and a high percentage of people who are permanently sick or disabled. There is also a high percentage of people with no qualifications

Bristol 1,600 The Bristol Estate NRA is situated to the north of Kemp Town in Estate East Brighton in a small estate consisting of blocks of low and high-rise flats. The area has a high population of elderly and lone parents, high levels of sickness and disability and high unemployment.

Brunswick 15,000 The Brunswick and Regency NRA is located in the centre of and Brighton and Hove. The area is characterized by high qualification Regency levels, however unemployment is also high and overcrowding is double the city average.

Hangleton, 14,300 The Hangleton, Knoll, Laburnum and Moyne NRA is located in Knoll, north west Hove and have a resident population of Laburnum approximately 14,300 with 6,000 households. The demographic and Moyne profile shows a high proportion of very young people in the area (under 16s) and an above average number of older people when compared to the city average

Hollingdean 9,400 Hollingdean NRA is located in north east Brighton between Ditchling Road and Lewes Road

Portland 11,700 Portland Road and Clarendon NRA covers the Aldrington area Road and either side of Portland Road including Poets Corner as well as Clarendon the Ingram Crescent estate and the Clarendon estate to the west of Hove Station.

665 Populations are based on ‘best-fit’ SOA approximations of the NRA areas

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 163 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Portslade 19,500 Portslade NRA covers the town of Portslade to the west of Hove with a resident population of 19,500 and 7,900 households. The area has a more stable population with a higher proportion of children and lower proportion of private rented households than the city average.

Queens 5,800 The Queens Park and Craven Vale NRA covers the area to the Park and north east of Queens Park near the racecourse. The area’s Craven Vale demographic profile shows an above average number of young people when compared to the city average (under 16) and a high percentage of unemployed people. The number of lone parent households with dependent children is high, along with the number of permanently sick or disabled

Tarner 6,200 The Tarner NRA is located in central Brighton to the east of the Old Steine. The area contains a relatively large BME population - around 10% of households were BME at the 2001 census and significantly higher unemployment than the city as a whole.

Tier 2 Priority Neighbourhoods • Coldean • Hollingbury • Meadowview • St James Street and Kemp Town • St Peters • Woodingdean Census Output Areas H.1.1 2001 Census Output Areas (OAs) are the primary new geography created for the purpose of presenting 2001 Census results. OAs are built from clusters of adjacent unit postcodes and therefore represent the smallest Census geography; they are essentially the building block from which all Census data are collected. Census statistics for higher level geographies, such as SOAs, 2003 wards, districts and regions and so on, are created by aggregating the constituent OAs. H.1.2 OAs are designed to have similar population sizes and be as socially homogenous as possible (based on tenure of household and dwelling type). Wherever possible, urban/rural mixes are avoided (i.e. postcodes in an OA should be either all urban or all rural). OAs usually have approximately regular shapes and they are usually constrained by boundaries such as major roads. In order to ensure the confidentiality of data, OAs are required to have a specified minimum population size. The Office for National Statistics set the minimum OA size at 40 resident households and 100 resident persons but the recommended size is actually rather larger at 125 households. These size thresholds mean that unusually small wards and parishes are incorporated into larger OAs. H.1.3 In total, there are 165,665 OAs in England. Of these, 918 lie within Brighton and Hove.

Super Output Areas (SOAs) H.1.4 Super Output Areas (SOAs) are a statistical geography created for the purpose of presenting the 2001 Census, the Indices of Deprivation 2004, and other neighbourhood

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 164 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

statistics. SOAs are designed to produce areas of approximately equal population. There are different layers to the SOA geography: here, we examine ‘lower layer’ and ‘middle layer’:

Lower Layer Super Output Areas (LSOA) H.1.5 There are 32,482 lower layer SOAs in England, of which 164 lie within Brighton and Hove. LSOA have mean population of approximately 1500 people. Although there remains a degree of variation around this mean of 1500 persons (the smallest lower layer SOA population in England is just under 1000 whilst the highest population is over 6000), the large majority of lower layer SOAs have populations close to 1500. This standardised population size makes the lower layer SOA geography well suited to identifying smaller pockets of deprivation that may be averaged out over large wards. H.1.6 Across Brighton and Hove the largest LSOA has a population of 3,200 and the smallest has a population of 1100.

Middle Layer Super Output Areas (MSOA) H.1.7 There are 6,781 middle layer SOAs in England, of which 33 lie within Brighton and Hove. MSOAs have a mean population of around 7,500 (approximately five LSOAs) with MSOA populations across Brighton and Hove varying from 5,700 to 9,500.

Wards H.1.8 Wards are essentially units of electoral administration and their boundaries therefore change relatively frequently (compared to higher level geographies such as districts). This makes the ward geography difficult to use when attempting to monitor social change over time. H.1.9 To reduce this problem of ward boundary changes, the 2001 Census defined two sets of ward boundaries, constructed from smaller Census Output Areas (discussed below): ‘Census Area Statistics’ (CAS) wards; and ‘Standard Table’ (ST) wards. All ward level data presented within this report are based on ‘Census Area Statistics’ (CAS) ward boundaries. The 2001 Census website contains a wealth of useful explanation regarding the differences between the two sets of Census wards - http://www.statistics.gov.uk/geography/default.asp. H.1.10 CAS wards represent the electoral ward boundaries as at the beginning of 2003 (with a small number of wards merged together in order not to disclose information that might be used to identify individuals). For this reason, they are often referred to as ‘2003 wards’. As this report uses only 2003 wards (i.e. CAS wards). Electoral boundaries have not changed in Brighton and Hove since 2003. H.1.11 2003 wards have an average population of around 6,000, however in Brighton and Hove they are larger. There are 21 wards in Brighton and Hove with populations ranging from around 8,300 (Central Hove) to 15,700 (Moulsecoomb and Bevendean). Below are lists of each wards with a brief description:

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 165 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Ward Description Brunswick and Brunswick and Adelaide is located in central Brighton and Hove between Adelaide Embassy Court and Palmeira Square. The ward forms part of the Brunswick and Regency NRA and has a population of 8,900 (2001 census).

Central Hove Central Hove is located in the area around Church Road in Hove. The area has a population of around 8,300.

East Brighton East Brighton contains the Whitehawk and Bristol Estate’s as well as east Kemp town. The whole of the Bristol Estate NRA and part of the East Brighton NDC area are also located in the ward. The ward has a population of 13,500.

Goldsmid Goldsmid is the area in Hove either side of the railway line from Brighton to Hove stations and Clarendon estate. The ward has a population of around 13,700.

Hangleton and Hangleton and Knoll contains the Hangleton, Knoll, Laburnum and Moyne Knoll NRA and has a population of 14,300.

Hanover and Hanover and Elm Grove includes the area of Hanover and the housing to the Elm Grove east of the Lewes Road and part of the Queens Park and Craven Vale NRA. The ward has a population of 13,800

Hollingbury Hollingbury and Stanmer includes the Hollingdean NRA area plus the Coldean and Stanmer estate, the Sussex and University campus at Falmer and Stanmer Village. The ward has a population of 14,500.

Moulsecoomb Moulsecoomb and Bevendean ward contains the Moulsecoomb estate, Lower and and Upper Bevendean as well as part of the Brighton University campus. The Bevendean ward contains the Bevendean NRA and part of the East Brighton NDC area. The ward has a population of 15,700

North North Portslade contains the areas of Mile Oak, Portslade village, much of the Portslade Portslade NRA. The area has a population of 10,300.

Patcham Patcham contains Patcham village and west Hollingbury in North Brighton. The area has a population of 13,900.

Preston Park Preston Park contains the area around Preston Park and Fiveways. The area has a population of 13,400.

Queen's Park Queen’s Park ward includes the NRA areas of Tarner and part of Queens Park and Craven Vale. The area also includes west Kemptown. The ward has a population of 13,100.

Regency Regency is situated central Brighton along the main shopping areas between the Palace Pier and the border with Hove. Part of the ward is located in the Brunswick and Regency NRA and has a population of 8,500 (2001 census).

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 166 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Rottingdean Rottingdean Coastal is located in the east of the Brighton and Hove district Coastal containing Sussex Square, Black Rock, Roedean, Brighton Marina, Rottingdean, Ovingdean and West Saltdean. The area has a population of 12,400.

St. Peter's and St Peter’s and North Laine contains the areas around the North Laine and North Laine London Road. The area has a population of 13,800.

South South Portslade forms part of the Portslade NRA. The area has a population Portslade of 9,200.

Stanford Stanford incorporates West Blatchington, Hove Park and the Goldstone Valley. The area has a population of 10,100.

Westbourne Westbourne contains areas at the eastern end of Portland road and New Church road in Hove including Aldrington and Poets Corner. The ward has a population of 9,100.

Wish Wish contains areas at the western end of Portland road and New Church road in Hove bordering Portslade. The area has a population of 9,500.

Withdean Withdean contains the areas of Withdean and Westdene in the north of Brighton. The area has a population of 13,400.

Woodingdean Woodingdean contains the town of Woodingdean to the east of Brighton. The ward has a population of 9,500.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 167 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Appendix I Small cities comparator areas

I.1.1 Throughout this report, 15 comparator small cities across England have been used to benchmark the position and performance of Brighton and Hove. Where data is available, we have compared Brighton and Hove against a ‘small cities’ comparator made from aggregating data across the following cities: • Blackpool • Coventry • Derby • Hull • Luton • Milton Keynes • Northampton • Norwich • Oxford • Plymouth • Preston • Southampton • Southend • Sunderland • Swindon

How these cities are defined I.1.2 We have used as our starting point the 42 ‘Primary Urban Areas’ identified and analysed in the State of the English Cities report666. Primary Urban Areas are defined in the State of the English Cities project as a ‘best fit’ aggregate of component Districts.

How these cities were selected I.1.3 We have selected those small cities where: • The Primary Urban Area population and the component District population is below 350,000 • The Primary Urban Area population and the component District population is above 150,000 • The Primary Urban Area is a single small city, not a sprawling set of smaller towns • The Primary Urban Area is not part of a larger Metropolitan District • The Primary Urban Area is not ‘over-bounded’, in other words we have excluded those cities where the component Districts contain a large rural hinterland I.1.4 The sections below provide more detailed analysis of how the cities were selected and defined.

Brighton and Hove compared with other small cities

666 ODPM, Parkinson et al (March 2006), State of the English Cities.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 168 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Summary Brighton Small Cities England (%) and Hove (%) Working Age DWP Benefit Claimants 15% 15% 14% Households with multiple needs667 1.3% 1.2% 1.1% Income Support (IS) 6.7% 6.0% 5.7% Jobseekers Allowance (JSA) 2.8% 2.7% 2.2% Incapacity Benefit/Severe Disablement 7.7% 7.6% 6.7% (SDA) Disability Living Allowance (DLA) 4.5% 5.0% 4.3% Children Living in out of work 23% 21% 20% households Working age adults with below level 2 26% 35% 33% qualifications Working age adults with degree level 38% 24% 27% qualifications Pupils gaining 5 or more GCSE grades 55% 53% 59% A*-C Overall recorded crime rate (BCS 69 per 73 per 1,000 61 per 1,000 comparator)668 1,000 pop. pop. pop. Violent crime rate669 30 23 19 Black and Ethnic Minority Population 5.7% 7.1% 9.1% Lone Parent Households 28% 28% 26% Living in Social Rented Housing 15% 19% 19% Jobs growth 2001-2005670 7.2% 6.1% - VAT registered enterprise stock, growth 31% 16% - 1995-2005671

Jobs levels show slightly faster growth in Brighton than the average for small cities across England I.1.5 Brighton has experienced significant jobs growth between 1999 and 2005 with the numbers of jobs growing by 7.2% (149,000 jobs in the city in 2005 compared with 139,000 in 1999). This is slightly faster than the average jobs growth across the ‘all small cities’ comparator, where jobs growth was 6.1% over the same period.

VAT registered business levels have been growing at a significantly faster rate across Brighton than the region as a whole I.1.6 The figure below examines the growth in of VAT registered enterprises across Brighton and Hove and the small city comparator area between 1995 and 2005.

667 Households with the following characteristics: worklessness (unemployed or economically inactive), no qualifications, have poor health or limiting long-term illness, and live in housing lacking amenities or overcrowded 668 Rate refers to rate per 1,000 population 669 Rate refers to rate per 1,000 population 670 Rate refers to percentage change between 2001 and 2005 671 Rate refers to percentage change between 1995 and 2005

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 169 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

I.1.7 The total number of VAT registered enterprises across the city has also been growing at a significantly faster rate, with a 31% increase in the number of VAT registered businesses across Brighton between 1995 and 2005 representing an increase of total business stock of almost a third across the city. This is double the rate of increase experienced across small cities as a whole (16% increase between 1995 and 2005 for the ‘all small cities’ comparator).

However population growth is significantly slower than in other small cities I.1.8 Brighton and Hove’s population has only grown by 0.6% between 2001 and 2006. By contrast ‘all small cities’ have experienced average growth of 3.6% over the period. I.1.9 This suggests that the ratio of jobs per resident in Brighton is increasing at a faster rate than across other small cities, with job growth outpacing population growth across the city672.

Brighton and Hove has a significantly more highly educated workforce than other small cities I.1.10 According to the most recent estimates, the proportion of working age residents with degree qualification in Brighton is 38.4%, well above the ‘all small cities’ average of 23.5%673. I.1.11 By contrast the proportion of people with below level 2 qualifications (5 or more GCSE grades A*-C or equivalent) is lower across Brighton and Hove (25.6%) than the ‘all small cities’ average (34.8%)674. I.1.12 Educational attainment is also higher among children living in Brighton and Hove. However the educational attainment across the city is similar to levels across other small cities with just under 55% of pupils resident in Brighton achieving 5+ GCSE in 2005 compared with 53% across Small cities as a whole.

Brighton has a similar proportion of working-age people receiving DWP Benefits to the ‘all small cities’ average I.1.13 Around 15% of the total working-age population in Brighton and Other Small Cities alike receive working age DWP benefits675.

672Jobs density can not be easily calculated at the moment because the appropriate denominator has not been updated following the re-development of ONS population estimates. 673 APS 2006 674 APS 2006

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 170 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

I.1.14 The figure below shows the baselined trend in DWP benefit claimants between 2001 and 2006

I.1.15 The chart shows that the proportion of working-age people receiving DWP benefits declined slightly in Brighton between 2001 and 2006, compared with a slight rise across ‘all small cities’. However the differences between Brighton and the comparator cities are small, and unlikely to be significant.

Workless levels are similar across Brighton and the ‘all small cities’ … I.1.16 Workless levels are also similar across Brighton and other small cities with 2.9% receiving JSA across Brighton against 2.7% across small cities, and similar proportions of IBSDA claimants (7.7% against 7.6% in other small cities)676.

I.1.17 Looking at long term levels of unemployment both Brighton and Small cities as a whole have seen a large fall in the numbers of people claiming Jobseekers Allowance. I.1.18 The figure below looks at baseline trends of the numbers of people receiving JSA across Brighton and Hove and other small cities.

675 DWP Working Age Client Group August 2006 – denominator ONS small area working age population estimates 2004 676 DWP Benefits November 2006 – denominator ONS small area working age population estimates 2004

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 171 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

I.1.19 The chart shows that both Brighton and small cities as a whole have seen similar trends in JSA claimant levels over the last 25 years. Both areas experienced a drop in JSA claimants in the late 80s followed by a significant rise in the early 1990s. This rise was particularly significant in Brighton and Hove where JSA numbers were 40% higher than the 1984 base, by contrast JSA levels in small cities never reached the 1984 base figure. Unemployment than decline significantly across Brighton and Hove and small cities alike. I.1.20 JSA claimant levels are now at 30% of 1983 levels in small cities and 37% 1983 levels across Brighton and Hove suggesting that while both areas have experienced falls in JSA levels these have been more significant across Small Cities as a whole. I.1.21 However when we compare the level of decline in JSA claimants from the 1993 peak level we see that in more recent years Brighton has experienced a faster decline in JSA levels than other small cities with JSA levels in 2007 only 27% that of the 1993 levels compared with 32% for small cities as a whole. In other words JSA levels have declined by three quarters between 1993 and 2007.

…however more people cite mental health reasons for worklessness in Brighton I.1.22 However claimants receiving IB for mental health reasons make up a larger proportion of claimants in Brighton (52%) than in the ‘all small cities’ comparator (41%). In total 4.1% of people across Brighton are receiving workless benefits due to mental health reasons compared with 3.1% across the ‘all small cities’ comparator

Children and working age adults are more likely to be income deprived across Brighton than the ‘all small cities’ comparator I.1.23 Brighton and Hove has slightly higher proportions of people receiving Income Support 6.7% against 6% for the ‘all small cities’ comparator677. I.1.24 Children are also more likely to be in out of work households in Brighton (23%) than in other small cities (21%). I.1.25 However there is little difference seen in income deprivation levels for older groups – 27% of older people receive Pension Credit in both Brighton and the ‘all small cities’ comparator678.

Disability benefit levels are slightly lower in Brighton than in other small cities I.1.26 Disability levels across Brighton are slightly below the ‘all small cities’ comparator, with 4.5% of people receiving Disability Living Allowance in the city compared with 5% across the comparator cities679.

Brighton and Hove has lower crime levels than other small cities I.1.27 Overall Crime levels across Brighton and Hove are below the small city average with 69 overall recorded crimes per 1,000 population across the city in 2006/07 compared with 73 across small cities as a whole

677 DWP Benefits November 2006 – denominator ONS small area working age population estimates 2004 678 DWP Benefits November 2006 – denominator ONS small area pensionable age population estimates 2004 679 DWP Nov 2006 – denominator ONS small area total population estimates 2004

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 172 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

However crime across small cities is decreasing at a faster rate than across Brighton as a whole. I.1.28 Crime levels across Brighton and Hove are falling at a lower rate than other small cities (albeit from a lower starting base). Crime levels have dropped by just under 3% between 2003/04 and 2006/07 across Brighton and Hove compared with a fall of 11% across small cities as a whole.

Violent crime in Brighton is above the level of small cities as a whole I.1.29 In contrast to overall crime, violent crime in Brighton is above that of other small cities with just under 30 violent crime incidents per 1000 population across the city in 2006/07 compared with 23 across small cities as a whole. I.1.30 Also in contrast to overall crime, violent crime is increasing across Brighton and Hove. The city has experienced an increase of 82% between 1999/00 and 2006/07. However this increase is slower than the increase experienced across other small cities where violent crime rates have more than doubled (an increase of 118%!).

A higher proportion of small cities LSOAs are in the most deprived 10% in England than in Brighton I.1.31 Brighton and Hove contains 14 Super Output Areas ranked among the most deprived 10% in the England. This represents 8.5% of the LSOAs in the city. Small cities as a whole have a slightly higher proportion of LSOAs ranked among the most deprived 10% with just under 12% of LSOAs in small cities ranked among the most deprived 10% in England. I.1.32 There is also a greater concentration of deprivation in other small cities than in Brighton as a whole. The average score of the most deprived 10% of areas on the ID 2004 in Brighton and Hove is 53.07 whilst the average score of the most deprived 10% of areas in small cities is 57.94 on the IMD 2004.

I.2 Defining the small cities comparator areas

The 42 primary urban areas I.2.1 The State of the English Cities report680 identified a set of 42 primary urban areas in England with populations of greater than 125,000. These were defined based on the official set of Urban Areas (ONS settlements). The ONS settlements were split where the urban boundaries were sprawling e.g. Leeds/Bradford. I.2.2 The following areas were identified as primary urban areas:

680 ODPM, Parkinson et al (March 2006), State of the English Cities.

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 173 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Aldershot Coventry Luton Reading Barnsley Crawley Manchester Rochdale Birkenhead Derby Mansfield Sheffield Birmingham Doncaster Middlesbrough Southampton Blackburn Gloucester Milton Keynes Southend Blackpool Grimsby Newcastle Stoke Bolton Hastings Northampton Sunderland Bournemouth Huddersfield Norwich Swindon Bradford Hull Nottingham Telford Brighton Ipswich Oxford Wakefield Bristol Leeds Peterborough Warrington Burnley Leicester Plymouth Wigan Cambridge Liverpool Portsmouth Worthing Chatham London Preston York

The eight core cities I.2.3 The eight core cities (and London) have populations significantly greater than Brighton and Hove. These areas are unsuitable comparator areas. Therefore the following core city areas have been excluded. • Birmingham • Bristol • Leeds • Liverpool • Manchester • Newcastle • Nottingham • Sheffield Identifying those cities with the right population range I.2.4 In order to provide an appropriate comparator area to Brighton and Hove we excluded cities with a population of less than 150,000 and greater than 350,000. The table below shows a list of primary urban areas with settlement or composite district populations of less than 150,000. Primary District name District District Settlement Urban Area Code Population681 Population682 Blackburn Blackburn with 00EX 141,200 139,300 Darwen Cambridge Cambridge 12UB 117,900 141,000 Gloucester Gloucester 23UE 113,200 137,600 Hastings Hastings 21UD 86,100 125,900 Ipswich Ipswich 42UD 120,400 143,900 Peterborough Peterborough 00JA 163,300 137,700 Telford Telford and Wrekin 00GF 161,900 140,500 Worthing Worthing 45UH 98,700 97,000 York York 00FF 191,800 140,600

681 ONS Mid Year Estimates 2006 682 ONS Settlement definition aggregated Small Area Population Estimates 2004

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 174 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Excluding ‘urban sprawl’ I.2.5 We have also excluded areas that are a collection of interconnected small towns rather than a single urban core. The areas excluded are: Primary Composite District District Reason for exclusion Urban Area name/s Code Chatham Medway 00LC Five small towns Gillingham, Chatham, Rainham, Rochester and Strood rather than one city. The of these towns is Gillingham with a population of 98,000 Aldershot Rushmoor 24UL An urban sprawl area containing Surrey Heath 43UJ Aldershot, Farnborough, Camberley, Farnham, Frogmore, Sanhurst and Yateley. The largest being Aldershot with 58,000 Crawley Crawley 45UE Containing the main area of Crawley Reigate and Banstead 43UF (population 101,000) plus the towns of Horley, Redhill and Reigate clustered around Gatwick Airport Mansfield Ashfield 37UB Containing the main town of Mansfield Mansfield 37UF (population 69,987) plus Sutton and Kirby in Ashfield Burnley Burnley 30UD Containing the main town of Burnley Pendle 30UJ (population 73,000) plus the towns of Nelson, Brierfield, Colne, Barrowford and Padiham Birkenhead Wirral 00CB Containing Birkenhead (pop 83,700) and Ellesmere Port & 13UE the towns of Ellesmere Port, Bebington, Neston Wallasey, Greasby and Morton Grimsby North East 00FC Contains the main towns of Grimsby Lincolnshire (87,500) Cleethorpes (31,000) and Waltham, New Waltham and Humberston Warrington Warrington 00EU Contains the main town of Warrington (80,700) and smaller towns of Great Sankey, Risley, Stockton Heath and Thelwall

Excluding urban areas that form part of larger metropolitan districts I.2.6 Primary urban areas that form part of larger metropolitan districts are also excluded. These areas are likely to be economically tied to their larger urban areas so unsuitable for comparison: Primary Composite District District Reason for exclusion Urban name/s Code Area Rochdale Rochdale 00BQ Part of Greater Manchester Bolton Bolton 00BL Part of Greater Manchester

Boundary issues I.2.7 Primary urban areas that are very over-bounded (i.e. the district boundary contains a significant number of towns and villages that are not part of the city) are also excluded

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 175 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

as although the districts are large the urban areas themselves are too small for comparison moreover any district analysis would be unrepresentative as the urban areas represent less than half the population in the district. Primary District name District District Settlement Urban Area Code Population683 Population684 Barnsley Barnsley 00CC 223,500 71,600 Doncaster Doncaster 00CE 290,300 68,000 Huddersfield Kirklees 00CZ 398,200 146,200 Wakefield Wakefield 00DB 321,200 76,900 Wigan Wigan 00BW 305,500 81,200

The final set I.2.8 This leaves 15 small cities as our comparator areas with district and settlement populations of between 150,000 and 350,000685. Primary Composite District District District Settlement Urban Area name/s Code Population686 Population687 Blackpool Blackpool 00EY 328,800 265,500 Fylde 30UF Wyre 30UQ Coventry Coventry 00CQ 306,600 340,900688 Derby Derby 00FK 236,300 249,100 Hull Kingston upon Hull 00FA 256,200 306,300 Luton Luton 00KA 186,800 236,200689 Milton Milton Keynes 00MG 224,800 192,300 Keynes Northampton Northampton 34UF 200,100 197,100 Norwich Norwich 33UG 251,700 199,200 Broadland 33UC Oxford Oxford 38UC 149,100 154,200 Plymouth Plymouth 00HG 248,100 247,600 Preston Chorley 30UE 342,100 268,600 Preston 30UK South Ribble 30UN Southampton Southampton 00MS 347,600 308,500 Eastleigh 24UD Southend Southend-on-Sea 00KF 329,600 269,200 Castle Point 22UE Rochford 22UL Sunderland Sunderland 00CM 280,600 182,900 Swindon Swindon 00HX 186,600 156,900

683 ONS Mid Year Estimates 2006 684 ONS Settlement definition aggregated Census 2001 685 Oxford included as district population only marginally under 150,000 and settlement population greater than 150,000 686 ONS Mid Year Estimates 2006 687 ONS Settlement definition aggregated Small Area Population Estimates 2004 688 Includes Bedworth 689 Includes Dunstable

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 176 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

Appendix J Acknowledgements

F.1.1 There are many people we must thank for their interest and input to the Reducing Inequality Review, with a special note of gratitude to Richard Butcher-Tuset (Policy Team Manager, Brighton and Hove City Council) and Libby Young (Policy Development Officer, Brighton and Hove City Council / East Brighton NDC Partnership)

Steering group F.1.2 In addition to Richard and Libby, the steering group for this project comprised: • John Austin-Locke - Policy Performance & Community Participation Manager, Housing, Brighton and Hove City Council • Keith Beadle – Community and Voluntary Sector Forum • Paula Black – Interim Research and Consultation Manager, Brighton and Hove City Council • Deborah Georgiou- Chief Executives Policy Team, Brighton and Hove City Council (until August 2007) • Barbara Green - Performance Manager, Brighton and Hove City Council • Nick Hibberd - Head of Housing Needs, Brighton and Hove City Council • Liz Hobden - Local Development Team Manager, Planning, Brighton and Hove City Council • Judith Macho - AD Public Safety (responsibility for Neighbourhood Renewal & NDC) , Brighton and Hove City Council • Furrakh Mirza - Equalities Manager, Brighton and Hove City Council • Simon Newell - 2020 Community Partnership Officer • John Routledge, Voluntary Sector & External Funding Manager, Brighton and Hove City Council • Jugal Sharma - Interim Director of Housing, Brighton and Hove City Council

Additional help J.1.1 We also gratefully acknowledge the time and help provided to Phase 1 of this study by the following: • Paul Allen, Director, eb4u/ Head of Neighbourhood Renewal , Brighton and Hove City Council • Ben Banfield, Performance Team, Strategy & Governance, Brighton & Hove City Council • Clare Baker, Children and Young People’s Trust, Brighton & Hove City Council • Linda Beanlands, Head of Community Safety, Brighton & Hove City Council • Kevin Biscoe, CityStats / BHLIS, Brighton & Hove City Council • Terry Blair-Stevens, Public Health Programme Manager, Brighton & Hove City Council, Brighton & Hove City PCT • Steve Barton, Children and Young People’s Trust, Brighton & Hove City Council • Paul Brewer, Performance & Equalities, Brighton & Hove City Council • Lucy Bryson, Policy and Development Co-ordinator for Asylum Seekers and Refugees Partnership Community Safety Team • Ruth Condon, Partnership Community Safety Team

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 177 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd

• Thurstan Crockett, Head of Sustainability & Environmental Policy Brighton & Hove City Council • Sarah Daly, Children and Young People’s Trust, Brighton & Hove City Council • Rima Desai, Children and Young People’s Trust, Brighton & Hove City Council • Rob Dawson, Business Research Officer, Economic Development, Brighton & Hove City Council • Simon Ewing, CityStats / BHLIS, Brighton & Hove City Council • Johanna Gronlund, Brighton & Hove City PCT • Ryan Haines ACO Brighton & Hove • Sally Hiscock, Chief Officer, Brighton and Hove Community and Voluntary Sector Forum • Barry Hulyer, Chief Executive, The Trust for Developing Communities • Valerie Koffman, Partnership Manager, Brighton and Hove, Learning and Skills Council • Judith Macho, Assistant Director Public Safety, Brighton & Hove City Council • Shane Maxwell, Team Leader ,City Planning Communications & Information & Authority Liaison Officer, Brighton & Hove City Council • Lisa Mytton, Neighbourhood Renewal Programme Support Officer, Brighton & Hove City Council • Bruce Nairne, Step Ahead Research • John Patience, Communities against Drugs development officer • Andrew Renaut, Head of Transport Planning & Policy • Dan Shelley, Learning Partnership Manager, Brighton & Hove City Council • Graham Stevens, Co-ordinator, Brighton & Hove Drug and Alcohol Action Team • Lizzie Swaffield, Traveller Liaison Team, Brighton & Hove City Council • Marilyn Taylor, Neighbourhood Renewal Advisor • Kath Vlcek, Policy Development Officer, Chief Executive's Policy Team, Brighton and Hove City Council • Chris Wilson, Research & Consultation, Brighton and Hove City Council • Becky Woodiwiss, Brighton & Hove City PCT • Di Woolloff, Area Lead for Sussex and Surrey, GOSE • David Wolff, Director, Community University Partnership Programme, University of Brighton • Anthony Zacharzewski, Head of Policy, Brighton and Hove City Council • Jane Zacharzewski, Co-ordinator, EQUAL programme

Developing Appropriate Strategies for Reducing Inequality in Brighton and Hove. Phase 1 Identifying the challenge 178 Oxford Consultants for Social Inclusion (OCSI) and EDuce Ltd